TWI403837B - Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, permanent pattern-forming method using the same and printing substrate - Google Patents

Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, permanent pattern-forming method using the same and printing substrate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI403837B
TWI403837B TW96107432A TW96107432A TWI403837B TW I403837 B TWI403837 B TW I403837B TW 96107432 A TW96107432 A TW 96107432A TW 96107432 A TW96107432 A TW 96107432A TW I403837 B TWI403837 B TW I403837B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
group
exposure
compound
photosensitive composition
photosensitive
Prior art date
Application number
TW96107432A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW200745750A (en
Inventor
Masanobu Takashima
Hiroshi Kamikawa
Kazuhiro Fujimaki
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of TW200745750A publication Critical patent/TW200745750A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI403837B publication Critical patent/TWI403837B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/033Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/46Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
    • C08F2/48Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/22Secondary treatment of printed circuits
    • H05K3/28Applying non-metallic protective coatings
    • H05K3/285Permanent coating compositions
    • H05K3/287Photosensitive compositions

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Macromonomer-Based Addition Polymer (AREA)
  • Non-Metallic Protective Coatings For Printed Circuits (AREA)
  • Graft Or Block Polymers (AREA)

Abstract

This invention provides a photosensitive composition, which can simultaneously realize excellent storage stability and high sensitivity and can form a permanent pattern such as a protective film or an insulating film with high definition in an efficient manner, a photosensitive film, a method for permanent pattern formation using the photosensitive composition, and a printed board comprising a permanent pattern formed by the method for permanent pattern formation. In a preferred embodiment, the photosensitive composition satisfies a relationship of 0.5 < T<SUB>2</SUB>/T<SUB>1</SUB> < 3 WHEREIN T<SUB>1</SUB> represents a time (shortest development time) necessary for removing an unexposed part of a photosensitive composition stacked on a base with a developing solution after stacking of a photosensitive composition containing at least a binder, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a heat crosslinking agent onto a base and standing of the stacked photosensitive composition at 25ºC in a dark place for 20 min; and T<SUB>2</SUB> represents a time (shortest development time) necessary for removing an unexposed part of the photosensitive composition stacked on the base with a developing solution after standing of the stacked photosensitive composition at 40ºC in a dark place for 72 hr.

Description

感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用該感光性組成物之永久圖案形成方法及印刷基板Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method using the same, and printed circuit board

本發明係關於一種能夠以良好效率形成在感度、解像度及保存安定性方面均優異的高精細圖案(保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等)之感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用該感光性組成物之永久圖案形成方法,以及藉由該永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案之印刷基板。The present invention relates to a photosensitive composition capable of forming a high-definition pattern (a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, a solder resist pattern, etc.) excellent in sensitivity, resolution, and storage stability with good efficiency, and using the photosensitive film. A permanent pattern forming method of a photosensitive composition, and a printed substrate of a permanent pattern formed by the permanent pattern forming method.

向來,在形成耐焊圖案等之永久圖案之際,一直是使用一種藉由在支撐體上塗布感光性組成物並予以乾燥而形成的感光層之感光性薄膜。In the past, when a permanent pattern such as a solder resist pattern is formed, a photosensitive film which is formed by applying a photosensitive composition on a support and drying it is always used.

前述之永久圖案的製造方法,例如,可以在形成前述永久圖案的覆銅積層板等之基體上,積層前述之感光性薄膜而形成積層體,並對於該積層體中的前述之感光層進行曝光,於該曝光後,將前述之感光層予以顯像使之形成圖案,然後再藉由進行硬化處理等來形成前述之永久圖案。In the method for producing a permanent pattern described above, for example, a photosensitive film may be laminated on a substrate of a copper-clad laminate or the like on which the permanent pattern is formed to form a laminate, and the photosensitive layer in the laminate may be exposed. After the exposure, the photosensitive layer is developed to form a pattern, and then the permanent pattern is formed by performing a hardening treatment or the like.

關於前述之感光性組成物,已提案一種以達成提昇安定性等做為目的之感光性組成物,其係包括具有1~6個碳原子數的脂肪族羥基之(甲基)丙烯醯基單體、在與(甲基)丙烯酸的共聚物上加成具有環氧基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物之高分子化合物(參照專利文獻1)。With respect to the above-mentioned photosensitive composition, a photosensitive composition for the purpose of achieving stability and the like has been proposed, which includes a (meth)acryl fluorenyl group having an aliphatic hydroxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. A polymer compound having a (meth) acrylate compound having an epoxy group added to a copolymer of (meth)acrylic acid (see Patent Document 1).

又,已提案一種以達成和前述差不多同樣的目的之感光性組成物,其係包括對於在側鏈上具有羧基的共聚物上加成具有脂環式環氧基之不飽和化合物之高分子化合物(參照專利文獻2)。Further, a photosensitive composition which achieves the same purpose as the foregoing has been proposed, and includes a polymer compound in which an unsaturated compound having an alicyclic epoxy group is added to a copolymer having a carboxyl group in a side chain. (Refer to Patent Document 2).

又,提案一種以提昇耐熱性及耐藥品性等之性能做為目的之感光性組成物,其係在組成物中包括具有不飽和雙鍵且持有特定範圍的酸價和分子量之黏合劑聚合物、與具有不飽和雙鍵且持有特定酸價和環氧當量之環氧樹脂(參照專利文獻3)。Further, a photosensitive composition for improving the properties such as heat resistance and chemical resistance is proposed, which comprises polymerizing an adhesive having an unsaturated double bond and holding a specific range of acid value and molecular weight in the composition. An epoxy resin having an unsaturated double bond and holding a specific acid value and an epoxy equivalent (refer to Patent Document 3).

但,即使是此等之感光性組成物,其感度及保存安定性亦不是充分的,尤其在藉由雷射掃描曝光形成圖案潛像之際,由於曝光部的硬化是不夠充分的,因而恐怕會有在鹼性顯像步驟中除去影像部之虞,當在將感光性組成物予以薄膜化成為長條圓筒態的情況下,就會有隨著時間經過而引起端面融著,而在積層該融著部分時,由於積層體之曝光面下降而在曝光時引起曝光圖案斷線等故障之問題。However, even in such photosensitive compositions, the sensitivity and storage stability are not sufficient, especially when the latent image is formed by laser scanning exposure, since the hardening of the exposed portion is insufficient, it is feared In the case where the image portion is removed in the alkaline development step, when the photosensitive composition is thinned into a long cylindrical state, the end face is melted over time, and When the fused portion is laminated, the exposure surface of the laminated body is lowered to cause a problem such as breakage of the exposure pattern during exposure.

又,使用鹼可溶性之環氧樹脂的感光性組成物,在金屬鍍敷處理過程中,係會有其與基板間的密合性變得不佳,發現感光性組成物隆起現象,並觀察到引起鍍敷潛藏現象的問題。Further, in the photosensitive composition using an alkali-soluble epoxy resin, the adhesion between the substrate and the substrate was poor during the metal plating treatment, and the photosensitive composition was found to be bulged and observed. A problem that causes the phenomenon of plating potential.

從而,目前的現狀是:尚未提供一種能夠利用含有指定之高分子,而可以良好效率形成在感度、解像度及保存安定性方面均優異的高精細圖案(保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等)之感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用前述感光性組成物之圖案形成方法,以及藉由該永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案之印刷基板;更且期望進一步地改良開發。Therefore, the current state of the art is that a high-definition pattern (protective film, interlayer insulating film, solder resist pattern, etc.) which is excellent in sensitivity, resolution, and storage stability can be formed with good efficiency by using a specified polymer. The photosensitive composition, the photosensitive film, the pattern forming method using the photosensitive composition, and the printed circuit board of the permanent pattern formed by the permanent pattern forming method are further desired to be further improved.

【專利文獻1】特開平3-172301號公報【專利文獻2】特開平10-10726號公報【專利文獻3】特開平7-199457號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei No. Hei. No. Hei.

本發明係有鑑於此等現狀而完成者,在於解決於習用的前述之諸項問題,並以達成以下之目的做為課題。也就是說,本發明之目的係在於:提供一種感光性組成物之經時顯像安定性為優異的、且能夠以良好效率形成高精細圖案(保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等)之感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用前述感光性組成物及前述感光性薄膜之永久圖案形成方法,以及藉由該永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案之印刷基板。The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, and to achieve the following objects. In other words, the object of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive composition which is excellent in temporal development stability and which can form a high-definition pattern (protective film, interlayer insulating film, solder resist pattern, etc.) with good efficiency. A photosensitive composition, a photosensitive film, a permanent pattern forming method using the photosensitive composition and the photosensitive film, and a permanent printed circuit board formed by the permanent pattern forming method.

用以解決前述課題的手段係如以下所述。亦即:<1>一種感光性組成物,其特徵在於:其係至少包括黏合劑、聚合性化合物、光聚合起始系化合物及熱交聯劑之感光性組成物;當在將前述感光性組成物積層於基體上,於25℃暗處下歷時20分鐘後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T1 ;而對於該被積層於前述基體上的感光性組成物,將該感光層置於40℃暗處下歷時72小時後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T2 之情況,係滿足0.5<T2 /T1 <3之關係。The means for solving the above problems are as follows. That is, <1> a photosensitive composition characterized by comprising at least a photosensitive composition of a binder, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator compound, and a thermal crosslinking agent; The composition is deposited on the substrate, and after 20 minutes in the dark at 25 ° C, the time required for the unexposed portion of the photosensitive composition deposited on the substrate to be removed by the developing solution (the shortest development time) is removed by the developing solution. It is denoted as T 1 ; and for the photosensitive composition laminated on the substrate, the photosensitive layer is placed in a dark place at 40 ° C for 72 hours, and the layer deposited on the substrate is removed by a developing solution. The time required for the unexposed portion of the photosensitive composition (the shortest development time) is expressed as T 2 and satisfies the relationship of 0.5 < T 2 / T 1 < 3.

<2>如前述<1>所記載之感光性組成物,其中黏合劑係包括在側鏈上具有酸性基和乙烯性不飽和鍵之高分子化合物。The photosensitive composition as described in the above <1>, wherein the binder includes a polymer compound having an acidic group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond in a side chain.

<3>如前述<1>至<2>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中黏合劑係從在觸媒共存下將含有環狀醚基的聚合性化合物加成於高分子化合物之一部分的酸性基上而得之物、以及在觸媒共存下將含有羧基的聚合性化合物加成於高分子化合物之一部分或全部的環狀醚基上而得之物中任意選取的高分子化合物;且前述之觸媒係從酸性化合物及中性化合物之中任意選取。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above aspects, wherein the binder is a polymer compound having a cyclic ether group added to the polymer compound in the presence of a catalyst. a part of the acidic group and a polymer which is obtained by adding a carboxyl group-containing polymerizable compound to a part or all of the cyclic ether group of the polymer compound in the presence of a catalyst. a compound; and the aforementioned catalyst is arbitrarily selected from the group consisting of an acidic compound and a neutral compound.

<4>如前述<1>至<3>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中黏合劑係包括在側鏈上具有酸性基、可含有雜環之芳香族基和乙烯性不飽和鍵之高分子化合物。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above aspects, wherein the binder comprises an aromatic group having an acidic group in a side chain, a heterocyclic group, and an ethylenic unsaturated group. The polymer compound of the bond.

<5>如前述<2>至<4>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物係含有0.5~3.0 meq/g之乙烯性不飽和鍵。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <2>, wherein the polymer compound contains an ethylenically unsaturated bond of 0.5 to 3.0 meq/g.

<6>如前述<2>至<5>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物係在側鏈上具有羧基,且在高分子化合物中的前述羧基之含量係1.0~4.0 meq/g。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <2>, wherein the polymer compound has a carboxyl group in a side chain, and the content of the carboxyl group in the polymer compound is 1.0~. 4.0 meq/g.

<7>如前述<2>至<6>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物之平均分子量係10,000以上而小於100,000。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <2>, wherein the polymer compound has an average molecular weight of 10,000 or more and less than 100,000.

<8>如前述<2>至<7>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物係含有20莫耳%以上之以下述構造式(I)所代表的構造單位; 但,在前述之構造式(I)中,R1 、R2 及R3 係代表氫原子或1價的有機基;L係代表有機基,即使沒有也可以;Ar係代表可含有雜環之芳香族基。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <2> to <7>, wherein the polymer compound contains 20 mol% or more of the structural unit represented by the following structural formula (I); However, in the above structural formula (I), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group; L represents an organic group, if not, and Ar represents a heterocyclic ring. Aromatic group.

<9>如前述<1>至<8>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中聚合性化合物係包括具有1個以上的乙烯性不飽和鍵之化合物。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <8>, wherein the polymerizable compound is a compound which has one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.

<10>如前述<1>到<9>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中聚合性化合物係從具有(甲基)丙烯酸基之單體中所選出的至少一種。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the polymerizable compound is at least one selected from the group consisting of a (meth)acryl group.

<11>如前述<1>至<10>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中光聚合起始劑係包括從鹵化羥衍生物、六芳基聯咪唑、有機過氧化物、硫化合物、酮化合物、芳香族鎓鹽、金屬茂類及醯基氧化膦化合物中所選出的至少一種。The photosensitive composition as described in any one of <1> to <10> wherein the photopolymerization initiator includes a halogenated hydroxy derivative, a hexaarylbiimidazole, an organic peroxide, and sulfur. At least one selected from the group consisting of a compound, a ketone compound, an aromatic onium salt, a metallocene, and a fluorenylphosphine oxide compound.

<12>如前述<1>到<11>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑係從環氧化合物、氧雜環丁烷基、聚異氰酸酯化合物、使聚異氰酸酯與嵌段劑反應而得到的化合物、及三聚氰胺衍生物中所選取的至少1種。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the thermal crosslinking agent is an epoxy compound, an oxetane group, a polyisocyanate compound, and a polyisocyanate. At least one selected from the group consisting of a compound obtained by a reaction of a block agent and a melamine derivative.

<13>如前述<1>至<12>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑係鹼不溶性。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <12>, wherein the thermal crosslinking agent is alkali-insoluble.

<14>如前述<1>至<13>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比係0.1~1.5。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <13>, wherein the Mohr ratio of the crosslinking group of the thermal crosslinking agent / the molar ratio of the acidic group of the binder is 0.1~ 1.5.

<15>如前述<1>至<13>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比係0.2~1.3。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <13>, wherein the Mohr ratio of the crosslinking group of the thermal crosslinking agent / the molar ratio of the acidic group of the binder is 0.2~ 1.3.

<16>如前述<1>至<13>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比係0.3~1.2。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <13>, wherein the Mohr ratio of the crosslinking group of the thermal crosslinking agent / the molar ratio of the acidic group of the binder is 0.3~ 1.2.

<17>如前述<1>至<16>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中感光性組成物係包括增感劑。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <16>, wherein the photosensitive composition is a sensitizer.

<18>如前述<1>至<17>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中增感劑係雜嘗環系化合物。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <17>, wherein the sensitizer is a heterocyclic ring-based compound.

<19>如前述<1>至<18>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中其於感光性組成物中係存在著以下的至少任一種:部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的溶劑可溶性之成分的總量為5%以下、及部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量為7%以下。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the photosensitive composition has at least one of the following: a partial structural substitution The total amount of the solvent-soluble components of the group is 5% or less, and the component amount of all the bases having a partial substituent in the structure is 7% or less.

<20>如前述<1>至<18>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中其於感光性組成物中係存在著以下的至少任一種:部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的溶劑可溶性之成分的總量為4%以下、及部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量為5%以下。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the photosensitive composition has at least one of the following: a partial structurally substituted base The total amount of the solvent-soluble components of the group is 4% or less, and the component amount of all the bases having a partial substituent in the structure is 5% or less.

<21>如前述<1>至<18>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中其於感光性組成物中係存在著以下的至少任一種:部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的溶劑可溶性之成分的總量為2%以下、及部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量為4%以下。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the photosensitive composition has at least one of the following: a partial structural substitution The total amount of the solvent-soluble components of the group is 2% or less, and the component amount of all the bases having a partial substituent in the structure is 4% or less.

<22>如前述<1>至<18>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中其於感光性組成物中係存在著以下的至少任一種:部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的溶劑可溶性之成分的總量為1%以下、及部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量為2%以下。The photosensitive composition according to any one of the above-mentioned <1>, wherein the photosensitive composition has at least one of the following: a partial structural substitution The total amount of the solvent-soluble components of the group is 1% or less, and the component amount of all the bases having a partial substituent in the structure is 2% or less.

<23>如前述<19>至<22>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中鹼基性取代基係從1級~3級胺基、4級銨基、胺基三含有基、咪唑含有基、及胍胺基之中任意選取。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <19> to <22>, wherein the base substituent is a 1st to 3rd amino group, a 4th ammonium group, and an amine group III. The base group, the imidazole group, and the guanamine group are optionally selected.

<24>如前述<1>至<23>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中T1 為5~120秒,而T2 為5~240秒。<24> preceding <1> to <23> The photosensitive composition of any one of claims, wherein T 1 is 5 to 120 seconds, and T 2 is 5 to 240 seconds.

<25>如前述<1>至<24>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中在前述曝光時所使用的不會改變在該曝光及顯像後的該感光層之曝光部分的厚度之光的最小能量係0.1~500 mJ/cm2The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <24> which does not change the exposed part of the photosensitive layer after the exposure and imaging in the said exposure. The minimum energy of the thickness of light is 0.1 to 500 mJ/cm 2 .

<26>如前述<1>至<25>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物,其中光聚合起始劑係從醯基氧化膦系化合物及酮化合物之中任意選擇。The photosensitive composition of any one of the above-mentioned <1> to <25>, wherein the photopolymerization initiator is arbitrarily selected from the fluorenyl phosphine oxide compound and the ketone compound.

<27>一種感光性薄膜,其特徵在於:具有支撐體、與在該支撐體上之由如前述<1>至<26>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物形成的感光層。<27> A photosensitive film comprising a support and a photosensitive layer formed of the photosensitive composition according to any one of the above <1> to <26>.

<28>如前述<27>所記載之感光性薄膜,其係在支撐體上依序具有熱可塑性樹脂層和感光層。<28> The photosensitive film according to the above <27>, which has a thermoplastic resin layer and a photosensitive layer in this order on the support.

<29>如前述<27>至<28>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜,其係長尺狀並捲成圓筒狀。The photosensitive film as described in any one of the above-mentioned <27> to <28>, which is a long shape, and is wound into a cylindrical shape.

<30>如前述<27>至<29>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜,其中感光層之厚度係1~100微米。The photosensitive film of any one of the above-mentioned <27>, wherein the photosensitive layer has a thickness of 1 to 100 μm.

<31>如前述<27>至<30>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜,其中支撐體係含有合成樹脂且為透明的。The photosensitive film of any one of the above-mentioned <27>, wherein the support system contains a synthetic resin and is transparent.

<32>如前述<27>至<31>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜,其在感光層上係具有保護薄膜。The photosensitive film as described in any one of the above-mentioned <27> which has a protective film on the photosensitive layer.

<33>一種永久圖案形成裝置,其係至少具有可照射光的光照射機構、與調變來自該光照射機構之光、並對於藉由將如前述<1>到<26>中任一項所記載之感光性組成物塗布在基體表面上、進行乾燥所形成的感光層進行曝光之光調變機構。在前述<33>所記載的永久圖案形成裝置中,前述之光照射機構係向前述之光調變機構照光。前述光調變機構係將來自前述光照射機構的受光予以調變。經由前述光調變機構所調變的光係對著前述感光層而使之曝光。例如,然後進行前述感光層之顯像時,可形成高精細的圖案。一種永久圖案形成方法,其特徵在於:進行曝光並進行顯像。<33> A permanent pattern forming device having at least a light irradiation mechanism that can illuminate light, and a light that is modulated from the light irradiation mechanism, and by any one of <1> to <26> as described above The photosensitive composition described above is coated on a surface of a substrate and dried to form a photosensitive layer for exposure. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <33>, the light irradiation means is configured to illuminate the light modulation means. The light modulation mechanism adjusts the received light from the light irradiation means. The light that is modulated by the optical modulation mechanism is exposed to the photosensitive layer. For example, when the development of the aforementioned photosensitive layer is performed, a high-definition pattern can be formed. A permanent pattern forming method characterized in that exposure is performed and development is performed.

<34>一種永久圖案形成裝置,其係具備如前述<27>至<32>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜,且至少具有可照射光的光照射機構、與調變來自該光照射機構之光、並對於前述感光性組成物中的感光層進行曝光之光調變機構。在前述<34>所記載的永久圖案形成裝置中,前述之光照射機構係向前述之光調變機構照光。前述光調變機構係將來自前述光照射機構的受光予以調變。經由前述光調變機構所調變的光係對著前述感光層而使之曝光。例如,然後進行前述感光層之顯像時,可形成高精細的圖案。<34> A permanent pattern forming apparatus comprising the photosensitive film according to any one of <27> to <32>, wherein at least the light irradiation means capable of illuminating light and the modulation are derived from the light irradiation A light modulation mechanism that exposes the light of the mechanism and exposes the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive composition. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <34>, the light irradiation means is configured to illuminate the light modulation means. The light modulation mechanism adjusts the received light from the light irradiation means. The light that is modulated by the optical modulation mechanism is exposed to the photosensitive layer. For example, when the development of the aforementioned photosensitive layer is performed, a high-definition pattern can be formed.

<35>如前述<33>至<34>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其係由更進一步地具有基於光調變機構形成的圖案資訊而生成控制信號之圖案信號生成機構所構成,並隨著該圖案信號生成機構所產生的控制信號來調變從光照射機構所照射的光。在前述<35>所記載之永久圖案形成裝置中,係藉由使得前述之光調變機構具有前述之圖案信號生成機構,而得以隨著該由圖案信號生成機構所產生的控制信號來調變從前述光照射機構所照射的光。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the above-mentioned <33>, wherein the pattern signal generating means for generating a control signal based on the pattern information formed by the optical modulation means is further provided. It is configured to modulate the light irradiated from the light irradiation means in accordance with a control signal generated by the pattern signal generating means. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <35>, the optical modulation mechanism described above is provided with the pattern signal generating means described above, and is modulated by the control signal generated by the pattern signal generating means. Light emitted from the light irradiation mechanism.

<36>如前述<33>至<35>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中光調變機構係由具有n個圖素部所構成,並能夠隨著所形成的圖案資訊來控制在該n個圖素部中之連續配置的小於n個之任意的前述圖素部。在前述<36>所記載之永久圖案形成裝置之中,係藉由隨著圖案資訊來控制前述光調變機構中的n個圖素部中連續配置的小於n個之任意的圖素部,而得以高速地調變從前述之光照射機構所照射的光。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the above-mentioned <33>, wherein the light modulation mechanism is composed of n pixel parts and is capable of following the formed pattern information. It is controlled that less than n of the aforementioned pixel parts are continuously arranged in the n pixel parts. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <36>, by controlling the pattern elements to control any of the n pixel elements that are continuously arranged in the n pixel elements in the light modulation mechanism, It is possible to modulate the light irradiated from the aforementioned light irradiation means at a high speed.

<37>如前述<33>至<36>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中光調變機構係為空間光調變元件。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the items <33> to <36> wherein the optical modulation means is a spatial light modulation element.

<38>如前述<37>所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中空間光調變元件係為數位微鏡片裝置(DMD)。<38> The permanent pattern forming device according to the above <37>, wherein the spatial light modulation element is a digital microlens device (DMD).

<39>如前述<36>至<38>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中圖素部係微鏡片。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the items <36> to <38> wherein the pixel portion is a microlens.

<40>如前述<33>至<39>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中光照射機構係可以合併2條以上之光來進行照射。在前述<40>所記載之永久圖案形成裝置中,其係藉由可以合併2條以上之光來進行照射的前述之光照射機構,而得以焦點深度深的曝光之光來進行曝光。結果,使得前述之感光層的曝光乃可以極高精細度地進行。例如,然後進行前述感光層之顯像時,就可形成極高精細的圖案。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the light-irradiating means can combine two or more lights to perform irradiation. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <40>, the light irradiation means that can illuminate by combining two or more lights is used to expose the light with a deep exposure depth. As a result, the exposure of the aforementioned photosensitive layer can be performed with extremely high definition. For example, when the development of the photosensitive layer is performed, an extremely fine pattern can be formed.

<41>如前述<33>至<40>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成裝置,其中光照射機構係具有複數的雷射、多模光纖、及將從該複數的雷射所分別照射的雷射光予以聚光而使之與前述多模光纖維相結合之集合光學系統。在前述<41>所記載之永久圖案形成裝置中,前述之光照射機構係藉由以前述的集合光系統而將從前述之複數的雷射所個別照射的雷射光予以集光,並且可以結合到前述之多模光纖維上,而得以焦點深度深的曝光之光來進行曝光。結果,使得前述之感光層的曝光乃可以極高精細度地進行。例如,然後進行前述感光層之顯像時,就可形成極高精細的圖案。The permanent pattern forming apparatus according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the light-irradiating mechanism has a plurality of lasers, a multimode optical fiber, and each of the plurality of lasers is irradiated The laser light is collected to form a collection optical system in combination with the aforementioned multimode optical fiber. In the permanent pattern forming apparatus according to the above <41>, the light irradiation means collects laser light that is individually irradiated from the plurality of laser beams by the above-described collective light system, and can be combined. The above-mentioned multimode optical fiber is exposed to light having a deep exposure depth. As a result, the exposure of the aforementioned photosensitive layer can be performed with extremely high definition. For example, when the development of the photosensitive layer is performed, an extremely fine pattern can be formed.

<42>一種永久圖案形成方法,其特徵在於:至少包括在加熱及加壓中的至少任一種之下,將如前述<27>至<32>中任一項所記載之感光性薄膜中的感光層積層於基體的表面上之後,再對於該感光層進行曝光。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned <27> to <32>, wherein at least one of the above-mentioned <27> to <32> is used in at least one of the heating and the pressurization. After the photosensitive layer is laminated on the surface of the substrate, the photosensitive layer is exposed.

<43>如前述<42>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中曝光係使用350~415奈米波長之雷射光。<43> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <42>, wherein the exposure system uses laser light having a wavelength of 350 to 415 nm.

<44>如前述<42>到<43>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中曝光係基於形成的圖案資訊來進行使形成影像圖樣。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of <42> to <43> wherein the exposure is based on the formed pattern information to form an image pattern.

<45>如前述<42>到<44>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中曝光係使用曝光頭,其係配備光照射機構、及具有接受來自前述光照射機構的光並予以射出之n個(但,n為2以上之自然數)的2次元狀排列之圖素部、能夠因應圖案資訊而控制前述之圖素部的光調變機構之曝光頭,且係經配置以使得前述圖素部的列方向與該曝光頭的描掃方向形成預定之設定傾斜角度θ,對於前述之曝光頭,藉著使用圖素部指定機構,由可供使用的前述圖素部之中指定使用於N次曝光(但,N為2以上之自然數)的前述圖素部;對於前述之曝光頭,藉著圖素部控制機構,依照使得僅有經前述使用圖素部指定機構所指定的前述圖素部參與曝光之方式來進行控制前述圖素部;及使前述曝光頭相對於掃描方向移動而對於前述感光層進行曝光。於前述<45>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,對於前述之曝光頭,係藉著使用圖素部指定機構,由可供使用的前述圖素部之中指定使用於N次曝光(但,N為2以上之自然數)的前述圖素部之步驟;並藉著圖素部控制機構,依照使得僅有經前述使用圖素部指定機構所指定的前述圖素部參與曝光之方式來控制前述圖素部。藉由使前述曝光頭相對於掃描方向移動而對於前述感光層進行曝光,乃可以將因前述曝光頭之安裝位置及安裝角度的偏差而引起形成於前述感光層之被曝光面上的前述圖案之解像度的變異及濃度不均一現象予以均一化。結果,前述感光層之曝光乃得以高精細地進行,然後藉由進行前述感光層之顯像而形成高精細的圖案。The method for forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the exposure system uses an exposure head, which is provided with a light irradiation mechanism, and has light received from the light irradiation mechanism and is given a pixel unit of a quadratic arrangement in which n (but, n is a natural number of 2 or more), an exposure head capable of controlling the optical modulation mechanism of the pixel unit in response to pattern information, and configured The column direction of the pixel portion and the scanning direction of the exposure head are formed to form a predetermined set inclination angle θ, and the exposure head is used among the aforementioned pixel portions by using the pixel portion specifying mechanism. Specifying the aforementioned pixel portion for N exposure (however, N is a natural number of 2 or more); for the above-mentioned exposure head, by the pixel portion control mechanism, according to the above-mentioned use of the pixel specifying mechanism The specified pixel portion is subjected to exposure to control the pixel portion; and the exposure head is moved in the scanning direction to expose the photosensitive layer. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <45>, in the exposure head described above, the pixel portion specifying means is used to specify N exposures among the available pixel portions (however, a step of the aforementioned pixel portion of N being a natural number of 2 or more; and controlling by the pixel control unit in such a manner that only the aforementioned pixel portion specified by the use of the pixel specifying unit is involved in exposure The aforementioned picture part. Exposing the photosensitive layer to the exposure head by moving the exposure head relative to the scanning direction may cause the pattern formed on the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer due to variations in the mounting position and the mounting angle of the exposure head. The variation of resolution and the phenomenon of density heterogeneity are uniformized. As a result, the exposure of the photosensitive layer is performed with high precision, and then a high-definition pattern is formed by performing development of the photosensitive layer.

<46>如前述<45>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中曝光係可藉由複數個曝光頭來進行,使用圖素部指定手段係從藉由複數個前述曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域之參與曝光的圖素部中,指定在前述頭間連繫區域中的用以實現N次曝光所使用之前述圖素部。於前述<46>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,曝光係藉由複數個曝光頭來進行,使用圖素部指定手段係從藉由複數個前述曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域之參與曝光的圖素部中,指定在前述頭間連繫區域中的用以實現N次曝光所使用之前述圖素部,藉以將因前述曝光頭之安裝位置及安裝角度的偏差而引起形成於前述感光層之被曝光面上的前述圖案之解像度的變異及濃度不均一現象予以均一化。結果,前述感光層之曝光乃得以高精細地進行。例如,然後,再藉由進行前述感光層之顯像而形成高精細的圖案。<46> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <45>, wherein the exposure system is performed by a plurality of exposure heads, and the exposed portion formed by the plurality of exposure heads is used by the pixel portion specifying means. In the pixel portion participating in the exposure of the inter-head contact region of the repeated exposure range, the pixel portion used for realizing N exposure in the inter-head contact region is designated. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <46>, the exposure is performed by a plurality of exposure heads, and the pixel portion specifying means is used to repeatedly expose the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads. In the pixel portion of the range of the head-to-head contact area, the pixel portion for use in the N-th exposure is specified in the inter-head contact region, whereby the mounting position of the exposure head is The variation in the mounting angle causes the variation in the resolution of the pattern formed on the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer and the density unevenness to be uniformized. As a result, the exposure of the photosensitive layer described above is performed with high precision. For example, a high-definition pattern is then formed by performing the development of the aforementioned photosensitive layer.

<47>如前述<46>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中曝光係可藉由複數個曝光頭來進行,使用圖素部指定手段係從藉由複數個前述曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域以外之參與曝光的圖素部中,指定在前述頭間連繫區域以外之區域中的用以實現N次曝光所使用之前述圖素部。於前述<47>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,曝光係可藉由複數個曝光頭來進行,使用圖素部指定手段係從藉由複數個前述曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域以外之參與曝光的圖素部中,指定在前述頭間連繫區域以外之區域中的用以實現N次曝光所使用之前述圖素部,乃可以將因前述曝光頭之安裝位置及安裝角度的偏差而引起形成於前述感光層之被曝光面上的前述圖案之解像度的變異及濃度不均一現象予以均一化。結果,前述感光層之曝光乃得以高精細地進行。例如,然後,藉由進行前述感光層之顯像而形成高精細的圖案。<47> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <46>, wherein the exposure system is performed by a plurality of exposure heads, and the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads is used by the pixel portion specifying means. In the pixel portion participating in the exposure other than the inter-head contact region of the repeated exposure range, the pixel portion used for realizing N exposure in the region other than the inter-head contact region is specified. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <47>, the exposure system can be performed by a plurality of exposure heads, and the pixel portion specifying means is used to repeat from the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads. In the pixel portion participating in the exposure other than the connection region between the heads of the exposure range, the aforementioned pixel portion used for realizing N exposure in the region other than the inter-head contact region may be specified as described above. The variation in the resolution of the pattern formed on the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer and the density unevenness are uniformized by variations in the mounting position and the mounting angle of the exposure head. As a result, the exposure of the photosensitive layer described above is performed with high precision. For example, a high-definition pattern is then formed by performing development of the aforementioned photosensitive layer.

<48>如前述<45>到<47>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中設定傾斜角度θ係經設定成具有符合θ≧θideal 的關係,而前述之θideal ,相對於N次曝光之次數N、圖素部之列方向的個數s、前述圖素部之列方向之間隔p、及於曝光頭呈傾斜狀態下沿著垂直於該曝光頭描掃方向的方向上之圖素部的列方向之間距δ而言,係符合下式:s psin θideal ≧N δ。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the above-mentioned, wherein the set inclination angle θ is set to have a relationship conforming to θ ≧ θ ideal , and the aforementioned θ ideal is relative to The number N of N exposures, the number s of the direction of the pixel portion, the interval p between the directions of the pixel portions, and the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction of the exposure head when the exposure head is inclined The distance δ between the column directions of the pixel portion is in accordance with the following formula: s psin θ ideal ≧N δ.

<49>如前述<45>到<48>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中N次曝光之N係為3以上之自然數。於前述<49>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,係藉由使N次曝光之N成為3以上之自然數,來進行多重繪圖。結果,由於補正的效果,乃可以將因前述曝光頭之安裝位置及安裝角度的偏差而引起形成於前述感光層之被曝光面上的前述圖案之解像度的變異及濃度不均一現象,予以更精密地均一化。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned <45>, wherein the N-time exposure N is a natural number of 3 or more. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <49>, the multi-drawing is performed by setting N of the N exposures to a natural number of 3 or more. As a result, due to the effect of the correction, the variation of the resolution and the density unevenness of the pattern formed on the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer due to the variation in the mounting position and the mounting angle of the exposure head can be made more precise. The ground is uniform.

<50>如前述<45>到<49>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中使用圖素部指定機構係具備:光點位置檢出機構,其係用以檢測出經由圖素部而生成、當做構成被曝光面上的曝光範圍之圖素單位的在被曝光面上之光點位置的機構;以及圖素部選擇機構,其係基於前述光點位置檢出機構所檢測出的結果,來選擇用以實現N次曝光所使用的圖素部之機構。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the aspects of the present invention, wherein the pixel portion specifying means includes: a spot position detecting means for detecting a via element a mechanism for generating a position of a spot on the surface to be exposed which is a pixel unit of an exposure range on the exposed surface; and a pixel selection mechanism that is detected based on the spot position detecting means As a result, the mechanism for realizing the pixel portion used for N exposures is selected.

<51>如前述<45>到<50>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中使用圖素部指定機構係以行為單位來指定用以實現N次曝光上所使用的使用圖素部。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the above-mentioned <45>, wherein the pixel specifying means is used to specify a use factor for use in N exposures in units of rows. unit.

<52>如前述<50>到<51>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中光點位置檢出機構,係基於所檢出的至少2個光點位置,來界定在使曝光頭呈傾斜狀態下,被曝光面上光點之列方向、與前述曝光頭的掃描方向所形成的實質傾斜角度θ ’,且圖素部選擇機構係依照得以達成吸收前述之實質傾斜角度θ ’與設定傾斜角度θ間之誤差的方式來選擇使用圖素部。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the spot position detecting means defines the exposure based on the detected at least two spot positions. When the head is inclined, the direction of the light spot on the exposed surface is substantially inclined angle θ ' formed by the scanning direction of the exposure head, and the pixel selection mechanism is configured to absorb the aforementioned substantial tilt angle θ ' The pixel portion is selected in such a manner as to set an error between the tilt angles θ.

<53>如前述<52>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中實質傾斜角度θ ’係為在使曝光頭呈傾斜之狀態下,被曝光面上光點之列方向、與前述曝光頭的掃描方向所形成的複數個實質傾斜角度之平均值、中央值、最大值及最小值中之任一者。<53> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <52>, wherein the substantial inclination angle θ′ is a direction of the light spot on the exposed surface and a scan of the exposure head in a state where the exposure head is tilted Any of a plurality of substantial tilt angles formed by the direction, a median value, a maximum value, and a minimum value.

<54>如前述<50>到<53>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中圖素部選擇機構係基於實質傾斜角度θ ’來導出滿足t tan θ ’=N(惟,N係代表N次曝光之次數N)的關係之接近t之自然數T,並選擇於配列有m行(惟,m係代表2以上之自然數)的圖素部中之第1行到第T行的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the items <50> to <53> wherein the pixel portion selecting mechanism derives based on the substantial tilt angle θ' to satisfy t tan θ '=N (only, N It is a natural number T close to the relationship t of the number N of exposures, and is selected from the first row to the Tth of the pixel portion in which m rows (only m is a natural number of 2 or more) are arranged. The aforementioned pixel portion of the line is used as the pixel unit.

<55>如前述<50>到<54>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中圖素部選擇機構係基於實質傾斜角度θ ’來導出滿足t tan θ ’=N(惟,N係代表N次曝光之次數N)的關係之接近t之自然數T,將於配列有m行(惟,m係代表2以上之自然數)的圖素部中之第(T+1)行到第m行的前述圖素部界定為不使用圖素部,並選擇該不使用圖素部以外的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部。<55> The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of <50> to <54> wherein the pixel portion selecting mechanism derives based on the substantial tilt angle θ' to satisfy t tan θ '=N (only, N The natural number T which is close to t, which is the relationship of the number of N times of exposure N, will be the (T+1)th line to the pixel part in which the m line (only m is a natural number of 2 or more) is arranged. The aforementioned pixel portion of the m line is defined as not using the pixel portion, and the pixel portion other than the pixel portion is selected as the use pixel portion.

<56>如前述<50>到<55>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中圖素部選擇機構係在至少包括藉由複數個圖素部列所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的區域中之(1)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域、及曝光不足區域的面積總和成為最小的方式來選擇使用圖素部之機構,(2)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域的圖素單位數等於曝光不足區域的圖素單位數之方式來選擇使用圖素部之機構,(3)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域的面積成為最小、且不產生曝光不足區域的方式來選擇使用圖素部之機構,及(4)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光不足區域的面積成為最小、且不產生曝光過多區域的方式來選擇使用圖素部之機構中之任一者。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the above-mentioned, wherein the pixel selection mechanism is at least included on an exposed surface formed by a plurality of pixel portions. (1) in the region of the repeated exposure range selects the mechanism using the pixel portion in such a manner as to minimize the total area of the exposure of the ideal N exposures and the area of the underexposed region, and (2) according to the ideal The number of pixel units of the overexposed area of the N exposures is equal to the number of pixel units of the underexposed area to select the mechanism using the pixel part, and (3) according to the area of the exposed area for the ideal N exposures. Selecting the mechanism using the pixel portion to minimize the amount of the underexposed region, and (4) in such a manner as to minimize the area of the underexposed region for the ideal N exposures and not to generate an excessively exposed region. Choose any of the organizations that use the Graphical Department.

<57>如前述<50>到<56>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中圖素部選擇機構係在藉由複數個圖素部列所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域中之(1)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域、及曝光不足區域的面積總和成為最小的方式,從關於前述頭間連繫區域之曝光的圖素部來界定不使用圖素部,並選擇該不使用圖素部以外的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部之機構,(2)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域的圖素單位數等於曝光不足區域的圖素單位數之方式,從關於前述頭間連繫區域之曝光的圖素部來界定不使用圖素部,並選擇該不使用圖素部以外的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部之機構,(3)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光過多區域的面積成為最小、且不產生曝光不足區域的方式,從關於前述頭間連繫區域之曝光的圖素部來界定不使用圖素部,並選擇該不使用圖素部以外的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部之機構,及(4)依照使得對於理想的N次曝光之曝光不足區域的面積成為最小、且不產生曝光過多區域的方式,從關於前述頭間連繫區域之曝光的圖素部來界定不使用圖素部,並選擇該不使用圖素部以外的前述圖素部來做為使用圖素部之機構中之任一者。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned, wherein the pixel selection mechanism is repeated exposure on an exposed surface formed by a plurality of pixel portions. (1) in the range of the head-to-head contact area, in order to minimize the total area of the exposed area of the ideal N exposures and the area of the underexposed area, the pixel from the exposure of the aforementioned inter-head contact area The part defines the non-use of the pixel part, and selects the aforementioned pixel part other than the pixel part as the mechanism using the pixel part, and (2) the figure which makes the exposure excess area for the ideal N exposures. The number of prime units is equal to the number of pixel units of the underexposed area, and the pixel portion is not defined from the pixel portion of the exposure of the inter-head contact region, and the aforementioned pixel other than the pixel portion is selected. The part is used as the mechanism using the pixel part, and (3) the exposure from the area between the heads is made in such a manner as to minimize the area of the excessive exposure area for the ideal N exposures and does not generate an underexposed area. The picture of the Ministry The pixel portion is not used, and the pixel portion other than the pixel portion is selected as the mechanism for using the pixel portion, and (4) the area of the underexposed region for the ideal N exposure is made The method of minimizing the area in which the overexposed area is not generated, and defining the non-use of the pixel part from the pixel part of the exposure of the inter-head contact area, and selecting the pixel part other than the pixel part as the Use any of the institutions of the Graphic Department.

<58>如前述<57>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中不使圖素部係以行為單位加以界定。<58> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <57>, wherein the pixel portion is not defined in units of rows.

<59>如前述<45>到<58>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其為了指定使用圖素部指定機構中的使用圖素部,乃於可供使用的前述圖素部之中,相對於N次曝光之N,只使用構成每(N-1)列的圖素部列之前述圖素部來進行參照曝光。於前述<59>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,為了指定使用圖素部指定機構中的使用圖素部,乃於可供使用的前述圖素部之中,相對於N次曝光之N,只使用構成每(N-1)列的圖素部列之前述圖素部來進行參照曝光,而可以得到略呈1次繪圖之單純的圖案。結果,即可容易地指定前述頭間連繫區域中的前述圖素部。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned <45>, wherein the pixel unit is usable in order to specify the use of the pixel unit in the pixel specifying unit. Among them, the reference exposure is performed using only the pixel portion constituting the pixel portion of each (N-1) column with respect to N of the N exposures. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <59>, in order to specify the use of the pixel portion in the pixel specifying unit, among the pixel portions that are usable, the N of the N exposures is The reference exposure is performed using only the above-described pixel portion constituting the pixel portion of each (N-1) column, and a simple pattern of a slightly one-time drawing can be obtained. As a result, the aforementioned pixel portion in the aforementioned inter-head contact region can be easily specified.

<60>如前述<45>到<58>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其為了指定使用圖素部指定機構中的使用圖素部,乃於可供使用的前述圖素部之中,相對於N次曝光之N,只使用構成每1/N行的圖素部行之前述圖素部來進行參照曝光。於前述<60>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,為了指定使用圖素部指定機構中的使用圖素部,乃於可供使用的前述圖素部之中,相對於N次曝光之N,只使用構成每1/N行的圖素部行之前述圖素部來進行參照曝光,而可以得到略呈1次繪圖之單純的永久圖案。結果,即可容易地指定前述頭間連繫區域中的前述圖素部。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned <45>, wherein the pixel unit is usable in order to specify the use of the pixel unit in the pixel specifying unit. Among them, with respect to N of the N exposures, only the pixel portion constituting the pixel portion line per 1/N row is used for reference exposure. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <60>, in order to specify the use of the pixel portion in the pixel specifying unit, among the pixel portions that are usable, the N of the N exposures is The reference exposure is performed using only the aforementioned pixel portion constituting each of the 1/N rows of the pixel portion, and a simple permanent pattern of a slightly one-time drawing can be obtained. As a result, the aforementioned pixel portion in the aforementioned inter-head contact region can be easily specified.

<61>如前述<45>到<60>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中使用圖素部指定機構係具有做為光點位置檢出機構之狹縫和光檢出器、以及做為圖素部選擇機構的連接於前述光檢出器之演算裝置。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the above-mentioned, wherein the pixel specifying unit has a slit and a photodetector as a spot position detecting mechanism, and The calculation device connected to the photodetector as the pixel selection mechanism.

<62>如前述<45>到<61>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中N次曝光之N係3以上7以下之自然數。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned <45>, wherein N of the N exposures is a natural number of 3 or more and 7 or less.

<63>如前述<45>到<62>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中光調變機構係更進一步具有基於所形成的圖案資訊而生成控制信號之圖案信號生成機構所構成,並隨著該圖案信號生成機構所產生的控制信號來調變從光照射機構所照射的光。在前述<63>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,藉由使光調變機構具有前述之圖案信號生成機構,以使隨著該圖案信號生成機構所產生的控制信號來調變從前述之光照射機構所照射的光。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above aspects, wherein the optical modulation mechanism further comprises a pattern signal generating means for generating a control signal based on the formed pattern information. And modulating the light irradiated from the light irradiation means with the control signal generated by the pattern signal generating means. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <63>, the light modulation means includes the pattern signal generating means to modulate the light from the light by the control signal generated by the pattern signal generating means. The light irradiated by the illumination mechanism.

<64>如前述<45>至<63>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中光調變機構係為空間光調變元件。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of <45> to <63> wherein the light modulation mechanism is a spatial light modulation element.

<65>如前述<64>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中空間光調變元件係為數位微鏡片裝置(DMD)。<65> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <64>, wherein the spatial light modulation element is a digital microlens device (DMD).

<66>如前述<45>到<65>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中圖素部係微鏡片。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the items <45>, wherein the pixel portion is a microlens.

<67>如前述<45>到<66>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其係具有以使表示圖案資訊之圖案的預定部分之尺寸、與可以藉由所指定的使用圖素部予以實現的對應部之尺寸一致的方式,來變換前述之圖案資訊的變換機構。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of <45> to <66> which has a predetermined portion of a pattern indicating pattern information and a useable pixel which can be specified by The conversion mechanism of the above-described pattern information is converted in such a manner that the size of the corresponding portion to be realized is the same.

<68>如前述<45>到<67>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中光照射機構係可以合併2條以上之光來進行照射。於前述<68>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,由於可以光照射機構係可以合併2條以上之光來進行照射,因而可以曝光焦點深度深的曝光光來進行曝光。結果,前述感光性薄膜之曝光乃得以極高精細地進行。例如,然後,再進行前述感光層之顯像時,可以形成極高精細的圖案。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the light-irradiating means can combine two or more lights to perform irradiation. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <68>, since the light irradiation mechanism can combine two or more lights to perform irradiation, exposure light having a deep depth of focus can be exposed to perform exposure. As a result, the exposure of the photosensitive film described above is performed extremely finely. For example, when the development of the photosensitive layer is performed again, an extremely fine pattern can be formed.

<69>如前述<45>到<68>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中光照射機構係具有複數個雷射、多模光纖、及將從該複數個雷射所分別照射的雷射光予以集光而使之與前述的多模光纖相結合之集合光學系統。於前述<69>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,係可以藉由前述光照射機構,將由前述之複數個雷射所分別照射的雷射光予以聚光,而使之與前述的多模光纖相結合之集合光學系統,因而可以曝光焦點深度深的曝光光來進行曝光。結果,前述感光性薄膜之曝光乃得以極高精細地進行。例如,然後,再進行前述感光層之顯像時,可以形成極高精細的圖案。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the light-irradiating mechanism has a plurality of lasers, a multimode optical fiber, and each of the plurality of lasers is irradiated The laser light is collected to form a combined optical system in combination with the aforementioned multimode fiber. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <69>, the laser light irradiated by the plurality of lasers can be condensed by the light irradiation means to be combined with the multimode fiber described above. In combination with the collective optical system, exposure light having a deep depth of focus can be exposed for exposure. As a result, the exposure of the photosensitive film described above is performed extremely finely. For example, when the development of the photosensitive layer is performed again, an extremely fine pattern can be formed.

<70>如前述<42>到<69>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其係在進行曝光之後,再對於感光層進行顯像處理。於前述<70>所記載之永久圖案形成方法中,其係在進行曝光之後,再對於感光層進行顯像處理,就可以形成高精細的圖案。The method of forming a permanent pattern according to any one of the items <42> to <69>, wherein after the exposure is performed, the photosensitive layer is subjected to a development process. In the permanent pattern forming method according to the above <70>, after the exposure is performed, the photosensitive layer is subjected to development processing to form a high-definition pattern.

<71>如前述<70>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其係在進行顯像之後,再進行永久圖案之形成。<71> The permanent pattern forming method according to <70> above, wherein the permanent pattern is formed after the development.

<72>如前述<71>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其係在進行顯像之後,再對於感光層進行硬化處理。<72> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <71>, wherein the photosensitive layer is subjected to a curing treatment after the development.

<73>如前述<72>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其中硬化處理係全面曝光處理、與在120~200℃下進行的全面加熱處理中之至少任一種。<73> The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <72>, wherein the hardening treatment is at least one of a total exposure treatment and a total heat treatment at 120 to 200 °C.

<74>如前述<72>到<73>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法,其係形成保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案中之至少任一種。前述<74>所記載之永久圖案形成方法,由於其係形成保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案中之至少任一種的緣故,所以藉由該膜所具有絕緣性、耐熱性等,可以保護配線以避免來自外部的衝擊及彎曲等。The permanent pattern forming method according to any one of the above-mentioned <72>, wherein at least one of a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a solder resist pattern is formed. The permanent pattern forming method according to the above <74> is formed by forming at least one of a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a solder resist pattern, so that the film can be protected by insulation, heat resistance, and the like. Wiring to avoid impact and bending from the outside.

<75>一種印刷基板,其特徵在於:係藉由如前述<42>到<74>中任一項所記載之永久圖案形成方法來形成之永久圖案。<75> A printed circuit board, which is a permanent pattern formed by the permanent pattern forming method according to any one of <42> to <74>.

依照本發明即可以解決習用之問題,並且藉由含有指定的高分子化合物,可以提供一種感光性組成物之經時顯像安定性為優異的、且能夠以良好效率形成高精細圖案(保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等)之感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用前述感光性薄膜之永久圖案形成方法,以及藉由該永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案之印刷基板。According to the present invention, the problem of the conventional use can be solved, and by containing a specified polymer compound, it is possible to provide a photosensitive composition which is excellent in temporal development stability and can form a high-definition pattern with good efficiency (protective film A photosensitive composition such as an interlayer insulating film and a solder resist pattern, a photosensitive film, a permanent pattern forming method using the photosensitive film, and a permanent printed circuit board formed by the permanent pattern forming method.

另外,藉由規定高分子化合物與共存的化合物之種類及量,可以提供一種熱交聯劑存在下之經時顯像安定性為優異的感光性組成物、感光性薄膜、使用前述感光性組成物之永久圖案形成方法,以及藉由該永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案之印刷基板。In addition, by specifying the type and amount of the polymer compound and the coexisting compound, it is possible to provide a photosensitive composition excellent in temporal development stability in the presence of a thermal crosslinking agent, a photosensitive film, and the use of the aforementioned photosensitive composition. A permanent pattern forming method of the object, and a printed substrate of the permanent pattern formed by the permanent pattern forming method.

【用以實施發明之最佳形態】[The best form for implementing the invention] (感光性組成物)(photosensitive composition)

本發明之感光性組成物係至少包括黏合劑、聚合性化合物、光聚合起始劑及熱交聯劑,較宜是含有增感劑,更且進一步地視情況需要而含有著色顏料、填充顏料、熱硬化劑(熱交聯劑之硬化促進劑)、熱聚合禁止劑、界面活性劑等之其他的成分。The photosensitive composition of the present invention comprises at least a binder, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a thermal crosslinking agent, preferably containing a sensitizer, and further containing a coloring pigment or a filler pigment as occasion demands A thermosetting agent (hardening accelerator for a thermal crosslinking agent), a thermal polymerization inhibiting agent, and other components such as a surfactant.

又,在對於藉由前述感光性組成物構成的感光層進行曝光顯像的情況時,於該曝光及顯像後不使前述感光層曝光部分之厚度改變的前述曝光所使用的最小能量較宜是0.1~500 mJ/cm2Further, in the case of performing exposure development on the photosensitive layer composed of the photosensitive composition, it is preferable to use the minimum energy for the exposure which does not change the thickness of the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer after the exposure and development. It is 0.1~500 mJ/cm 2 .

在將前述之感光層予以曝光顯像的情況下,在前述曝光時所使用的不會改變在該曝光及顯像後的該感光層之曝光部分的厚度之光的最小能量只要是0.1~500 mJ/cm2 即可,並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇例如,較宜是0.2~200 mJ/cm2 ,更宜是0.5~100 mJ/cm2 ,特佳為1~50 mJ/cm2In the case where the photosensitive layer is subjected to exposure development, the minimum energy of the light used in the above-mentioned exposure which does not change the thickness of the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer after the exposure and development is 0.1 to 500. mJ/cm 2 is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected, for example, from 0.2 to 200 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably from 0.5 to 100 mJ/cm 2 , particularly preferably from 1 to 2 , depending on the purpose. 50 mJ/cm 2 .

當前述之最小能量為小於0.1 mJ/cm2 時,在黃色燈下加工處理製程中,就會有發生泛白的情形;當超過500 mJ/cm2 時,則曝光所需要的時間變長、處理速度變慢的情況。When the minimum energy mentioned above is less than 0.1 mJ/cm 2 , in the process of processing under the yellow lamp, whitening may occur; when it exceeds 500 mJ/cm 2 , the time required for exposure becomes long, The processing speed is slow.

本文中所指的「於前述曝光時所使用的不會改變在該曝光及顯像後的該感光層之曝光部分的厚度之光的最小能量」係為所謂之顯像感度,例如,可以從顯示在前述感光層曝光時之於前述曝光中所使用的光能量(曝光量)、和藉由接著前述曝光繼續進行前述顯像處理所產生的前述之硬化層厚度間的關係曲線(感度曲線)而求得。The "minimum energy of light used in the foregoing exposure which does not change the thickness of the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer after the exposure and development" as referred to herein is a so-called development sensitivity, for example, The relationship between the light energy (exposure amount) used in the above-described exposure at the time of exposure of the photosensitive layer and the aforementioned hardened layer thickness (the sensitivity curve) which is caused by the continuation of the aforementioned exposure processing. And ask for it.

前述之硬化層之厚度係隨著前述之曝光量之增加而增加,然後與前述之曝光前的前述感光層厚度約略相同、且約略成為定值。前述顯像感度係藉由讀取當前述之硬化層厚度約略成為定值時之曝光量所求得之值。The thickness of the hardened layer described above increases as the amount of exposure described above increases, and is then approximately the same as the thickness of the photosensitive layer before exposure, and is approximately constant. The above-described development sensitivity is obtained by reading the exposure amount when the thickness of the hardened layer described above is approximately constant.

本文中,當前述之硬化層的厚度與前述曝光前之前述感光層的厚度間之差為±1微米以內時,可以視為前述硬化層的厚度不因曝光顯像而變化。Here, when the difference between the thickness of the hardened layer described above and the thickness of the photosensitive layer before the exposure is within ±1 μm, it can be considered that the thickness of the hardened layer is not changed by exposure development.

前述之硬化層的厚度與前述曝光前之前述感光層的厚度之測定方法,並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如可以是使用膜厚度測定裝置、表面粗糙度測定機(例如,撒夫克姆1400D(東京精密公司製))等進行測定之方法。The method for measuring the thickness of the hardened layer and the thickness of the photosensitive layer before the exposure is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and for example, may be a film thickness measuring device or a rough surface. A method of measuring by a measuring machine (for example, Safkheim 1400D (manufactured by Tokyo Seimitsu Co., Ltd.)).

更且,當在將該感光性組成物積層於基體上,於25℃暗處下歷時20分鐘後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T1 ;而對於該被積層於前述基體上的感光性組成物,將該感光層置於50℃暗處下歷時24小時後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T2 之情況,係滿足0.5<T2 /T1 <3之關係。此時之T1 宜是5~120秒,而T2 宜是5~240秒,更且,較宜是該T2 /T1 滿足0.6<T2 /T1 ≦2.7,更宜是滿足0.7<T2 /T1 <2.4,特佳為滿足0.8<T2 /T1 ≦2。當該滿足T2 /T1 為在上述範圍外時,感光性組成物之經時安定性就不是餐好的,並會隨著顯像時間而變動,因而將感光性組成物塗布於基體上狀態下之保存、於基體上設置感光層的保護薄膜之三明治構造,就會變得難以所謂的長尺狀、圓筒狀之乾燥薄膜形態來利用。Further, after the photosensitive composition was laminated on the substrate, after 20 minutes in the dark at 25 ° C, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive composition laminated on the substrate was removed by a developing solution. The required time (the shortest development time) is denoted as T 1 ; and for the photosensitive composition laminated on the substrate, the photosensitive layer is placed in a dark place at 50 ° C for 24 hours, by a developing solution The time required for removing the unexposed portion of the photosensitive composition deposited on the substrate (the shortest development time) is expressed as T 2 and satisfies the relationship of 0.5 < T 2 / T 1 < 3. At this time, T 1 is preferably 5 to 120 seconds, and T 2 is preferably 5 to 240 seconds. Further, it is preferable that the T 2 /T 1 satisfies 0.6<T 2 /T 1 ≦2.7, and more preferably satisfies 0.7. <T 2 /T 1 <2.4, particularly preferably satisfies 0.8<T 2 /T 1 ≦2. When the T 2 /T 1 is outside the above range, the stability of the photosensitive composition over time is not good, and varies with the development time, so that the photosensitive composition is coated on the substrate. In the state of storage, the sandwich structure of the protective film on which the photosensitive layer is provided on the substrate is difficult to use in the form of a long-length or cylindrical dry film.

另外,前述之感光性組成物係可以使用於後述之永久圖案形成方法中;該永久圖案形成方法係藉由將前述感光性組成物的感光層積層於基體上來進行的。Further, the photosensitive composition described above can be used in a permanent pattern forming method which will be described later by laminating a photosensitive layer of the photosensitive composition on a substrate.

在本文中,前述感光層中之鹵素原子的含有率,從無鹵素之環境對策來看,較宜是5,000 ppm以下,更宜是2,000 ppm以下,更理想是1,000 ppm以下,特佳為500 ppm以下。In the present invention, the halogen atom content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 5,000 ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 ppm or less, more preferably 1,000 ppm or less, and particularly preferably 500 ppm. the following.

又,前述之「於25℃暗處下歷時20分鐘後」,係指「在遮光狀態下,保存於25℃且歷時20分鐘後」的意思。In addition, the phrase "after 20 minutes in a dark place at 25 ° C" means "after being kept at 25 ° C in a light-shielded state for 20 minutes".

<黏合劑><Binder>

前述之黏合劑,較宜是不溶於水,且藉由鹼性水溶液而膨脹溶解之化合物。The above-mentioned binder is preferably a compound which is insoluble in water and which is swollen and dissolved by an aqueous alkaline solution.

前述之黏合劑較宜是在側鏈上含有酸性基及乙烯性不飽和鍵之高分子化合物。前述之酸性基,舉例來說,例如,其較宜是羧基、磷酸基、磺酸基等;然而,從原料取得之觀點來看,較宜是羧基。The above binder is preferably a polymer compound containing an acidic group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond in a side chain. The above-mentioned acidic group is, for example, preferably a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group or the like; however, from the viewpoint of obtaining a raw material, a carboxyl group is preferred.

又,前述之黏合劑係可以使用在分子內至少有1個可聚合雙鍵,例如,可以使用(甲基)丙烯酸酯或丙烯醯胺等之丙烯酸基羧酸之乙烯基酯、乙烯基醚、烯丙基醚等之各種聚合性雙鍵。更具體而言,舉例來說,例如其可以是在含有當做酸性基之羧基的丙烯酸樹脂上,附加含環狀醚基之聚合性化合物而加成得到之化合物等,例如,可以附加丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、桂皮酸等之不飽和酸的縮水甘油酯、或脂環式環氧基(例如,在同一分子中具有環己烯氧化物等之環氧基)和(甲基)丙烯醯基之化合物等的含環氧基聚合性化合物等。又,舉例來說,例如其可以是在含有酸性基和羥基之丙烯酸樹脂上附加(甲基)丙烯酸聚異氰酸酯乙酯等之含有聚異氰酸酯基的聚合性化合物而加成得到的化合物、在含有酐基的丙烯酸樹脂上附加(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷酯等之含有羥基的聚合性化合物而加成得到的化合物等。又,將甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯等之含有環狀醚基聚合性化合物、和(甲基)丙烯醯基烷酯等之乙烯基單體予以共聚合並將(甲基)丙烯酸附加於側鏈之環氧基上而加成得到的化合物。Further, as the binder, at least one polymerizable double bond may be used in the molecule, and for example, a vinyl ester of an acrylic carboxylic acid such as (meth) acrylate or acrylamide or a vinyl ether may be used. Various polymerizable double bonds such as allyl ether. More specifically, for example, it may be a compound obtained by adding a cyclic ether group-containing polymerizable compound to an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group as an acidic group, and the like, for example, glycidol acrylate may be added. a glycidyl ester of an unsaturated acid such as an ester, glycidyl methacrylate or cinnamic acid, or an alicyclic epoxy group (for example, an epoxy group having a cyclohexene oxide or the like in the same molecule) and (a) An epoxy group-containing polymerizable compound or the like which is a compound of an acrylonitrile group. Further, for example, it may be a compound obtained by adding a polyisocyanate group-containing polymerizable compound such as (meth)acrylic acid polyisocyanate ethyl ester to an acrylic resin containing an acidic group and a hydroxyl group, and containing an anhydride. A compound obtained by adding a hydroxyl group-containing polymerizable compound such as a hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylate to the acrylic resin is added to the base resin. Further, a cyclic ether group-containing polymerizable compound such as glycidyl methacrylate or a vinyl monomer such as (meth)acryl decyl alkyl ester is copolymerized and (meth)acrylic acid is added to the side chain. The compound obtained by adding an epoxy group to it.

此等的例子,舉例來說,例如,專利2763775號公報、特開平3-172301號公報、特開2000-232264號公報等。For example, Patent No. 2,763,775, JP-A-3-172301, JP-A-2000-232264, and the like.

此等之中,前述之黏合劑更宜是從在高分子化合物之一部分的酸性基上附加環狀醚基(例如,於部分構造上具有環氧基、氧雜環丁烷基的基)之聚合性化合物的加成物、及在高分子化合物一部分或全部的環狀醚基上附加含羧基聚合性化合物之加成物的任何一者中選擇的高分子化合物。此時,具有酸性基和環狀醚基之化合物間的加成反應較宜是在觸媒存在下實施者,尤其該觸媒較宜是從酸性化合物及中性化合物中所選擇者。In the above, the binder is preferably a cyclic ether group (for example, a group having an epoxy group or an oxetane group in a partial structure) on an acidic group of a part of the polymer compound. A polymer compound selected from any one of an adduct of a polymerizable compound and an adduct of a carboxyl group-containing polymerizable compound added to a part or all of a cyclic ether group of the polymer compound. In this case, the addition reaction between the compound having an acidic group and a cyclic ether group is preferably carried out in the presence of a catalyst, and in particular, the catalyst is preferably selected from acidic compounds and neutral compounds.

在此等之中,從感光性組成物的經時顯像安定性之觀點來看,黏合劑較宜是在側鏈上含有羧基、和可以含有雜環之芳香族基、以及在側鏈上含有乙烯性不飽和鍵的高分子化合物。Among these, the binder preferably contains a carboxyl group in a side chain, an aromatic group which may contain a hetero ring, and a side chain from the viewpoint of stability of the time-lapse development of the photosensitive composition. A polymer compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond.

-可含有雜環之芳香族基-- an aromatic group which may contain a heterocyclic ring -

前述之可含有雜環之芳香族基(以下,也有單純地稱為「芳香族基」),舉例來說,例如其可以是苯環、將2個至3個苯環予以縮環化而形成者、將苯環和5員不飽和環予以縮環化而形成者。The above-mentioned aromatic group which may contain a hetero ring (hereinafter, simply referred to as "aromatic group") may be, for example, a benzene ring or a condensed ring of two to three benzene rings. The benzene ring and the 5-membered unsaturated ring are condensed and formed.

前述之芳香族基的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是苯基、萘基、蒽基、菲基、茚基、二氫苊基、茀基、苯并吡咯環基、苯并呋喃環基、苯并噻吩基環、吡唑環基、異唑環基、異噻唑環基、吲唑環基、苯并異唑環基、苯并異噻唑環基、咪唑環基、唑環基、噻唑環基、苯并咪唑環基、苯并唑環基、苯并噻唑環基、吡啶環基、喹啉環基、異喹啉環基、嗒基、嘧啶環基、吡環基、呔環基、喹唑啉環基、喹喏啉環基、醯啶環基、菲啶環基、咔唑環基、卟啉環基、吡喃環基、哌啶環基、吲哚環基、吲環基、色烯環基、啉環基、吖啶環基、啡噻環基、四唑環基、三環基等。在此等之中,較宜是烴芳香族基,更理想是苯基、萘基。Specific examples of the above aromatic group may, for example, be a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, a phenanthryl group, a fluorenyl group, a dihydroindenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a benzopyrrole group, or a benzofuran ring. Base, benzothienyl ring, pyrazole ring group, different Oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, indazole, benzo Oxazolyl, benzisothiazole ring, imidazocyclyl, Oxazolyl, thiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzo Oxazole group, benzothiazole ring group, pyridine ring group, quinoline ring group, isoquinoline ring group, hydrazine Base, pyrimidine ring, pyridyl Ring base a cyclic group, a quinazoline ring group, a quinoxaline ring group, an acridine ring group, a phenanthryl ring group, a carbazole ring group, a porphyrin ring group, a pyrancyclo group, a piperidinyl group, an anthracene ring group,吲 Ring group, chromene ring group, Phytocyclic group, acridine ring group, morphine Cyclic group, tetrazole ring group, three Ring base, etc. Among these, a hydrocarbon aromatic group is preferred, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferred.

前述之芳香族基也可以具有取代基;前述之取代基,舉例來說,例如其可以是鹵素原子、可具有取代基之胺基、烷氧基羰基、羥基、醚基、硫基、硫醚基、矽烷基、硝基、氰基、胺基、分別可以具有取代基之烷基、烯基、炔基、苯基、雜環基等。The aforementioned aromatic group may have a substituent; the aforementioned substituent may, for example, be a halogen atom, an amine group which may have a substituent, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyl group, an ether group, a sulfur group, a thioether A group, an alkyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an amine group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a phenyl group, a heterocyclic group or the like which may have a substituent, respectively.

前述之烷基,舉例來說,例如,其可以是碳原子數為1~20之直鏈狀烷基、分枝狀烷基、環狀烷基等。The alkyl group may be, for example, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group or a cyclic alkyl group.

前述之烷基的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、壬基、癸基、十一烷基、十二烷基、十三烷基、十四烷基、十六烷基基、十八烷基、二十烷基、異丙基、異丁基、s-丁基、t-丁基、異戊基、新戊基、1-甲基丁基、異己基、2-乙基己基、2-甲基己基、環己基、環戊基、2-正基等。在此等之中,較宜是碳原子數為1到12之直鏈狀烷基、碳原子數為3到12之分枝狀烷基、碳原子數為5到10之環狀烷基。Specific examples of the aforementioned alkyl group, for example, may be methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, decyl, undecyl, Dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, octadecyl, eicosyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, iso Pentyl, neopentyl, 1-methylbutyl, isohexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 2-methylhexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, 2-positive Base. Among these, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms are preferable.

前述烷基之可具有的取代基,舉例來說,例如其可以是由除氫原子之外的一價非金屬原子團構成的基。此種取代基,例如,鹵素原子(-F、-Br、-Cl、-I)、羥基、烷氧基、芳氧基、氫硫基、烷硫基、芳硫基、烷基二硫基、芳基二硫基、胺基、N-烷胺基、N,N-二烷胺基、N-芳胺基、N,N-二芳胺基、N-烷基-N-芳胺基、醯氧基、胺甲醯氧基、N-烷基胺甲醯氧基、N-芳基胺甲醯氧基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯氧基、N,N-二芳基胺甲醯氧基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺甲醯氧基、烷基磺醯氧基、芳基磺醯氧基、醯基硫基、醯基胺基、N-烷基醯基硫基、N-芳基醯基胺基、脲基、N’-脲基、N’,N’-二烷基脲基、N’-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基脲基、N-烷基脲基、N-芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’-烷基-N-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N-芳基脲基、N’-芳基-N-烷基脲基、N’-烷基-N-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基-N-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基-N-芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基-N-烷基脲基等、N’-烷基-N’-芳基-N-芳基脲基、烷氧基、羰胺基、芳氧基基羰胺基、N-烷基-N-烷氧基羰胺基、N-烷基-N-芳氧基基羰胺基、N-芳基-N-烷氧基羰胺基、N-芳基=N-芳氧基基羰胺基、甲醯基、醯基、羧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、N-烷基胺甲醯基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯基、N-芳基胺甲醯基、N,N-二芳基胺甲醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺甲醯基、烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞磺醯基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、磺酸基(-SO3 H)及其共軛鹼基(稱為磺酸根基)、烷氧基磺醯基、芳氧基磺醯基、胺亞磺醯基、N-烷基胺亞磺醯基、N,N-二烷基胺亞磺醯基、N-芳基胺亞磺醯基、N,N-二芳基胺亞磺醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺亞磺醯基、胺磺醯基、N-烷基胺磺醯基、N,N-二烷基胺磺醯基、N-芳基胺磺醯基、N,N-二芳基胺磺醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺磺醯基、膦酸基(-PO3 H2 )及其共軛鹼基(稱為膦酸根基)、二烷基膦酸基(-PO3 (alkyl)2 )(以下,「alkyl」係為烷基的意思。)、二芳基膦酸基(-PO3 (aryl)2 )(以下,「aryl」係為芳基的意思。)、烷基芳基膦酸基(-PO3 (alkyl)(aryl))、單烷基膦酸基(-PO3 (alkyl))及其共軛鹼基(稱為烷基膦酸根基)、單芳基膦酸基(-PO3 H(aryl))及其共軛鹼基(稱為芳基膦酸根基)、膦酸氧基(-OPO3 H2 )及其共軛鹼基(稱為膦酸根氧基)、二烷基膦酸氧基(-OPO3 H(alkyl)2 )、二芳基膦酸氧基(-OPO3 (aryl)2 )、烷基芳基膦酸氧基(-OPO3 (alkyl)(aryl))、單烷基膦酸氧基(-OPO3 H(alkyl))及其共軛鹼基(稱為烷基膦酸根氧基)、單芳基膦酸基(-OPO3 H(aryl))及其共軛鹼基(稱為芳基膦酸根氧基)、氰基、硝基、芳基、烯基、炔基、雜環基、矽烷基等。The substituent which the aforementioned alkyl group may have, for example, may be a group composed of a monovalent non-metal atom group other than a hydrogen atom. Such a substituent, for example, a halogen atom (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I), a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thiol group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkyldithio group , aryldithio, amine, N-alkylamino, N,N-dialkylamino, N-arylamino, N,N-diarylamine, N-alkyl-N-arylamine , anthraceneoxy, amine methyl methoxy, N-alkyl amine methyl methoxy, N-aryl amine methyl methoxy, N, N-dialkyl amine methoxy, N, N-diaryl Ketomethyl methoxy, N-alkyl-N-arylamine methoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyloxy, arylsulfonyloxy, decylthio, decylamino, N-alkyl Mercaptothio, N-aryldecylamino, ureido, N'-ureido, N', N'-dialkylureido, N'-arylureido, N', N'-di Arylureido, N'-alkyl-N'-arylureido, N-alkylureido, N-arylureido, N'-alkyl-N-alkylureido, N'-alkane -N-arylureido, N',N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido, N',N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido, N', N'-di Alkyl-N-arylureido, N'-aryl-N-alkylureido, N'-alkyl- N-arylureido, N',N'-diaryl-N-alkylureido, N',N'-diaryl-N-arylureido, N'-alkyl-N'- Aryl-N-alkylureido, etc., N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-arylureido, alkoxy, carbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, N-alkyl -N-alkoxycarbonylamino, N-alkyl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino, N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino, N-aryl=N-aryloxy Amine, carbolyl, fluorenyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, aminemethanyl, N-alkylamine, fluorenyl, N,N-dialkylamine, fluorenyl, N -Arylamine, mercapto, N,N-diarylamine, N-alkyl-N-arylamine, alkyl sulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, alkyl Sulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonic acid (-SO 3 H) and its conjugated base (referred to as sulfonate), alkoxysulfonyl, aryloxysulfonyl, amine sulfin Indenyl, N-alkylamine sulfinyl, N,N-dialkylamine sulfinyl, N-arylamine sulfinyl, N,N-diarylamine sulfinyl, N -alkyl-N-arylamine sulfinyl, aminoxime , N-alkylamine sulfonyl, N,N-dialkylamine sulfonyl, N-arylamine sulfonyl, N,N-diarylamine sulfonyl, N-alkyl-N - an arylamine sulfonyl group, a phosphonic acid group (-PO 3 H 2 ) and a conjugated base thereof (referred to as a phosphonate group), and a dialkylphosphonic acid group (-PO 3 (alkyl) 2 ) (hereinafter, "alkyl" means an alkyl group.), a diarylphosphonic acid group (-PO 3 (aryl) 2 ) (hereinafter, "aryl" is an aryl group), an alkylarylphosphonic acid group ( -PO 3 (alkyl)(aryl)), monoalkylphosphonic acid group (-PO 3 (alkyl)) and its conjugated base (referred to as alkylphosphonate group), monoarylphosphonic acid group (-PO) 3 H(aryl)) and its conjugated base (referred to as arylphosphonate), phosphonic acidoxy (-OPO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugated base (referred to as phosphonateoxy), dioxane Alkylphosphonic acid (-OPO 3 H(alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphonic acidoxy (-OPO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkyl aryl phosphonic acid oxy (-OPO 3 (alkyl) (aryl )), monoalkylphosphonic acidoxy (-OPO 3 H(alkyl)) and its conjugated base (referred to as alkylphosphonateoxy), monoarylphosphonic acid group (-OPO 3 H (aryl) And its conjugated base (called arylphosphonateoxy), cyano, Group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl silicon and the like.

此等之取代基中的烷基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是前述之烷基。Specific examples of the alkyl group in the substituents, for example, may be the aforementioned alkyl group.

前述之取代基中的芳基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是苯基、聯苯基、萘基、甲苯基、二甲苯基、三甲苯基、異丙苯基、氯苯基、溴苯基、氯甲基苯基、羥基苯基、甲氧基苯基、乙氧基苯基、苯氧基苯基、乙醯氧基苯基、苯甲醯氧基苯基、甲基硫苯基、苯基硫苯基、甲胺基苯基、二甲胺基苯基、乙醯基胺基苯基、羧基苯基、甲氧基羰基苯基、乙氧基羰基苯基、苯氧基羰基苯基、N-苯基胺甲醯基苯基、氰基苯基、磺酸基苯基、磺酸根基苯基、膦酸基苯基、膦酸根基苯基等。Specific examples of the aryl group in the above substituent may be, for example, a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a trimethylphenyl group, a cumyl group, a chlorophenyl group, or the like. Bromophenyl, chloromethylphenyl, hydroxyphenyl, methoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, phenoxyphenyl, ethoxylated phenyl, benzhydryloxyphenyl, methylsulfide Phenyl, phenylthiophenyl, methylaminophenyl, dimethylaminophenyl, ethionylaminophenyl, carboxyphenyl, methoxycarbonylphenyl, ethoxycarbonylphenyl, phenoxy Phenylcarbonylphenyl, N-phenylamine-nonylphenyl, cyanophenyl, sulfophenyl, sulfonylphenyl, phosphonicphenyl, phosphonatephenyl, and the like.

前述之取代基中的烯基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是乙烯基、1-丙烯基、1-丁醯基、桂皮基、2-氯-1-醚基等。Specific examples of the alkenyl group in the above substituent may, for example, be a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group, a 2-chloro-1-ether group or the like.

前述之取代基中的炔基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是乙炔基、1-丙炔基、1-丁炔基、三甲基矽烷基乙炔基等。Specific examples of the alkynyl group in the above substituent may be, for example, an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group, a trimethyldecylalkylethynyl group or the like.

前述之取代基中的醯基(R01 CO-)之R01 ,舉例來說,例如其可以是氫原子、前述之烷基、芳基等。The substituents R 01 of the acyl group (R 01 CO-) of, for example, which may be for example a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of the aryl group and the like.

在此等之取代基之中,較宜是鹵素原子(-F、-Br、-Cl、-I)、烷氧基、芳氧基、烷硫基、芳硫基、N-烷胺基、N,N-二烷胺基、醯氧基、N-烷基胺甲醯氧基、N-芳基胺甲醯氧基、醯基胺基、甲醯基、醯基、羧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、N-烷基胺甲醯基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯基、N-芳基胺甲醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺甲醯基、磺酸基、磺酸根基、胺磺醯基、N-烷基胺磺醯基、N,N-二烷基胺磺醯基、N-芳基胺磺醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺磺醯基、膦酸基、膦酸根基、二烷基膦酸基、二芳基膦酸基、單烷基膦酸基、烷基膦酸根基、單芳基膦酸基、芳基膦酸根基、膦酸氧基、膦酸根氧基、芳基、烯基等。Among these substituents, a halogen atom (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I), an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an N-alkylamino group, N,N-Dialkylamino, decyloxy, N-alkylamine methyl methoxy, N-arylamine methyl methoxy, decylamino, decyl, decyl, carboxy, alkoxy Carbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, aminemethanyl, N-alkylaminecarbamyl, N,N-dialkylaminecarbamyl, N-arylaminecarbamyl, N-alkyl-N-aryl Base amide, sulfonate, sulfonate, sulfonamide, N-alkylamine sulfonyl, N,N-dialkylamine sulfonyl, N-arylamine sulfonyl, N -alkyl-N-arylamine sulfonyl, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, dialkylphosphonic acid, diarylphosphonic acid, monoalkylphosphonic acid, alkylphosphonic acid, monoaryl Phosphonic acid group, arylphosphonate group, phosphonic acidoxy group, phosphonic acid group, aryl group, alkenyl group and the like.

又,前述之取代基中的雜環基,舉例來說,例如其可以是吡啶基、哌啶基等;前述之取代基中的矽烷基,舉例來說,例如其可以是三甲基矽烷基等。Further, the heterocyclic group in the above substituent may, for example, be a pyridyl group, a piperidinyl group or the like; the alkylene group in the above substituent, for example, it may be a trimethyldecyl group Wait.

另一方面,前述之烷基中的伸烷基,舉例來說,例如其可以是除去前述碳數為1到20之烷基上的任何1個氫原子之2價有機殘基;例如,較宜是碳原子數為1到12之直鏈狀伸烷基、碳原子數為3到12之分枝狀伸烷基、碳原子數為5到10之環狀伸烷基。On the other hand, the alkylene group in the above alkyl group, for example, may be a divalent organic residue which removes any one of hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms; for example, It is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms.

像這樣的取代基與伸烷基組合而得到的取代烷基之較佳的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是氯甲基、溴甲基、2-氯乙基、三氟甲基、甲氧基甲基、異丙氧基甲基、丁氧基甲基、s-丁氧基丁基、甲氧基乙氧基乙基、烯丙氧基甲基、苯氧基甲基、甲基硫甲基、甲苯基硫甲基、吡啶基甲基、四甲基哌啶基甲基、N-乙醯基四甲基哌啶基甲基、三甲基矽烷基甲基、甲氧基乙基、乙胺基乙基、二乙胺基丙基、嗎福啉基丙基、乙醯氧基甲基、苯甲醯氧基甲基、N-環己基胺甲醯氧基乙基、N-苯基胺甲醯氧基乙基、乙醯基胺基乙基、N-甲基苯甲醯基胺基丙基、2-側氧乙基、2-側氧丙基、羧基丙基、甲氧羰基乙基、烯丙氧基羰基丁基、氯苯氧基羰基甲基、胺甲醯基甲基、N-甲基胺甲醯基乙基、N,N-二丙基胺甲醯基甲基、N-(甲氧苯基)胺甲醯基乙基、N-甲基-N-(膦酸基苯基)胺甲醯基甲基、磺酸基丁基、磺酸根基丁基、胺磺醯基丁基、N-乙基胺磺醯基甲基、N,N-二丙基胺磺醯基、N-苯胺基胺磺醯基丙基、N-甲基-N-(膦酸基苯基)胺磺醯基辛基、膦酸基丁基、膦酸根基己基、二乙基膦酸基丁基、二苯基膦酸基丙基、甲基膦酸基丁基、甲基膦酸根基丁基、甲苯基膦酸基己基、甲苯基膦酸根基己基、膦酸氧基丙基、膦酸根氧基丙基、苄基、苯乙基、α -甲基苄基、1-甲基-1-苯基乙基、p-甲基苄基、桂皮基、烯丙基、1-丙烯基甲基、2-丁烯基、2-甲基烯丙基、2-甲基丙烯基甲基、2-丙炔基、2-丁炔基、3-丁炔基等。Preferred specific examples of the substituted alkyl group obtained by combining such a substituent with an alkylene group are, for example, chloromethyl, bromomethyl, 2-chloroethyl, trifluoromethyl, Methoxymethyl, isopropoxymethyl, butoxymethyl, s-butoxybutyl, methoxyethoxyethyl, allyloxymethyl, phenoxymethyl, A Thiomethylmethyl, tolylthiomethyl, pyridylmethyl, tetramethylpiperidinylmethyl, N-ethinyltetramethylpiperidinylmethyl, trimethyldecylmethyl, methoxy Ethyl, ethylaminoethyl, diethylaminopropyl, morpholinylpropyl, ethoxymethyloxy, benzhydryloxymethyl, N-cyclohexylaminemethyloxyethyl, N-phenylamine methyl methoxyethyl, ethionylaminoethyl, N-methylbenzhydrylaminopropyl, 2-sided oxyethyl, 2-sided oxypropyl, carboxypropyl , methoxycarbonylethyl, allyloxycarbonylbutyl, chlorophenoxycarbonylmethyl, aminemethylmethylmethyl, N-methylamine, decylethyl, N,N-dipropylamine Mercaptomethyl, N-(methoxyphenyl)amine, mercaptoethyl, N-methyl-N (phosphonophenyl)amine methyl hydrazinomethyl, sulfonate butyl, sulfonyl butyl, sulfonyl butyl, N-ethylamine sulfonylmethyl, N,N-dipropyl Amine sulfonyl, N-anilinoamine sulfonylpropyl, N-methyl-N-(phosphonophenyl)amine sulfonyl octyl, phosphonic butyl, phosphonic hexyl, two Ethylphosphonyl butyl, diphenylphosphonic propyl, methylphosphonic butyl, methylphosphonic butyl, tolylphosphonic hexyl, tolylphosphonate hexyl, phosphonic acid oxygen Propyl, phosphonithooxypropyl, benzyl, phenethyl, α -methylbenzyl, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl, p-methylbenzyl, cinnamyl, allyl , 1-propenylmethyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methylallyl, 2-methylpropenylmethyl, 2-propynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-butynyl, and the like.

前述之芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是苯環、由2個到3個苯環形成縮合環者、由苯環和5員不飽和環形成縮合環者等。The above-mentioned aryl group may be, for example, a benzene ring, a condensed ring formed from 2 to 3 benzene rings, a condensed ring formed from a benzene ring and a 5-membered unsaturated ring, and the like.

前述之芳基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是苯基、萘基、蒽基、菲基、茚基、二氫苊基、茀基等。此等之中,較宜是苯基、萘基。Specific examples of the aforementioned aryl group may, for example, be a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, a phenanthryl group, an anthracenyl group, a dihydroindenyl group, a fluorenyl group or the like. Among these, phenyl or naphthyl is preferred.

前述之烷基也可以具有取代基,像這樣的具有取代基之烷基(以下,有稱為「取代芳基」的情況),舉例來說,例如其可以是在前述之芳基的環形成碳原子上具有做為取代基的由氫原子以外之一價非金屬原子團所構成之基。The above-mentioned alkyl group may have a substituent, such as a substituted alkyl group (hereinafter, referred to as a "substituted aryl group"), and for example, it may be a ring formation of the aforementioned aryl group. The carbon atom has a substituent composed of a monovalent non-metal atom group other than a hydrogen atom as a substituent.

可做為前述芳基之可以具有的取代基者,例如,較宜是例示來做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、前述之烷基的可以具有的取代基之物。The substituent which may be possessed by the above-mentioned aryl group is, for example, preferably exemplified as the substituent which the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, or the above-mentioned alkyl group may have.

前述之取代芳基之較佳的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是聯苯基、甲苯基、二甲苯基、三甲苯基、異丙苯基、氯苯基、溴苯基、氟苯基、氯甲基苯基、三氟甲基苯基、羥基苯基、甲氧基苯基、甲氧基乙氧基苯基、烯丙氧基苯基、苯氧基苯基、甲基硫苯基、甲苯基硫苯基、乙胺基苯基、二乙胺基苯基、嗎福啉基苯基、乙醯氧基苯基、苯甲醯氧基苯基、N-環己基胺甲醯氧基苯基、N-苯基胺甲醯氧基苯基、乙醯基胺基苯基、N-甲基苯甲醯基胺基苯基、羧基苯基、甲氧基羰基苯基、烯丙氧基羰基苯基、氯苯氧基羰基苯基、胺甲醯氧基苯基、N-甲基胺甲醯氧基苯基、N,N-二丙基胺甲醯氧基苯基、N-(甲氧基苯基)胺甲醯氧基苯基、N-甲基-N-(磺酸基苯基)胺甲醯氧基苯基、磺酸基苯基、磺酸根基苯基、胺磺醯基苯基、N-乙基胺磺醯基苯基、N,N-二丙基胺磺醯基苯基、N-甲苯基胺磺醯基苯基、N-甲基-N-(磺酸基苯基)胺磺醯基苯基、膦酸基苯基、膦酸根基苯基、二乙基膦酸基苯基、二苯基膦酸根基苯基、甲基膦酸基苯基、甲基膦酸根基苯基、甲苯基膦酸基苯基、甲苯基膦酸根基苯基、烯丙基苯基、1-丙烯基甲基苯基、2-丁烯基苯基、2-甲基烯丙基苯基、2-甲基丙烯基苯基、2-丙炔基苯基、2-丁炔基苯基、3-丁炔基苯基等。Preferred specific examples of the above substituted aryl group include, for example, a biphenyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a trimethylphenyl group, a cumyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, and a fluorobenzene. Base, chloromethylphenyl, trifluoromethylphenyl, hydroxyphenyl, methoxyphenyl, methoxyethoxyphenyl, allyloxyphenyl, phenoxyphenyl, methylsulfide Phenyl, tolylthiophenyl, ethylaminophenyl, diethylaminophenyl, morpholinylphenyl, ethoxylated phenyl, benzhydryloxyphenyl, N-cyclohexylamine a nonyloxyphenyl group, an N-phenylamine methyl methoxy phenyl group, an ethyl decyl phenyl phenyl group, an N-methyl benzoguanidino phenyl group, a carboxy phenyl group, a methoxycarbonyl phenyl group, Allyloxycarbonylphenyl, chlorophenoxycarbonylphenyl, amine methyloxyphenyl, N-methylamine methyloxyphenyl, N,N-dipropylamine methyloxyphenyl , N-(methoxyphenyl)amine methyl methoxyphenyl, N-methyl-N-(sulfophenyl)amine methyl methoxy phenyl, sulfonic phenyl, sulfonate benzene Amine, sulfonylphenyl, N-ethylamine sulfonylphenyl, N,N-dipropyl Sulfonylphenyl, N-methylphenylsulfonylphenyl, N-methyl-N-(sulfonylphenyl)amine sulfonylphenyl, phosphonic phenyl, phosphonate phenyl, Diethylphosphonic phenyl, diphenylphosphonyl phenyl, methylphosphonic phenyl, methylphosphonic phenyl, tolylphosphonic phenyl, tolylphosphonyl phenyl, Allylphenyl, 1-propenylmethylphenyl, 2-butenylphenyl, 2-methylallylphenyl, 2-methylpropenylphenyl, 2-propynylphenyl, 2-butynylphenyl, 3-butynylphenyl, and the like.

前述之烯基(-C(R02 )=C(R03 )(R04 ))及炔基(-C≡C(R05 ),舉例來說,例如其可以是R02 、R03 、R04 及R05 為由一價的非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。The aforementioned alkenyl group (-C(R 02 )=C(R 03 )(R 04 )) and alkynyl group (-C≡C(R 05 ), for example, may be R 02 , R 03 , R 04 and R 05 are radicals composed of monovalent non-metal radicals.

前述之R02 、R03 、R04 及R05 ,舉例來說,例如其可以是氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、取代烷基、芳基、取代芳基等。此等之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為前述的例子者。此等之中,較宜是氫原子、鹵素原子、碳原子數為1到10之直鏈狀烷基、分枝狀烷基、環狀烷基。The above R 02 , R 03 , R 04 and R 05 may , for example, be a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group or the like. Specific examples of such, for example, may be exemplified as the foregoing examples. Among these, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group or a cyclic alkyl group is preferable.

前述之烯基及炔基之較佳的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是乙烯基、1-丙烯基、1-丁烯基、1-戊烯基、1-己烯基、1-辛烯基、1-甲基-1-丙烯基、2-甲基-1-丙烯基、2-甲基-1-丁烯基、2-苯基-1-乙烯基、2-氯-1-乙烯基、乙炔基、丙炔基、1-丁炔基、苯基乙炔基等。Preferred specific examples of the aforementioned alkenyl group and alkynyl group are, for example, vinyl, 1-propenyl, 1-butenyl, 1-pentenyl, 1-hexenyl, 1- Octenyl, 1-methyl-1-propenyl, 2-methyl-1-propenyl, 2-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-phenyl-1-vinyl, 2-chloro-1 a vinyl group, an ethynyl group, a propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group, a phenylethynyl group or the like.

前述之雜環基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為取代烷基之取代基的吡啶基等。The aforementioned heterocyclic group may, for example, be a pyridyl group or the like exemplified as a substituent of the substituted alkyl group.

前述之氧基(R06 O-),舉例來說,例如其可以是R06 為由除了氫原子以外的一價非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。The aforementioned oxy group (R 06 O-), for example, may be a group in which R 06 is a group composed of a monovalent non-metal atomic group other than a hydrogen atom.

像這樣的氧基,例如,較宜是烷氧基、芳氧基、醯氧基、胺甲醯基氧基、N-烷基胺甲醯基氧基、N-芳基胺甲醯基氧基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯基氧基、N,N-二芳基胺甲醯基氧基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺甲醯基氧基、烷基磺酸基氧基、芳基磺酸基氧基、膦酸基氧基、膦酸根基氧基等。An oxy group like this is, for example, preferably an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a decyloxy group, an amine carbaryloxy group, an N-alkylamine carbhydryloxy group, or an N-arylamine mercaptooxy group. , N,N-dialkylamine, fluorenyloxy, N,N-diarylamine, fluorenyloxy, N-alkyl-N-arylamine, decyloxy, alkyl sulfonic acid Alkoxy, arylsulfonyloxy, phosphonicoxy, phosphonooxy, and the like.

此等之中的烷基及芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、芳基及取代芳基之物。又,前述之醯氧基(R07 CO-),舉例來說,例如,R07 可以是列舉來做為先前的例子之烷基、取代烷基、芳基以及取代芳基之物。此等之取代基之中,較宜是烷氧基、芳氧基、醯氧基、芳基磺酸氧基。The alkyl group and the aryl group among these may be, for example, exemplified as the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, aryl group and substituted aryl group. Further, the aforementioned oxime group (R 07 CO-), for example, R 07 may be an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an aryl group or a substituted aryl group exemplified as the prior examples. Among these substituents, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a decyloxy group, and an arylsulfonic acid group are preferred.

較佳的氧基之具體例子,甲氧基、乙氧基、丙氧基、異丙氧基、丁氧基、戊氧基、己氧基、十二烷基氧基、苄氧基、烯丙基氧基、苯乙基氧基、羧乙基氧基、甲氧羰基氧基、乙氧羰基乙氧基、甲氧基乙氧基、甲氧基乙氧基乙氧基、乙氧基乙氧基乙氧基、嗎福啉基乙氧基、嗎福啉基丙氧基、烯丙氧基乙氧基乙氧基、苯氧基、甲苯基氧基、二甲苯基氧基、三甲苯基氧基、三甲苯基氧基、異丙基氧基、甲氧基苯基氧基、乙氧基苯基氧基、氯苯基氧基、溴苯基氧基、乙醯基氧基、苯甲醯基氧基、萘基氧基、苯基磺醯基氧基、膦酸基氧基、膦酸根基氧基等。Specific examples of preferred oxy groups, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, dodecyloxy, benzyloxy, alkene Propyloxy, phenethyloxy, carboxyethyloxy, methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonylethoxy, methoxyethoxy, methoxyethoxyethoxy, ethoxy Ethoxyethoxy, morpholinylethoxy, morpholinylpropoxy, allyloxyethoxyethoxy, phenoxy, tolyloxy, xylyloxy, tri Tolyloxy, tricresyloxy, isopropyloxy, methoxyphenyloxy, ethoxyphenyloxy, chlorophenyloxy, bromophenyloxy, ethoxylated oxy , benzhydryloxy, naphthyloxy, phenylsulfonyloxy, phosphonic acidoxy, phosphonateoxy, and the like.

可以含有醯胺基的胺基(R08 NH-、(R09 )(R010 )N-),舉例來說,例如其可以是R08 、R09 及R010 為由除了氫原子以外之一價的非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。另外,R09 和R010 也可以鏈結而形成環。An amine group (R 08 NH-, (R 09 )(R 010 )N-) which may contain a guanamine group, for example, which may be one of R 08 , R 09 and R 010 except for a hydrogen atom A base composed of a valence of non-metal radicals. In addition, R 09 and R 010 may also be linked to form a ring.

前述之胺基,舉例來說,例如其可以是N-烷基胺基、N,N-二烷基胺基、N-芳基胺基、N,N-二芳基胺基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺基、醯基胺基、N-烷基醯基胺基、N-芳基醯基胺基、脲基、N’-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基脲基、N’-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基脲基、N-烷基脲基、N-芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’-烷基-N-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二烷基-N’-芳基脲基、N’-芳基-N-烷基脲基、N’-芳基-N-芳基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基-N-烷基脲基、N’,N’-二芳基-N-芳基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基-N-烷基脲基、N’-烷基-N’-芳基-N-芳基脲基、烷氧羰基胺基、芳氧羰基胺、N-烷基-N-烷氧羰基胺基、N-烷基-N-芳氧羰基胺基、N-芳基-N-烷氧羰基胺基、N-芳基-N-芳氧羰基胺基等。此等之中的烷基及芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、芳基及取代芳基之物。又,醯基胺基、N-烷基醯基胺基、N-芳基醯基胺基中的醯基(R07 CO-)之R07 係如前述。在此等之中,更宜是N-烷基胺基、N,N-二烷基胺基、N-芳基胺基、醯基胺基。The aforementioned amine group, for example, may be an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an N-arylamino group, an N,N-diarylamino group, an N-alkyl group. -N-arylamino, decylamino, N-alkyldecylamino, N-aryldecylamine, ureido, N'-alkylureido, N', N'-di Alkyl urea group, N'-aryl urea group, N', N'-diaryl urea group, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl urea group, N-alkyl urea group, N-aryl group Urea, N'-alkyl-N-alkylureido, N'-alkyl-N-arylureido, N', N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido, N'-alkane -N'-arylureido, N',N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido, N',N'-dialkyl-N'-arylureido, N'-aryl -N-alkylureido, N'-aryl-N-arylureido, N',N'-diaryl-N-alkylureido, N',N'-diaryl-N- Arylureido, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkylureido, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-arylureido, alkoxycarbonylamino, aromatic Oxycarbonylamine, N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino, N-alkyl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino, N-aryl-N-alkane Carbonyl group, N- aryl -N- aryloxycarbonyl group and the like. The alkyl group and the aryl group among these may be, for example, exemplified as the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, aryl group and substituted aryl group. And, R 07 lines acyl group, N- acyl amino-alkyl, N- aryl-acyl group of acyl (R 07 CO-) of the preceding. Among these, it is more preferably an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an N-arylamino group or a mercaptoamine group.

較佳的胺基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲基胺基、乙基胺基、二乙基胺基、嗎福啉基、哌啶基、吡啶基、苯基胺基、苯甲醯基胺基、乙醯基胺基等。Specific examples of preferred amine groups, for example, may be methylamino, ethylamino, diethylamino, morpholinyl, piperidinyl, pyridyl, phenylamino, Benzomethylamino group, acetylamino group, and the like.

前述之磺醯基(R011 -SO2 -),舉例來說,例如其可以是R011 為由一價的非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。The aforementioned sulfonyl group (R 011 -SO 2 -), for example, may be a compound in which R 011 is a group composed of a monovalent non-metal atomic group.

像這樣的磺醯基,例如,烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基等。此等之中的烷基及芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、芳基及取代芳基者。A sulfonyl group such as, for example, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group or the like. The alkyl group and the aryl group among these may be, for example, those exemplified as the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, aryl group and substituted aryl group.

前述之磺醯基之具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是丁基磺醯基、苯基磺醯基、氯苯基磺醯基等。Specific examples of the aforementioned sulfonyl group may, for example, be a butylsulfonyl group, a phenylsulfonyl group, a chlorophenylsulfonyl group or the like.

前述之磺酸根基(-SO3 ),如前述,係意味著磺酸基(-SO3 H)之共軛鹼陰離子的意思,通常較宜是與對陽離子一同使用。The aforementioned sulfonate group (-SO 3 - ), as described above, means a conjugated base anion of a sulfonic acid group (-SO 3 H), and is usually preferably used together with a counter cation.

像這樣的對陽離子係可以適宜地選擇一般所知之物來使用,舉例來說,例如其可以是鎓類(例如,銨類、硫鎓類、鏻類、錪類、吖啶鎓等)、金屬離子類(例如,Na 、K 、Ca2+ 、Zn2+ 等)。Such a cationic system may be suitably selected from those generally known, and for example, it may be an anthracene (for example, ammonium, sulfonium, anthraquinone, anthraquinone, acridine, etc.), Metal ions (for example, Na + , K + , Ca 2+ , Zn 2+ , etc.).

前述之羰基(R013 -CO-),舉例來說,例如其可以是R013 為由一價的非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。The aforementioned carbonyl group (R 013 -CO-), for example, may be a compound in which R 013 is a group composed of a monovalent non-metal atomic group.

像這樣的羰基,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲醯基、醯基、羧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、N-烷基胺甲醯基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯基、N-芳基胺甲醯基、N,N-二芳基胺甲醯基、N-烷基-N’-芳基胺甲醯基等。此等之中的烷基及芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、芳基及取代芳基之物。A carbonyl group such as, for example, it may be a fluorenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amine methyl sulfonyl group, an N-alkylamine methyl fluorenyl group, N, N- Dialkylamine methyl sulfonyl, N-arylamine carbhydryl, N,N-diarylaminecarbamyl, N-alkyl-N'-arylaminecarbamyl and the like. The alkyl group and the aryl group among these may be, for example, exemplified as the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, aryl group and substituted aryl group.

前述之羰基較宜是甲醯基、醯基、羧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、N-烷基胺甲醯基、N,N-二烷基胺甲醯基、N-芳基胺甲醯基;更宜是甲醯基、醯基、羧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基。The aforementioned carbonyl group is preferably a decyl group, a fluorenyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, an N-alkylamine carbhydryl group, an N,N-dialkylamine fluorenyl group. , N-arylaminecarbamyl; more preferably is indenyl, fluorenyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl.

前述之羰基的具體例子,舉例來說,例如,合適者為甲醯基、乙醯基、苯甲醯基、羧基、甲氧基羰基、乙氧基羰基、烯丙氧基羰基、二甲基胺基苯基醚羰基、甲氧羰基甲氧羰基、N-甲基胺甲醯基、N-苯基胺甲醯基、N,N-二乙基胺甲醯基、嗎福啉基羰基等。Specific examples of the aforementioned carbonyl group include, for example, a mercapto group, an ethyl fluorenyl group, a benzamidine group, a carboxyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, an allyloxycarbonyl group, and a dimethyl group. Aminophenyl ether carbonyl, methoxycarbonylmethoxycarbonyl, N-methylaminecarbamyl, N-phenylaminecarbamyl, N,N-diethylaminecarbamyl, morpholinylcarbonyl, etc. .

前述之亞磺醯基(R014 -SO-),舉例來說,例如其可以是R014 為由一價的非金屬原子團所構成的基之物。The aforementioned sulfinyl group (R 014 -SO-), for example, may be such that R 014 is a group composed of a monovalent non-metal atomic group.

像這樣的亞磺醯基,舉例來說,例如其可以是烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞磺醯基、胺亞磺醯基、N-烷基胺亞磺醯基、N,N-二烷基胺亞磺醯基、N-芳基胺亞磺醯基、N,N-二芳基胺亞磺醯基、N-烷基-N-芳基胺亞磺醯基等。此等之中的烷基及芳基,舉例來說,例如其可以是例示來做為前述之烷基、取代烷基、芳基及取代芳基之物。此等之中,較宜是烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞磺醯基。A sulfinyl group such as, for example, may be an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an amine sulfinyl group, an N-alkylamine sulfinyl group, N, N- A dialkylamine sulfinyl group, an N-arylamine sulfinyl group, an N,N-diarylamine sulfinylene group, an N-alkyl-N-arylamine sulfinyl group, and the like. The alkyl group and the aryl group among these may be, for example, exemplified as the above-mentioned alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, aryl group and substituted aryl group. Among these, an alkylsulfinyl group or an arylsulfinyl group is preferred.

前述之取代磺醯基的具體例子,舉例來說,例如,合適者有己基磺醯基、苄基磺醯基、甲苯基磺醯基等。Specific examples of the above-mentioned substituted sulfonyl group include, for example, a hexylsulfonyl group, a benzylsulfonyl group, a tolylsulfonyl group and the like.

前述所謂之膦酸基,係指在膦酸基上的一到二個之羥基為其他的有機側氧基所取代之物的意思;例如,較宜是前述之二烷基膦酸基、二芳基膦酸基、烷基芳基膦酸基、單烷基膦酸基、單芳基膦酸基等。此等之中,更宜是二烷基膦酸基、二芳基膦酸基。The above-mentioned phosphonic acid group means that one or two hydroxyl groups on the phosphonic acid group are substituted by other organic side oxy groups; for example, it is preferably the aforementioned dialkylphosphonic acid group, two An arylphosphonic acid group, an alkylarylphosphonic acid group, a monoalkylphosphonic acid group, a monoarylphosphonic acid group or the like. Among these, a dialkylphosphonic acid group or a diarylphosphonic acid group is more preferable.

前述膦酸基之較佳的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是二乙基膦酸基、二丁基膦酸基、二苯基膦酸基。A preferred specific example of the above phosphonic acid group is, for example, a diethylphosphonic acid group, a dibutylphosphonic acid group or a diphenylphosphonic acid group.

前述所謂之膦酸根基(-PO3 H2 -、-PO3 H-),如以上所述,係指由膦酸基(-PO3 H2 )之酸第一解離或酸第二解離而來之共軛鹼基陰離子的意思。通常,較宜是與對陽離子一同使用。像這樣的對陽離子係可以適宜地選擇一般所知之物來使用,舉例來說,例如其可以是鎓類(例如,銨類、硫鎓類、鏻類、錪類、吖啶鎓等)、金屬離子類(例如,Na 、K 、Ca2+ 、Zn2+ 等)。The aforementioned so-called phosphonate group (-PO 3 H 2 -, -PO 3 H-), as described above, refers to the first dissociation of the acid of the phosphonic acid group (-PO 3 H 2 ) or the second dissociation of the acid. The meaning of the conjugated base anion. Generally, it is preferred to use it together with a cation. Such a cationic system may be suitably selected from those generally known, and for example, it may be an anthracene (for example, ammonium, sulfonium, anthraquinone, anthraquinone, acridine, etc.), Metal ions (for example, Na + , K + , Ca 2+ , Zn 2+ , etc.).

前述之膦酸根基,可以是在膦酸基之內的氫氧基經取代成一個有機側氧基之物的共軛鹼陰離子基,像這樣的具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是前述之單烷基膦酸氧基(-PO3 H(alkyl))、單芳基膦酸基(-PO3 H(aryl))之共軛鹼基。The aforementioned phosphonate group may be a conjugated base anion group in which a hydroxyl group within the phosphonic acid group is substituted with an organic pendant oxy group, and as such a specific example, for example, it may be the aforementioned A conjugated base of a monoalkylphosphonic acidoxy group (-PO 3 H(alkyl)) or a monoarylphosphonic acid group (-PO 3 H(aryl)).

前述之芳香族係可以藉由將1種以上的含有芳香族基的游離基聚合性化合物、與視情況需要的1種以上之其他的游離基聚合性化合物之共聚合成分,利用一般的游離基聚合法來製造。The aromatic group may be a generalized radical group by copolymerizing one or more aromatic group-containing radical polymerizable compounds and, if necessary, one or more other radical polymerizable compounds. Manufactured by polymerization.

前述之游離基聚合法,舉例來說,例如其可以是一般的懸濁聚合法或溶液聚合法。The radical polymerization method described above may be, for example, a general suspension polymerization method or a solution polymerization method.

前述之含有芳香族的游離基聚合性化合物,例如,較宜是以構造式(A)所代表的化合物、構造式(B)所代表的化合物。The above-mentioned aromatic-containing radical polymerizable compound is preferably a compound represented by the structural formula (A) or a compound represented by the structural formula (B).

但,在前述構造式(A)中,R1 、R2 及R3 係代表氫原子或1價的有機基。L係代表有機基,沒有亦可以。Ar係代表可含有雜環之芳香族基。However, in the above structural formula (A), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The L system represents an organic group and is not acceptable. The Ar system represents an aromatic group which may contain a hetero ring.

但,在前述構造式(B)中,R1 、R2 及R3 以及Ar係代表與前述構造式(A)相同的意義。However, in the above structural formula (B), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 and Ar represent the same meanings as the above structural formula (A).

前述L之有機基,舉例來說,例如其可以是由非金屬構成原子的多價有機基,由1到60個碳原子、0個到10個氮原子、0個到50之氧原子、1個到100之氫原子、及0個到20之硫原子所形成之物。The organic group of the above L, for example, may be a polyvalent organic group composed of a non-metal atom, from 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 A substance formed by a hydrogen atom of 100 and a sulfur atom of 0 to 20.

比較具體而言,前述之L的有機基,舉例來說,例如其可以是由以下述的構造單位組合所構成之物、多價萘、多價蒽等。More specifically, the organic group of L described above may be, for example, a composition composed of the following structural units, polyvalent naphthalene, polyvalent hydrazine or the like.

前述L之連結基也可以具有取代基,前述之取代基,舉例來說,例如其可以是前述之鹵素原子、羥基、羧基、磺酸根基、硝基、氰基、醯胺基、胺基、烷基、烯基、炔基、芳基、取代氧基、取代磺醯基、取代羰基、取代亞磺醯基、磺酸基、膦酸基、膦酸根基、矽烷基、雜環基。The linking group of L may have a substituent, and the substituent may be, for example, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfonate group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a decylamino group, an amine group, or the like. Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, substituted oxy, substituted sulfonyl, substituted carbonyl, substituted sulfinyl, sulfonate, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, decyl, heterocyclic.

在前述之以構造式(A)所代表的化合物及以構造式(B)所代表的化合物之中,從感度觀點來看,以構造式(A)這一方面較理想。又,在前述之構造式(A)中,從安定性觀點來看,較宜具有連結基;前述L之有機基,從非畫像部之去除性(顯像性)來看,較宜是碳數為1~4之烷基。Among the compounds represented by the structural formula (A) and the compounds represented by the structural formula (B), the structural formula (A) is preferred from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Further, in the above structural formula (A), it is preferred to have a linking group from the viewpoint of stability; and the organic group of L is preferably carbon in view of the removal property (developability) of the non-image portion. The number is 1 to 4 alkyl groups.

以前述之構造式(A)所代表的化合物,係為含有下述的構造式(I)之構造單位的化合物。又,以前述之構造式(B)所代表的化合物,係為含有下述的構造式(Ⅱ)之構造單位的化合物。在此等之中,從保存安定性之觀點來看,以構造式(I)之構造單位這一方面較理想。The compound represented by the above structural formula (A) is a compound containing a structural unit of the following structural formula (I). Further, the compound represented by the above structural formula (B) is a compound containing a structural unit of the following structural formula (II). Among these, from the viewpoint of preserving stability, it is preferable to use the structural unit of the structural formula (I).

但,在前述構造式(I)及(Ⅱ)中,R1 、R2 及R3 以及Ar係代表與前述構造式(A)及(B)相同的意義。However, in the above structural formulae (I) and (II), R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and Ar represent the same meanings as the above structural formulae (A) and (B).

在前述構造式(I)及(Ⅱ)中,從非畫像部之去除性(顯像性)來看,較宜是R1 及R2 為氫原子、而R3 為甲基者。In the above structural formulae (I) and (II), from the viewpoint of the removability (developability) of the non-image portion, it is preferred that R 1 and R 2 are a hydrogen atom and R 3 is a methyl group.

又,在前述構造式(I)之L,從非畫像部之去除性(顯像性)來看,較宜是碳數為1~4之烷基。In addition, L of the above structural formula (I) is preferably an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 4 from the viewpoint of the removability (developability) of the non-image portion.

以前述之構造式(A)所代表的化合物、或以前述之構造式(B)所代表的化合物係沒有特別地限定,然而舉例來說,例如,其可以是下述之例示化合物(1)~(30)。The compound represented by the above structural formula (A) or the compound represented by the above structural formula (B) is not particularly limited, but, for example, it may be, for example, the following exemplified compound (1) ~(30).

在前述之例示化合物(1)~(30)之中,較宜是(5)、(6)、(11)、(14)及(28);在此等之中,從保存安定性及顯像性之觀點來看,更宜是(5)及(6)。Among the above-exemplified compounds (1) to (30), it is preferred to be (5), (6), (11), (14) and (28); among these, from the preservation stability and display From the point of view of sex, it is more appropriate to be (5) and (6).

在前述黏合劑中,前述可含有雜環之芳香族基的含量雖然沒有特別地限定,然而在高分子化合物的全部構造單位為100莫耳%之情況下,較宜是含有20莫耳%以上、更宜是含有30~45莫耳%以上之以前述構造式(I)所代表的構造單位。當前述之含量小於20莫耳%時,保存安定性就降低;而超過45莫耳%時,則就會有顯像性下降的情形。In the above-mentioned binder, the content of the aromatic group which may contain a hetero ring is not particularly limited. However, when the total structural unit of the polymer compound is 100 mol%, it is preferable to contain 20 mol% or more. More preferably, it is a structural unit represented by the above structural formula (I) containing 30 to 45 mol% or more. When the content is less than 20 mol%, the storage stability is lowered, and when it exceeds 45 mol%, the development is lowered.

-乙烯性不飽和鍵-- Ethylene unsaturated bond -

前述之乙烯性不飽和鍵並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇,例如,較宜是以下述構造式(Ⅲ)~(Ⅴ)所代表者。The above-mentioned ethylenically unsaturated bond is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. For example, it is preferably represented by the following structural formulae (III) to (V).

但,在前述構造式(Ⅲ)~(Ⅴ)中,R1 ~R11 係個別獨立地代表1價的有機基。X及Y係個別獨立地代表氧原子、硫原子、或-N-R4 。Z係代表氧原子、硫原子、或-N-R4 或伸苯基。R4 係代表氫原子或1價的有機基。However, in the above structural formulae (III) to (V), R 1 to R 11 each independently represent a monovalent organic group. X and Y each independently represent an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or -N-R 4 . The Z series represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or -N-R 4 or a phenyl group. R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

在前述構造(Ⅲ)中之R1 ,例如,較宜是個別獨立地代表氫原子、可具有取代基之烷基等,又由於氫原子、甲基之游離基反應性高的緣故,因而更理想。R 1 in the above structure (III) is, for example, preferably an individual independently representing a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, etc., and is also highly reactive with a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and thus ideal.

前述之R2 及R3 ,舉例來說,例如,可以各個獨立為氫原子、鹵素原子、胺基、羧基、烷氧羰基、磺酸基、硝基、氰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、可具有取代基之烷氧基、可具有取代基之芳氧基、可具有取代基之烷基胺基、可具有取代基之芳基胺基、可具有取代基之烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基之芳基磺醯基等;從游離基反應性高的觀點來看,更宜是氫原子、羧基、烷氧羰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基。The above R 2 and R 3 may, for example, be each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amine group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a nitro group, a cyano group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. An aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, an arylamine group which may have a substituent, may have a substitution The alkylsulfonyl group, the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, etc.; from the viewpoint of high reactivity of the radical, it is more preferably a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent An aryl group which may have a substituent.

前述之R4 ,例如,較宜是可具有取代基之烷基等;從游離基反應性高之觀點來看,更宜是氫原子、甲基、乙基、異丙基。The above R 4 is , for example, preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and the like; and from the viewpoint of high reactivity of the radical, it is more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group.

此處,可導入的前述之取代基,舉例來說,例如其可以是烷基、烯基、炔基、芳基、烷氧基、芳氧基、鹵素原子、胺基、烷基胺基、芳基胺基、羧基、烷氧羰基、磺酸基、硝基、氰基、醯胺基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基等。Here, the aforementioned substituent which may be introduced, for example, may be an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a halogen atom, an amine group, an alkylamine group, An arylamine group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a decylamino group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group or the like.

在前述構造(4)中的R4 ~R8 ,例如,較宜是氫原子、鹵素原子、胺基、二烷基胺基、羧基、烷氧羰基、磺酸基、硝基、氰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、可具有取代基之烷氧基、可具有取代基之芳氧基、可具有取代基之烷基胺基、可具有取代基之芳基胺基、可具有取代基之烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基之芳基磺醯基等;更宜是氫原子、羧基、烷氧羰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基。R 4 to R 8 in the above structure (4) are, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amine group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a nitro group, a cyano group, or the like. An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and an aromatic group which may have a substituent An amino group, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, etc.; more preferably a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, may have a substitution Base aryl.

可導入的前述之取代基,例如,在前述構造(Ⅲ)中所列舉例示之物。The aforementioned substituents which can be introduced are, for example, those exemplified in the above-mentioned configuration (III).

在前述之構造式(5)中的R9 ,例如,較宜是氫原子、可具有取代基之烷基等,從游離基反應性高的觀點來看,更宜是氫原子、甲基。R 9 in the above structural formula (5) is, for example, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group from the viewpoint of high reactivity of the radical.

在前述之R10 及R11 ,舉例來說,例如,可以各個獨立為氫原子、鹵素原子、胺基、二烷基胺基、羧基、烷氧羰基、磺酸基、硝基、氰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、可具有取代基之烷氧基、可具有取代基之芳氧基、可具有取代基之烷基胺基、可具有取代基之芳基胺基、可具有取代基之烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基之芳基磺醯基等;從游離基反應性高的觀點來看,更宜是氫原子、羧基、烷氧羰基、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基。In the foregoing R 10 and R 11 , for example, each may independently be a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amine group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a nitro group, a cyano group, or the like. An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and an aromatic group which may have a substituent An aminoalkyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and the like; and a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or the like, from the viewpoint of high reactivity of a radical, An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent.

此處,可導入的前述之取代基,例如,在前述構造(Ⅲ)中所列舉例示之物。Here, the aforementioned substituent which can be introduced, for example, the exemplified ones listed in the above configuration (III).

前述之Z係代表氧原子、硫原子、-NR13 -或可具有取代基之伸苯基。R13 係代表可具有取代基之烷基,從游離基反應性高的觀點來看,較宜是氫原子、甲基、乙基、異丙基。The aforementioned Z series represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, -NR 13 - or a stretched phenyl group which may have a substituent. R 13 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group from the viewpoint of high reactivity of a radical.

在以前述之構造式(Ⅲ)~(V)所代表的側鏈乙烯性不飽和鍵之中,從聚合反應性高且感度也高的觀點來看,更宜是構造式(Ⅲ)者。Among the side chain ethylenically unsaturated bonds represented by the above structural formulae (III) to (V), those having a high polymerization reactivity and a high sensitivity are more preferably those of the structural formula (III).

在前述高分子化合物中的前述乙烯性不飽和鍵之含量,雖然並沒有特別地限定,然而較宜是0.5~3.0 meq/g,更宜是1.0~3.0 meq/g,特佳為1.5~2.8 meq/g。當前述之含量小於0.5 meq/g時,則就會有因硬化反應量少而造成低感度的情況;當高於3.0 meq/g時,就會有保存安定性變差的情況。The content of the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polymer compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 meq/g, more preferably 1.0 to 3.0 meq/g, and particularly preferably 1.5 to 2.8. Meq/g. When the content is less than 0.5 meq/g, there is a case where the amount of hardening reaction is small and low sensitivity is caused. When it is higher than 3.0 meq/g, the preservation stability may be deteriorated.

本文中,前述之含量(meq/g),例如,係可以藉由碘價滴定來進行測定。Herein, the aforementioned content (meq/g) can be measured, for example, by iodine titration.

將以前述之構造式(Ⅲ)所代表的乙烯性不飽和鍵導入側鏈中的方法,雖然並沒有特別地限定,然而舉例來說,例如其可以是使在側鏈上含有羧基的高分子化合物、與具有乙烯性不飽和鍵及環氧基之化合物,進行加成反應而得到。The method of introducing the ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the above structural formula (III) into the side chain is not particularly limited, and for example, it may be, for example, a polymer having a carboxyl group in a side chain. The compound is obtained by an addition reaction with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and an epoxy group.

前述之在側鏈上含有羧基的高分子化合物,舉例來說,例如,可以藉由一般之游離基聚合方法,將含有1種以上之羧基的游離基聚合性化合物、與視情況需要的1種以上之其他的游離基聚合性化合物之共聚合成分來製造;前述之游離基聚合法,舉例來說,例如其可以是懸濁聚合法、溶液聚合法等。In the above-mentioned polymer compound having a carboxyl group in the side chain, for example, a radical polymerizable compound containing one or more kinds of carboxyl groups and, if necessary, one type as required by a general radical polymerization method can be used. The radical polymerization component of the above other radical polymerizable compound is produced. The radical polymerization method may be, for example, a suspension polymerization method or a solution polymerization method.

前述之具有乙烯性不飽和鍵及環氧基之化合物,只要是具有此等即可,雖然並沒有特別地限定,然而,例如,較宜是以下述之構造式(Ⅵ)所代表的化合物及以構造式(Ⅶ)所代表的化合物。尤其,從感度化之觀點來看,較佳為以構造式(Ⅵ)所代表之化合物。The above-mentioned compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and an epoxy group is not particularly limited as long as it has such a compound, and, for example, it is preferably a compound represented by the following structural formula (VI) and A compound represented by the formula (VII). In particular, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, a compound represented by the structural formula (VI) is preferred.

但,在前述之構造式(Ⅵ)中,R1 係代表氫原子或甲基。L1 係代表有機基。However, in the above structural formula (VI), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. The L 1 group represents an organic group.

但,在前述之構造式(Ⅶ)中,R2 係代表氫原子或甲基。L2 係代表有機基。W係代表4~7員環之脂肪族烴基。However, in the above structural formula (VII), R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. The L 2 system represents an organic group. The W system represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group of a 4 to 7 member ring.

在前述構造式(Ⅵ)所代表的化合物及構造式(Ⅶ)所代表的化合物之中,較宜是以構造式(Ⅵ)所代表的化合物;更宜是前述構造式(Ⅵ)中的L1之碳數為1~4之伸烷基者。Among the compounds represented by the above structural formula (VI) and the compound represented by the structural formula (VII), a compound represented by the structural formula (VI) is preferred; and L1 in the above structural formula (VI) is more preferred. The carbon number is 1 to 4 alkyl groups.

在以前述構造式(Ⅵ)所代表的化合物及以構造式(Ⅶ)所代表的化合物之中,雖然並沒有特別地限定,然而舉例來說,例如其可以是下述之例示化合物(31)~(40)。In the compound represented by the above structural formula (VI) and the compound represented by the structural formula (VII), although not particularly limited, for example, it may be, for example, the following exemplified compound (31) ~(40).

前述之含有羧基的游離基聚合性化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、伊康酸、巴豆酸、馬來酸、p-羧基苯乙烯等,特佳為丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸等。The above-mentioned carboxyl group-containing radical polymerizable compound may, for example, be acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, p-carboxystyrene or the like, particularly preferably acrylic acid or methyl group. Acrylic, etc.

前述之向側鏈導入之反應,例如,可以三乙基胺、苄基胺等之3級胺、十二烷基甲基氯化銨、四甲基氯化銨、四乙基氯化銨等之4級銨鹽、吡啶、三苯基膦等做為觸媒,於有機溶劑中,在50~150℃之反應溫度下,進行反應數小時~數十小時而完成。The above-mentioned reaction for introducing into the side chain may, for example, be a tertiary amine such as triethylamine or benzylamine, dodecylmethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride or tetraethylammonium chloride. The fourth-order ammonium salt, pyridine, triphenylphosphine or the like is used as a catalyst, and the reaction is carried out in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C for several hours to several tens of hours.

前述之側鏈上具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之構造單位,雖然並沒有特別地限定,然而,例如,較宜是以下述構造式(i)所代表的構造、構造式(ii)所代表的構造、及此等之混合所代表之物。The structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the above-mentioned side chain is not particularly limited. However, for example, it is preferably a structure represented by the following structural formula (i) and a structure represented by the structural formula (ii). And what is represented by the mixture of these.

但,在前述之構造式(i)及(ii)中,Ra~Rc係代表氫原子或1價的有機基。R1 係代表氫原子或甲基。L1 係代表可具有連結基的有機基。However, in the above structural formulae (i) and (ii), Ra to Rc represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. The L 1 group represents an organic group which may have a linking group.

在高分子化合物中的前述之以構造式(i)所代表的構造乃至構造式(ii)所代表的構造之含量,較宜是20莫耳%以上,更宜是20~50莫耳%,特佳為25~45莫耳%。當前述之含量小於20莫耳%時,就會有因硬化反應量少而成為低感度的情況,當比50莫耳%多時,就會有保存安定性變差的情況。The content of the structure represented by the structural formula (i) or the structure represented by the structural formula (ii) in the polymer compound is preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 20 to 50 mol%. Very good for 25~45%. When the content is less than 20 mol%, the amount of hardening reaction may be low and the sensitivity may be low. When the amount is more than 50 mol%, the storage stability may be deteriorated.

-羧基--carboxyl-

在本發明之高分子化合物中,為了提昇非畫像部去除性等之各項性能,也可以具有羧基。In the polymer compound of the present invention, a carboxyl group may be provided in order to improve various properties such as non-image portion removability.

前述之羧基,係可以藉著使具有游離基聚合性化合物進行共聚合而提供給高分子化合物。The above carboxyl group can be supplied to the polymer compound by copolymerizing a compound having a radical polymerizable compound.

像這樣的游離基聚合性化合物所具有的酸基,舉例來說,例如其可以是羧酸、磺酸、磷酸基等,特佳為羧基。The acid group of the radical polymerizable compound as described above may be, for example, a carboxylic acid, a sulfonic acid or a phosphoric acid group, and particularly preferably a carboxyl group.

前述之具有羧基的游離基聚合性化合物並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、伊康酸、巴豆酸、異巴豆酸、馬來酸、p-羧基苯乙烯等。此等之中,較宜是丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸酯、p-羧基苯乙烯。此等係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上來使用。The radical polymerizable compound having a carboxyl group as described above is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and for example, it may be acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, or horse. Acid, p-carboxystyrene, etc. Among these, acrylic acid, methacrylate, and p-carboxystyrene are preferred. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

在黏合劑中的前述羧基之含量宜為1.0~4.0 meq/g,較宜是1.5~3.0 meq/g。當前述之含量小於1.0 meq/g時,就會有顯像性不夠充分的情況;而當超過4.0 meq/g時,則會由於鹼水顯像而使得畫像強度容易受到破壞。The content of the aforementioned carboxyl group in the binder is preferably from 1.0 to 4.0 meq/g, more preferably from 1.5 to 3.0 meq/g. When the content is less than 1.0 meq/g, the development is insufficient, and when it exceeds 4.0 meq/g, the strength of the image is easily damaged by the development of alkali water.

本發明之高分子化合物,為了提昇影像度等各項性能之目的,除了前述游離基聚合性化合物之外,較宜是更進一步地與其他的游離基聚合性化合物共聚合。In order to enhance various properties such as image quality, the polymer compound of the present invention is preferably further copolymerized with other radical polymerizable compounds in addition to the above-mentioned radical polymerizable compound.

前述之其他的游離基聚合性化合物,舉例來說,例如,其可以是從丙烯酸酯類、甲基丙烯酸酯類、苯乙烯類等之中所選取的游離基聚合性化合物等。The other radical polymerizable compound, for example, may be, for example, a radical polymerizable compound selected from the group consisting of acrylates, methacrylates, and styrenes.

具體而言,舉例來說,例如,可以是丙烯酸烷酯等之丙烯酸酯類,丙烯酸芳酯、甲基丙烯酸烷酯等之甲基丙烯酸酯類,甲基丙烯酸芳酯、苯乙烯、烷基苯乙烯等之苯乙烯類,烷氧基苯乙烯、鹵化苯乙烯等。Specifically, for example, it may be an acrylate such as an alkyl acrylate, a methacrylate such as an aryl acrylate or an alkyl methacrylate, an aryl methacrylate, styrene or an alkylbenzene. A styrene such as ethylene, an alkoxy styrene, a halogenated styrene or the like.

前述之丙烯酸酯類,較宜是烷基的碳原子敷為1~20者,舉例來說,例如其可以是丙烯酸甲酯、丙烯酸乙酯、丙烯酸丙酯、丙烯酸丁酯、丙烯酸戊酯、丙烯酸乙基己酯、丙烯酸-t-辛酯、丙烯酸氯乙酯、丙烯酸2,2-二甲基羥丙酯、5-丙烯酸羥戊基乙酯、三羥甲基丙烷單丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇單丙烯酸酯、縮水甘油基單丙烯酸酯、丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、丙烯酸苯甲酯、丙烯酸甲基苯甲酯、丙烯酸呋喃甲酯、丙烯酸四羥甲基呋喃甲酯等。The above acrylates, preferably having a carbon atom of an alkyl group, are 1 to 20, for example, they may be methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, amyl acrylate, acrylic acid. Ethylhexyl acrylate, t-octyl acrylate, chloroethyl acrylate, 2,2-dimethylhydroxypropyl acrylate, 5-hydroxyethyl acrylate, trimethylolpropane monoacrylate, pentaerythritol monoacrylic acid Ester, glycidyl monoacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, methyl benzyl acrylate, furfuryl acrylate, tetramethylolfuran methyl acrylate, and the like.

前述之丙烯酸芳酯,舉例來說,例如其可以是丙烯酸苯酯等。The aforementioned aryl acrylate may, for example, be phenyl acrylate or the like.

前述之甲基丙烯酸酯類,較宜是烷基的碳原子數為1~20者,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲基丙烯酸甲酯、甲基丙烯酸丙酯、甲基丙烯酸異丙酯、甲基丙烯酸戊酯、甲基丙烯酸己酯、甲基丙烯酸環己酯、甲基丙烯酸苯甲酯、甲基丙烯酸氯苯甲酯、甲基丙烯酸辛酯、甲基丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯、甲基丙烯酸5-羥戊酯、甲基丙烯酸2,2-二甲基-3-羥丙酯、三羥甲丙烷單甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇單甲基丙烯酸甲酯、甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、甲基丙烯酸呋喃甲酯、甲基丙烯酸四羥甲基呋喃甲酯等。The above-mentioned methacrylates preferably have an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. For example, they may be methyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate or isopropyl methacrylate. Amyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, benzyl methacrylate, chlorobenzyl methacrylate, octyl methacrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate, A 5-hydroxypentyl acrylate, 2,2-dimethyl-3-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, trimethylolpropane monomethacrylate, pentaerythritol monomethyl methacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, Furan methyl methacrylate, tetramethylol methyl methacrylate, and the like.

前述之甲基丙烯酸芳酯,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲基丙烯酸苯酯、甲基丙烯酸甲酚酯、甲基丙烯酸萘酯等。The aforementioned aryl methacrylate may, for example, be phenyl methacrylate, cresyl methacrylate, naphthyl methacrylate or the like.

前述之苯乙烯類,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲基苯乙烯、二甲基苯乙烯、三甲基苯乙烯、乙基苯乙烯、二乙基苯乙烯、異丙基苯乙烯、丁基苯乙烯、己基苯乙烯、環己基苯乙烯、癸基苯乙烯、苄基苯乙烯、氯甲基苯乙烯、三氟甲基苯乙烯、乙氧基甲基苯乙烯、乙醯氧基甲基苯乙烯等。The aforementioned styrenes, for example, may be methyl styrene, dimethyl styrene, trimethyl styrene, ethyl styrene, diethyl styrene, isopropyl styrene, butyl. Styrene, hexyl styrene, cyclohexyl styrene, mercapto styrene, benzyl styrene, chloromethyl styrene, trifluoromethyl styrene, ethoxymethyl styrene, ethoxymethyl benzene Ethylene and the like.

前述之烷氧基苯乙烯,舉例來說,例如其可以是甲氧基苯乙烯、4-甲氧基-3-甲基苯乙烯、二甲氧基苯乙烯等。The alkoxystyrene described above may be, for example, methoxystyrene, 4-methoxy-3-methylstyrene, dimethoxystyrene or the like.

前述之鹵化苯乙烯,舉例來說,例如其可以是氯苯乙烯、二氯苯乙烯、三氯苯乙烯、四氯苯乙烯、五氯苯乙烯、溴苯乙烯、二溴苯乙烯、碘苯乙烯、氟苯乙烯、三苯乙烯、2-溴-4-三氟甲基苯乙烯、4-氟-3-三氟甲基苯乙烯等。The aforementioned halogenated styrene may be, for example, chlorostyrene, dichlorostyrene, trichlorostyrene, tetrachlorostyrene, pentachlorostyrene, bromostyrene, dibromostyrene, iodine styrene. , fluorostyrene, tristyrene, 2-bromo-4-trifluoromethylstyrene, 4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylstyrene, and the like.

此等之游離基聚合性化合物係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上來使用。These radical polymerizable compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

在合成本發明之高分子化合物時所使用的溶劑並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是二氯乙烯、環己酮、甲基乙基酮、丙酮、甲醇、乙醇、丙醇、丁醇、乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、2-甲氧基乙酸酯、1-甲氧-2-丙醇、1-甲氧-2-丙基乙酸酯、N,N-二甲基甲醯胺、N,N-二甲基乙醯胺、二甲基氧化膦、乙酸乙酯、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯等。此係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上來使用。The solvent to be used in the synthesis of the polymer compound of the present invention is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and for example, it may be, for example, dichloroethylene, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. , methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyacetate, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2- Propyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, dimethylphosphine oxide, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

本發明之高分子化合物的分子量,以質量平均分子量計,較宜是10,000以上,更宜是10,000~50,000。前述之質量平均分子量低到10,000時,硬化膜強度就會不夠;當超過50,000時,就會有顯像性下降的傾向。The molecular weight of the polymer compound of the present invention is preferably 10,000 or more, and more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, based on the mass average molecular weight. When the mass average molecular weight described above is as low as 10,000, the strength of the cured film is insufficient; when it exceeds 50,000, the developing property tends to decrease.

又,在本發明之高分子化合物中,也可以含有未反應的單體。在此情況下,在前述高分子化合物中的前述單體之含量,較宜是在15質量%以下。Further, the polymer compound of the present invention may contain an unreacted monomer. In this case, the content of the monomer in the polymer compound is preferably 15% by mass or less.

關於本發明之高分子化合物,係可以1種單獨使用,也可以混合2種以上來使用。又,也可以和其他的高分子化合物混合使用。在此情況下,在本發明的高分子化合物中之前述其他的高分子化合物之含量,較宜是在50質量%以下,更宜是30質量%以下。The polymer compound of the present invention may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, it may be used in combination with other polymer compounds. In this case, the content of the other polymer compound in the polymer compound of the present invention is preferably 50% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less.

在前述感光性組成物中的前述黏合劑之含量宜是5~80質量%,更宜是10~70質量%。The content of the binder in the photosensitive composition is preferably from 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably from 10 to 70% by mass.

〔聚合性化合物〕[Polymerizable compound]

前述之聚合性化合物並沒有特別地限定,雖然可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而較宜是具有至少1個以上之乙烯性不飽和鍵的化合物。The above-mentioned polymerizable compound is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is preferably a compound having at least one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.

可做為乙烯性不飽和鍵者,舉例來說,例如,可以是(甲基)丙烯醯基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基、苯乙烯基、乙烯基酯及乙烯基醚等之乙烯基、芳基酯及芳基醚等之芳基等。It can be used as an ethylenically unsaturated bond. For example, it may be a vinyl group such as a (meth) acrylonitrile group, a (meth) acryl amide group, a styryl group, a vinyl ester or a vinyl ether. An aryl group such as an aryl ester or an aryl ether.

前述具有1個以上乙烯性不飽和鍵的化合物並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而舉例來說,比較適合者為從具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之單體中所選取的至少1種。The compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but, for example, it is preferable to use a monomer having a (meth) acrylonitrile group. At least one of the selected ones.

前述之前述之具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之單體並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇;舉例來說,例如其可以是聚乙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯等之單官能基丙烯酸酯或單官能基甲基丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷二丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己烷二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)三聚氰酸酯、甘油三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷、甘油、雙酚等之於多官能基醇上進行環氧乙烷基或環氧丙烷之加成反應後經(甲基)丙烯酸酯化之物;於特公昭48-41708號、特公昭50-6034號、特開昭51-37193號等各公報上所記載之丙烯酸脲酯類;於特開昭48-64183號、特公昭49-43191號、特公昭52-30490號等各公報上所記載之聚酯丙烯酸酯類;環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸之反應生成物的環氧基丙烯酸酯類等之多官能基丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯等。此等之中,特佳為三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯。The aforementioned monomer having a (meth)acryl fluorenyl group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose of the object; for example, it may be polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, for example Monofunctional acrylate or monofunctional methacrylate such as polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate or phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate; polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol Di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol IV (Meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, hexane diol di(meth) acrylate, trishydroxy Methylpropane tris(propylene methoxypropyl)ether, tris(propylene decyloxyethyl)isocyanate, tris(propylene decyloxyethyl) cyanurate, glycerol tris(methyl Acrylate, trimethylolpropane, glycerin, bisphenol, etc. on a polyfunctional alcohol for epoxy A (meth) acrylated product obtained by an addition reaction of an alkyl group or a propylene oxide; it is described in each of the publications of Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho-50-6034, and No. Sho 51-37193 The urethane acrylates described in each of the publications of JP-A-48-64183, JP-A-49-43191, and JP-A-52-30490; epoxy resins and (meth)acrylic acid; The polyfunctional acrylate or methacrylate of an epoxy acrylate or the like of the reaction product. Among these, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate is particularly preferable.

在前述之感光性組成物固體成分中的前述聚合性化合物之固體成分含量,較宜是5~50質量%,更佳為10~40質量%。當該固體成分含量為小於5質量%時,就會產生顯像性惡化、曝光感度降低等之問題;而當超過50質量%時,就會有感光層之黏著性變得過強的情形。The solid content of the polymerizable compound in the solid content of the photosensitive composition is preferably from 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably from 10 to 40% by mass. When the content of the solid content is less than 5% by mass, problems such as deterioration in developability and deterioration in exposure sensitivity occur, and when it exceeds 50% by mass, the adhesion of the photosensitive layer may become too strong.

<光聚合起始系化合物><Photopolymerization Initiating Compound>

前述之其他的光聚合起始系化合物係包括光聚合起始劑(游離基發生劑及氫提供體等),更且可以進一步包括增感劑。The other photopolymerization initiating compound described above includes a photopolymerization initiator (a radical generator and a hydrogen donor, etc.), and may further include a sensitizer.

前述之光聚合起始劑只要是具有啟動前述聚合性化合物之聚合的能力即可,並沒有特別地限定,雖然可以從公知的光聚合起始劑中適當地選擇,然而,例如,較宜是對於紫外線到可見光具有感光性之物,可以是和光激發之增感劑發生任何作用而生成活性游離基之活性劑,也可以是按照單體的種類而啟動陽離子聚合之起始劑。The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound, and may be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators, however, for example, it is preferably The ultraviolet ray to visible light sensitizing substance may be an active agent which generates any active radical by any action of a photoexcited sensitizer, or may be an initiator which initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of the monomer.

又,前述之光聚合起始劑較宜是含有至少1種的在約300~800奈米(更宜是330~500奈米)的範圍內具有至少約50之分子吸光係數的成分。Further, the photopolymerization initiator is preferably one containing at least one molecular absorption coefficient of at least about 50 in the range of about 300 to 800 nm (more preferably 330 to 500 nm).

<<光聚合起始劑>><<Photopolymerization initiator>>

前述之光聚合起始劑,舉例來說,例如其可以是鹵化烴衍生物(例如,具有三骨架之物、具有二唑骨架之物等)、六芳基聯咪唑、肟衍生物、有機過氧化物、硫化合物、酮化合物、芳香族鎓鹽、金屬茂類及醯基氧化膦等。在此等之中,從保存性之觀點來看,較宜是具有醯基氧化膦、酮化合物。The aforementioned photopolymerization initiator may, for example, be a halogenated hydrocarbon derivative (for example, having three Skeleton A bisazole skeleton, etc.), a hexaarylbiimidazole, an anthracene derivative, an organic peroxide, a sulfur compound, a ketone compound, an aromatic onium salt, a metallocene, and a fluorenylphosphine oxide. Among these, from the viewpoint of preservability, it is preferred to have a mercaptophosphine oxide or a ketone compound.

前述之具有三骨架之鹵化烴化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是若林等記載於日本化學協會誌第42卷、第2924頁(1969)的化合物、英國專利第1388492號之說明書所記載的化合物、特開昭53-133428號公報上所記載的化合物、德國專利第3337024號之說明書所記載的化合物、F.C.Schaefer等於有機化學期刊第29卷、第1527頁(1964)上所記載的化合物、特開昭62-58241號公報上所記載的化合物、特開平5-281728號公報上所記載的化合物、特開平5-34920號公報上所記載的化合物、美國專利等4212976號之說明書上所記載的化合物等。The aforementioned has three The halogenated hydrocarbon compound of the skeleton may be, for example, a compound described in Japanese Society of Chemistry, Vol. 42, No. 2924 (1969), and a compound described in the specification of British Patent No. 1388492. The compound described in the specification of the patent publication No. 53-133428, the compound described in the specification of the German Patent No. 3337024, and the compound described in the Journal of Organic Chemistry, Vol. 29, p. 1527 (1964), JP-A-62-58241 The compound described in the Japanese Patent Publication No. Hei 5-281728, the compound described in JP-A No. 5-34920, and the compound described in the specification of No. 4,212,976, and the like.

前述之若林等記載於日本化學協會誌第42卷、第2924頁(1969)的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-苯基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-氯苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-甲苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-甲氧苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(2,4-二氯苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2,4,6-三(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-甲基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-n-壬基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、及2-(α ,α ,β -三氯乙基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三等。The above-mentioned compound, such as the Japanese Chemical Society, Vol. 42, pp. 2924 (1969), for example, 2-phenyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5 -three , 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(4-tolyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-methoxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2,4,6-tris(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-methyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-n-mercapto-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three And 2-( α , α , β -trichloroethyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之英國專利第1388492號說明書所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-苯乙烯基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-甲基苯乙烯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-甲氧苯乙烯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-甲氧苯乙烯基)-4-胺基-6-三氯甲基-1,3,5-三等。The compound described in the above-mentioned British Patent No. 1388492, for example, 2-styryl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(4-methylstyryl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-methoxystyryl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-(4-methoxystyryl)-4-amino-6-trichloromethyl-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之特開昭53-133428號公報上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-(4-甲氧-萘-1-基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-乙氧-萘-1-基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-〔4-(2-乙氧乙基)-萘-1-基〕-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4,7-二甲氧-萘-1-基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、及2-(乙烷合萘-5-基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三等。The compound described in JP-A-53-133428, for example, is, for example, 2-(4-methoxy-naphthalen-1-yl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1. 3,5-three 2-(4-Ethoxy-naphthalen-1-yl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-[4-(2-Ethoxyethyl)-naphthalen-1-yl]-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(4,7-Dimethoxy-naphthalen-1-yl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three And 2-(ethanenaphthalen-5-yl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之德國專利第3337024號說明書所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-(4-苯乙烯基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-(4-甲氧苯乙烯基)苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(1-萘基伸乙烯基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-氯苯乙烯苯基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-噻吩-2-伸乙烯基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-噻吩-3-伸乙烯基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-呋喃-2-伸乙烯基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三等。The compound described in the specification of the aforementioned German Patent No. 3337024, for example, 2-(4-styrylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-(4-methoxystyryl)phenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(1-naphthyl-extended vinylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-chlorostyrene phenyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-thiophene-2-extended vinylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-thiophene-3-strandylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-furan-2-extended vinylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之F.C.Schaefer等於有機化學期刊第29卷、第1527頁(1964)上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-甲基-4,6-雙(三溴甲基)-1,3,5-三、2,4,6-三(三溴甲基)-1,3,5-三、2,4,6-三(二溴甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-胺基-4-甲基-6-三(溴甲基)-1,3,5-三、及2-甲氧基-4-甲基-6-三氯甲基-1,3,5-三等。The aforementioned FC Schaefer is equivalent to the compound described in the Journal of Organic Chemistry, Vol. 29, p. 1527 (1964), for example, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-1,3,5. -three , 2,4,6-tris(tribromomethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2,4,6-tris(dibromomethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-amino-4-methyl-6-tris(bromomethyl)-1,3,5-three And 2-methoxy-4-methyl-6-trichloromethyl-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之特開昭62-58241號公報上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-(4-苯基乙炔基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-萘基-1-乙炔基苯基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-(4-甲苯基乙炔基)苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-(4-甲氧苯基)乙炔基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-(4-異丙基苯基乙炔基)苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(4-(4-乙基苯基乙炔基)苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三等。The compound described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-58241, for example, is 2-(4-phenylethynylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3, 5-three , 2-(4-naphthyl-1-ethynylphenyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three 2-(4-(4-Tolylethynyl)phenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three , 2-(4-(4-methoxyphenyl)ethynylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(4-(4-isopropylphenylethynyl)phenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(4-(4-ethylphenylethynyl)phenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之特開平5-281728號公報上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-(4-三氟甲基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(2,6-二氟苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(2,6-二氯苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三、2-(2,6-二溴苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)-1,3,5-三等。The compound described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 5-281728, for example, 2-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5 -three ,2-(2,6-difluorophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three ,2-(2,6-dibromophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-1,3,5-three Wait.

前述之特開平5-34920號公報上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2,4-雙(三氯甲基)-6-〔4-(N,N-二乙氧羰基甲基胺基)-3-溴苯基〕-1,3,5-三;美國專利等4239850號之說明書上所記載的三鹵甲基-s-三化合物,更進一步可以是2,4,6-三(三氯甲基)-s-三、2-(4-氯苯基)-4,6-雙(三溴甲基)-s-三等。The compound described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 5-34920, for example, is, for example, 2,4-bis(trichloromethyl)-6-[4-(N,N-diethoxycarbonylmethylamino) )-3-bromophenyl]-1,3,5-three Trihalomethyl-s-three as described in the specification of US Patent No. 4,239,850 The compound may further be 2,4,6-tris(trichloromethyl)-s-three 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-s-three Wait.

前述之美國專利等4212976號之說明書上所記載的化合物,舉例來說,例如2-三氯甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(1-萘基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-甲氧苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(1-萘基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-n-丁氧苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-二唑等)等。The compound described in the specification of the aforementioned U.S. Patent No. 4,212,976, for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorophenyl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(1-naphthyl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorostyryl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-methoxystyryl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(1-naphthyl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-n-butoxystyryl)-1,3,4- Diazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4- Diazole, etc.).

前述之六芳基聯咪唑,舉例來說,例如其可以是2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(o-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-溴苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2,4-二氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四(3-甲氧苯基)聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四(4-甲氧苯基)聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(4-甲氧苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2,4-二氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-硝基苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-甲基苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、2,2’-雙(2-三氟甲基苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑、於WO 00/52529號公報上所記載的化合物等。The aforementioned hexaarylbiimidazole, for example, may be 2,2'-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2' - bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-bromophenyl)-4,4',5,5'- Tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-chlorobenzene -4,4',5,5'-tetrakis(3-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-four (4-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis (2 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-nitrophenyl)-4,4',5,5'- Tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-methylphenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(2-trifluoromethyl) Phenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, a compound described in WO 00/52529, and the like.

前述之聯咪唑類,例如,係可以藉由於日本化學協會誌第33卷第565頁(1960)、及日本有機化學第36(16)卷第2262頁(1971)上所揭示的方法而容易地合成。The aforementioned biimidazoles, for example, can be easily obtained by the method disclosed in Japanese Society of Chemistry, Vol. 33, p. 565 (1960), and Japanese Organic Chemistry, Vol. 36 (16), p. 2262 (1971). synthesis.

前述之肟衍生物,舉例來說,例如,其可以是3-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-乙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-丙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基戊烷-3-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、2-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、3-(4-甲苯磺醯氧基)亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、及2-乙氧基羰氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮等。The aforementioned anthracene derivative, for example, may be 3-benzylideneoxyimidobutan-2-one, 3-ethyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3- Propyl methoxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxymethoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-ethyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-Benzyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Iminoamino-1-phenylpropan-1-one and the like.

前述之酮化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是二苯甲酮、2-甲基二苯甲酮、3-甲基二苯甲酮、4-甲基二苯甲酮、4-甲氧基二苯甲酮、2-氯二苯甲酮、4-氯二苯甲酮、4-溴二苯甲酮、2-羧基二苯甲酮、2-乙氧基羰基二苯甲酮、二苯甲酮四羧酸或其四甲基酯、4,4’-雙(二烷基胺基)二苯甲酮類(例如,4,4’-雙(二甲基胺基)二苯甲酮、4,4’-(雙二環己基胺基)二苯甲酮、4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮、4,4’-雙(二羥乙基胺基)二苯甲酮、4-甲氧基-4’-二甲基胺基二苯甲酮、4,4’-二甲氧基二苯甲酮、4-二甲基胺基二苯甲酮、4-二甲基胺基苯乙酮、苄基、蒽醌、2-t-丁基蒽醌、2-甲基蒽醌、菲醌、、噻噸酮、2-氫噻噸酮、2,4-二乙氧基噻噸酮、茀酮、2-苄基-二甲基胺基-1-(4-嗎啉苯基)-1-丁酮、2-甲基-1-〔4-(甲基硫)苯基〕-2-嗎啉基-1-丙酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-〔4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基〕丙醇寡聚物、苯偶因、苯偶因醚類(例如,苯偶因甲醚、苯偶因乙醚、苯偶因丙醚、苯偶因異丙醚、苯偶因苯醚、苄基二甲基縮酮)、吖啶酮、氯吖啶酮、N-甲基吖啶酮、N-丁基吖啶酮、N-丁基-氯吖啶酮等。The aforementioned ketone compound, for example, may be benzophenone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 4-methoxyl Benzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone, 2-carboxybenzophenone, 2-ethoxycarbonylbenzophenone, diphenyl Ketone tetracarboxylic acid or its tetramethyl ester, 4,4'-bis(dialkylamino)benzophenone (for example, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)benzophenone , 4,4'-(bisdicyclohexylamino)benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(dihydroxyethylamino) Benzophenone, 4-methoxy-4'-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-dimethoxybenzophenone, 4-dimethylaminobenzophenone , 4-dimethylaminoacetophenone, benzyl, hydrazine, 2-t-butylhydrazine, 2-methylindole, phenanthrenequinone, , thioxanthone, 2-hydrothioxanthone, 2,4-diethoxythioxanthone, anthrone, 2-benzyl-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinylphenyl)-1 -butanone, 2-methyl-1-[4-(methylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinyl-1-propanone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-[4-(1-methyl) Vinyl)phenyl]propanol oligomer, benzoin, benzoin ether (for example, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ether, benzoin propyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoate) Indoline, benzyldimethylketal), acridone, chloroacridone, N-methylacridone, N-butylacridone, N-butyl-chloroacridone, and the like.

前述之金屬茂類,舉例來說,例如其可以是雙(η5 -2,4-環戊二烯-1-基)-雙(2,6-二氟-3-(1H-吡咯-1-基)-苯基)鈦、η5 -環戊二烯基-η6 -異丙苯基-鐵(1+)-六氟磷酸鹽(1-)、於特開昭53-133428號公報、特公昭57-1819號公報、特公昭57-6096號公報、及美國專利第3615455號說明書上所記載的化合物等。The aforementioned metallocenes, for example, may be bis(η 5 -2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)-bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrole-1) -yl)-phenyl)titanium, η 5 -cyclopentadienyl-η 6 -isopropylphenyl-iron (1+)-hexafluorophosphate (1-), JP-A-53-133428, The compound described in Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 57-1819, Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 57-6096, and the specification of U.S. Patent No. 3,615,455.

前述之醯基氧化膦化合物,舉例來說,例如,其可以是雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)-苯基氧化膦、雙(2,6-二甲氧基苯甲醯基)-2,4,4-三甲基-戊基苯基氧化膦、路西林TPO、路西林TPO-L等。The aforementioned fluorenylphosphine oxide compound, for example, may be bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene)-phenylphosphine oxide, bis(2,6-dimethoxybenzene) Mercapto)-2,4,4-trimethyl-pentylphenylphosphine oxide, Luciferin TPO, Luciferin TPO-L, and the like.

又,上述以外之光聚合起始劑,舉例來說,例如,其可以是吖啶衍生物(例如,9-苯基吖啶、1,7-雙(9,9’-吖啶基)庚烷等)、N-苯基甘胺酸等、多鹵素化合物(例如,四溴化碳、苯基三溴甲基碸、苯基三氯甲基酮等)、香豆素類(例如,3-(2-苯并呋喃基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(2-苯并呋喃基)-7-(1-吡咯啶基)香豆素、3-苯甲醯基-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(2-甲氧基苯甲醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(4-二甲基胺基苯甲醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3,3’-羰基雙(5,7-二-n-丙氧基香豆素)、3,3’-羰基雙(7-二乙基胺基香豆素)、3-苯甲醯基-7-甲氧基香豆素、3-(2-呋喃醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(4-二乙基胺基肉桂醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、7-甲氧基-3-(3吡咯啶基羰基)香豆素、3-苯甲醯基-5,7-二丙氧基香豆素、7-苯并三唑-2-基香豆素、又於特開平5-19475號、特開平7-271028號、特開2002-363206號、特開2002-363207號、特開2002-363208號、特開2002-363209號公報等上所記載的香豆素化合物等),胺類(例如,4-二甲基胺基安息香酸乙酯、4-二甲基胺基安息香酸n-丁酯、4-二甲基胺基安息香酸苯乙酯、4-二甲基胺基安息香酸2-酞醯亞胺乙酯、4-二甲基胺基安息香酸2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙酯、五亞甲基雙(4-二甲基胺基苯甲酸酯)、3-二甲基胺基安息香酸之苯乙酯、五亞甲基酯、4-二甲基胺基苯甲醛、2-氯-4-二甲基胺基苯甲醛、4-二甲基胺基苄基醇、乙基(4-二甲基胺基苯甲醯基)乙酸酯、4-哌啶基苯乙酮、4-二甲基胺基苯偶因、N,N-二甲基-4-甲苯胺、N,N-二乙基-3-間乙氧苯胺、三苄基胺、二苄基苯基胺、N-甲基-N-苯基苄基胺、4-溴-N,N-二甲基苯胺、參十二烷基胺、胺基氟烷類(ODB、ODB Ⅱ等)、結晶紫內酯、隱色結晶紫等)等。Further, the photopolymerization initiator other than the above may be, for example, an acridine derivative (for example, 9-phenyl acridine or 1,7-bis(9,9'-acridinyl)g. Alkane or the like, N-phenylglycine, etc., polyhalogen compounds (for example, carbon tetrabromide, phenyltribromomethylhydrazine, phenyltrichloromethyl ketone, etc.), coumarins (for example, 3) -(2-benzofuranyl)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(2-benzofuranyl)-7-(1-pyrrolidinyl)coumarin, 3-benzylformamide -7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(2-methoxybenzimidyl)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(4-dimethylaminobenzoic acid Mercapto)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3,3'-carbonyl bis(5,7-di-n-propoxycoumarin), 3,3'-carbonyl bis (7-di Ethylamine coumarin), 3-benzylidene-7-methoxycoumarin, 3-(2-furylfluorenyl)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(4 -diethylamino cinnamyl)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 7-methoxy-3-(3 pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)coumarin, 3-benzylidene-5, 7-dipropoxycoumarin, 7- And triazol-2-ylcoumarin, and also in the special Kaiping 5-19475, special Kaiping 7-271028, special opening 2002-363206, special opening 2002-363207, special opening 2002-363208, special opening A coumarin compound or the like described in JP-A-2002-363209, an amine (for example, ethyl 4-dimethylamino benzoate, n-butyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 4- Diethylamino benzoic acid phenethyl ester, 4-dimethylamino benzoic acid 2-noniminoethyl ester, 4-dimethylamino benzoic acid 2-methyl propylene methoxyethyl ester, five Methylene bis(4-dimethylamino benzoate), phenylethyl 3-methylaminobenzoic acid, pentamethylene ester, 4-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde, 2- Chloro-4-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde, 4-dimethylaminobenzyl alcohol, ethyl (4-dimethylaminobenzimidyl) acetate, 4-piperidylacetophenone , 4-dimethylamino benzoin, N,N-dimethyl-4-toluidine, N,N-diethyl-3-m-ethoxyaniline, tribenzylamine, dibenzylphenyl Amine, N-methyl-N-phenylbenzylamine, 4-bromo-N,N-dimethylaniline Reference dodecylamine, fluoroalkyl amine type (ODB, ODB Ⅱ, etc.), crystal violet lactone, leuco crystal violet, etc.) and the like.

更且,於美國專利第2367660號說明書所記載的雙芥子基聚縮酮醛基化合物、美國專利第2448828號說明書上所記載的偶因醚、美國專利第2722512號說明書上所記載的以α-碳烴取代之芳香族偶因化合物、美國專利第3046127號說明書及美國專利第2951758號說明書上所記載的多核醌化合物、特開2002-229194號公報上所記載的有機硼化合物、自由基產生劑、三芳基鏻鹽(例如,六氟銻、六氟磷酸鹽之鹽)、鏻鹽化合物(例如,(苯基硫苯基)二苯基鏻鹽等)、(有效的陽離子起始劑)、於WO 01/71428號公報上所記載的鎓鹽化合物等。Further, in the case of the sucrose-based polyketal aldehyde-based compound described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 2,367,660, the occlusion ether described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 2,448,828 and the specification of U.S. Patent No. 2,722,512, The hydrocarbon-substituted aromatic porphyrin compound, the polynuclear ruthenium compound described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 3,046, 127 and the specification of U.S. Patent No. 2,591,758, and the organic boron compound and radical generator described in JP-A-2002-229194 a triarylsulfonium salt (for example, a salt of hexafluoroantimony or hexafluorophosphate), a phosphonium salt compound (for example, (phenylthiophenyl)diphenylphosphonium salt, etc.), (an effective cationic initiator), An onium salt compound or the like described in WO 01/71428.

前述之光聚合起始劑係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上。The photopolymerization initiator may be used singly or in combination of two or more.

前述之光聚合起始劑的特佳例子,舉例來說,例如,其可以是能夠對應於後述曝光中的405奈米波長之雷射光的前述之醯基氧化膦類、前述之α -胺基烷基酮類、前述之具有三骨架的鹵化羥化合物、和做為後述之增感劑的化合物組合成的複合光聚合起始劑、六芳基聯咪唑化合物、或氧雜環丁烷等。A particularly preferable example of the photopolymerization initiator described above may be, for example, the above-mentioned mercaptophosphine oxides capable of corresponding to laser light having a wavelength of 405 nm in the exposure described later, and the aforementioned α -amino group. Alkyl ketones, the aforementioned three have three A complex photopolymerization initiator, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, or an oxetane, which is a combination of a halogenated hydroxy compound of a skeleton and a compound which is a sensitizer described later.

在前述感光性組成物中的前述光聚合起始劑之含量較宜是0.1~30質量%,更宜是0.5~20質量%,特佳為0.5~15質量%。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive composition is preferably from 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 20% by mass, particularly preferably from 0.5 to 15% by mass.

<<增感劑>><<sensitizer>>

為達成調整在向前述感光層進行曝光時之曝光感度及感光波長之目的,除了加入前述之光聚合起始劑外,可以添加增感劑。In order to achieve the purpose of adjusting the exposure sensitivity and the light-sensing wavelength at the time of exposure to the photosensitive layer, a sensitizer may be added in addition to the photopolymerization initiator described above.

前述之增感劑係可以藉由做為後述的光照射機構之可見光線、紫外線光雷射及可見光雷射等而適當地選擇。The sensitizer described above can be appropriately selected by a visible light ray, an ultraviolet ray laser, a visible light laser or the like which is a light irradiation means to be described later.

前述之增感劑係可以藉由活性能量線而成為激發狀態,藉由與其他的物質(例如,游離基產生劑、酸產生劑等)間之相互作用(例如,能量移動、電子移動等)而產生游離基或酸等之有用基。The sensitizer described above can be excited by an active energy ray, and interacts with other substances (for example, a radical generator, an acid generator, etc.) (for example, energy movement, electron movement, etc.) A useful group of a radical or an acid is produced.

前述之光聚合起始劑和前述之增感劑的組合,舉例來說,例如,其可以是特開2001-305734號公報上所記載的電子移動型起始劑〔(1)電子供給型起始劑及增感色素、(2)電子接受型起始劑及增感色素、(3)電子供給型起始劑、增感色素及電子接受型起始劑(三元起始系)〕等之組合。The combination of the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator and the above-mentioned sensitizer is, for example, an electron-transporting initiator as described in JP-A-2001-305734 [(1) Electronic supply type Starting agent and sensitizing dye, (2) electron-accepting initiator and sensitizing dye, (3) electron-donating initiator, sensitizing dye and electron-accepting initiator (ternary starting system), etc. The combination.

前述之增感劑並沒有特別地限定,可以從公知的增感劑之中適當地選取;舉例來說,例如其可以是公知的多核芳香族類(例如,芘、苝、三鄰亞苯)、類(例如,螢光素、曙紅、紅黴素、若丹明B、孟加拉玫瑰紅)、花青類(例如,吲哚喹啉羰花青、硫喹啉羰花青、喹啉羰花青)、部花青類(例如,部花青、羰部花青)、噻類(例如,勞氏紫、亞甲基藍、甲苯胺藍)、吖啶類(例如,吖啶橙、氯黃素、吖黃素、9-苯基吖啶、1,7-雙(9,9’-吖啶基)庚烷)、蒽醌類(例如,蒽醌)、方形鎓類(例如,方形鎓)、吖啶酮類(例如,吖啶酮、氯吖啶酮、N-甲基吖啶酮、N-丁基吖啶酮、N-丁基-氯吖啶酮、2-氯-10-丁基吖啶酮等)、香豆素類(例如,3-(2-苯并呋喃醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(2-苯并呋喃醯基)-7-(1-吡咯啶基)香豆素、3-苯甲醯基-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(2-甲氧基苯甲醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(4-二甲基胺基苯甲醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3,3’-羰基雙(5,7-二-n-羧基香豆素)、3,3’-羰基雙(7-二乙基胺基香豆素)、3-苄基-7-甲氧基香豆素、3-(2-呋喃醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、3-(4-二乙基胺基肉桂醯基)-7-二乙基胺基香豆素、7-甲氧-3-(3-吡啶基羰基)香豆素、3-苯甲醯基-5,7-二丙氧基香豆素等,另外於特開平5-19475號、特開平7-271028號、特開2002-363206號、特開2002-363207號、特開2002-363208號、特開2002-363209號等之各公報上所記載的香豆素化合物等),及噻噸酮化合物(噻噸酮、異丙基噻噸酮、2,4-二乙基噻噸酮、1-氯-4-丙氧基酮、昆塔硬化QTX等)等;在此等之中,較宜是芳香族環或雜環為縮環之化合物(縮環系化合物),以及較理想是以至少2個的芳香族羥氫環及芳香族雜環中之任一者所取代的胺系化合物。The aforementioned sensitizer is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known sensitizers; for example, it may be a well-known polynuclear aromatic compound (for example, ruthenium, osmium, tri-o-phenylene). , Classes (eg, luciferin, eosin, erythromycin, rhodamine B, rose bengal), cyanines (eg, quinoxaline carbocyanine, thioquinoline carbocyanine, Quinoline carbocyanine), merocyanine (eg, merocyanine, carbonyl cyclamate), thia Classes (eg, Lloyd's violet, methylene blue, toluidine blue), acridines (eg, acridine orange, chlorsulfurin, quercetin, 9-phenyl acridine, 1,7-double (9,9') - acridinyl) heptane), anthraquinones (eg, anthracene), square anthracenes (eg, square anthracene), acridone (eg, acridone, chloroacridone, N-methylhydrazine) Ketone, N-butylacridone, N-butyl-chloroacridone, 2-chloro-10-butylacridone, etc., coumarins (for example, 3-(2-benzofuran) Mercapto)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(2-benzofuranyl)-7-(1-pyrrolidinyl)coumarin, 3-benzylidene-7-di Ethylamino coumarin, 3-(2-methoxybenzimidyl)-7-diethylamino coumarin, 3-(4-dimethylaminobenzimidyl)-7 -diethylamino coumarin, 3,3'-carbonyl bis(5,7-di-n-carboxycoumarin), 3,3'-carbonyl bis(7-diethylamino coumarin ), 3-benzyl-7-methoxycoumarin, 3-(2-furylfluorenyl)-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-(4-diethylaminocinnamyl) )-7-diethylamino coumarin, 7-methoxy -3-(3-pyridylcarbonyl)coumarin, 3-benzylidene-5,7-dipropoxycoumarin, etc., in addition to JP-A-5-19475, JP-A-7-271028, JP-A-2002-363206, JP-A-2002-363207, JP-A-2002-363208, JP-A-2002-363209, etc., coumarin compounds, etc., and thioxanthone compounds (thioxanthene) Ketone, isopropyl thioxanthone, 2,4-diethyl thioxanthone, 1-chloro-4-propoxy a ketone, a Kunta hardened QTX, etc.), etc., among these, a compound in which an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring is a condensed ring (condensed ring compound), and more preferably at least two aromatic hydrogen hydrides. An amine compound substituted with any of a ring and an aromatic hetero ring.

在前述之縮環系化合物之中,更宜是雜縮環系酮化合物(吖啶酮系化合物、噻噸酮系化合物、香豆素系化合物等)、及三系化合物。在前述之雜縮環系酮化合物之中,特佳是吖啶酮化合物及噻噸酮化合物。Among the above condensed ring-based compounds, a heterocyclic ketone compound (an acridone compound, a thioxanthone compound, a coumarin compound, etc.), and three are more preferable. a compound. Among the above heterocyclic ketone compounds, an acridone compound and a thioxanthone compound are particularly preferred.

前述之以至少2個的芳香族羥氫環及芳香族雜環中之任一者所取代的胺系化合物,較宜是對於330~450奈米之波長域的光具有最大吸收之增感劑,舉例來說,例如,其可以是二取代胺基二苯甲酮系化合物、具有對於苯環上之胺基而言為對位之碳原子的取代基之雜環基的二取代胺基-苯系化合物、具有對於苯環上之胺基而言為對位之碳原子的取代基之含磺醯基胺基的二取代胺基-苯系化合物、及形成有羰苯乙烯基骨架的二取代胺基-苯系化合物、以及在部分構造上具有至少2個芳香族環為鍵結於氮原子之構造的化合物等之二取代胺基-苯的化合物。The above-mentioned amine compound substituted with at least two aromatic hydroxyhydrogen rings and aromatic heterocyclic rings is preferably a sensitizer having maximum absorption for light in the wavelength range of 330 to 450 nm. For example, it may be, for example, a disubstituted aminobenzophenone type compound, a disubstituted amine group having a heterocyclic group having a substituent of a carbon atom which is a para atom to the amine group on the benzene ring - a benzene-based compound, a disulfonylamino group-containing disubstituted amino-benzene compound having a substituent of a carbon atom which is a para to the amine group on the benzene ring, and a carbonylstyrene-based skeleton A substituted-amino-benzene-based compound and a disubstituted amino-benzene compound having a structure in which at least two aromatic rings are partially bonded to a nitrogen atom.

前述之增感劑係可以單獨使用1種,也可以併用2種以上。These sensitizers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

前述之增感劑之摻混量,較宜是佔感光性組成物之總固體成分中的0.01~4質量%,更宜是0.02~2質量%,特佳為0.05~1質量%。The blending amount of the above-mentioned sensitizer is preferably from 0.01 to 4% by mass, more preferably from 0.02 to 2% by mass, particularly preferably from 0.05 to 1% by mass, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive composition.

當前述之含量小於0.01質量%時,感度就下降;當超過4質量%時,圖案形狀就會惡化。When the content is less than 0.01% by mass, the sensitivity is lowered; when it exceeds 4% by mass, the pattern shape is deteriorated.

<熱交聯劑><thermal crosslinking agent>

前述之熱交聯劑並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇,為了改良使用前述之感光性組成物形成的感光層之硬化後的膜強度之目的,例如,可以在不對於顯像性產生不良影響之範圍內,使用1分子內具有至少2個環氧乙烷基之環氧化合物、1分子內具有至少2個氧雜環丁烷基之氧雜環丁烷化合物。The above-mentioned thermal crosslinking agent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and may be used for the purpose of improving the film strength after curing of the photosensitive layer formed using the photosensitive composition described above, for example, without An epoxy compound having at least two ethylene oxide groups in one molecule and an oxetane compound having at least two oxetanyl groups in one molecule are used in the range in which the properties are adversely affected.

前述之在1分子內具有至少2個環氧乙烷基之環氧化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是聯二甲苯酚或聯酚型環氧樹脂(「YX4000,日本環氧樹脂公司製」等)或此等之混合物;具有異三聚氰酸酯骨架之雜環型環氧樹脂(「TEPIC,日產化學工業公司製」、「阿拉路易特PT810,汽巴特殊化學品公司製」等)、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、氫化雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚S型環氧樹脂、苯酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、甲酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、鹵化環氧樹脂(例如,低溴化環氧樹脂、高鹵化環氧樹脂、溴化苯酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂等)、含芳基之雙酚A型環氧樹脂、三苯酚甲烷型環氧樹脂、二苯基雙伸苯基型環氧樹脂、具有二環戊二烯骨架之環氧樹脂(「HP-7200、HP-7200H,大日本油墨化學工業(股)公司製」等)、縮水甘油基胺型環氧樹脂(二胺基二苯基甲烷型環氧樹脂、二縮水甘油基苯胺、三縮水甘油基胺基苯酚等)、縮水甘油基醚型環氧樹脂(酞酸二縮水甘油酯、己二酸二縮水甘油酯、六氫酞酸二縮水甘油酯、二聚物酸二縮水甘油酯等)、受阻胺型環氧樹脂、脂環式環氧樹脂(3,4-環氧基環庚基甲基-3’,4’-環氧基環庚烷羧酸酯、雙(3,4-環氧基環庚基甲基)己二酸、二環戊二烯環氧化物、「GT-300、GT-400、ZEHPE3150;戴西爾化學工業製」等)、醯亞胺型脂環式環氧樹脂、三羥基苯基甲烷型環氧樹脂、雙酚A酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、四苯基乙烷型環氧樹脂、酞酸縮水甘油酯樹脂、四縮水甘油基二甲苯酚乙烷樹脂、含萘基之環氧樹脂(萘酚芳烷基型環氧樹脂、萘酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、4官能萘型環氧樹脂,市售品有「ESN-190、ESN-360,新日鐵化學公司製」、「HP-4032、EXA-4750與EXA-4700,大日本油墨化學工業公司製」等)、由苯酚化合物和二乙烯基苯或二環戊二烯等之二烯烴化合物間之加成反應所得到的多酚化合物、與表氯醇間之反應物、以過醋酸等將4-乙烯基環庚烷-1-氧化物之開環聚合物予以環氧化者、具有直鏈狀含磷構造之環氧樹脂、具有環狀含磷構造之環氧樹脂、α -甲基茋型液晶型環氧樹脂、二苯甲醯氧基苯型液晶環氧樹脂、偶氮苯基型液晶環氧樹脂、偶氮亞甲基苯基型液晶環氧樹脂、聯萘基型液晶環氧樹脂、吖型環氧樹脂、甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯共聚物環氧樹脂(「CP-50S與CP-50M,日本油脂(股)公司製」等);環己基馬來醯亞胺與甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯之環氧樹脂共聚物、雙(縮水甘油基氧苯基)茀型環氧樹脂、雙(縮水甘油基氧苯基)金剛烷型環氧樹脂等。此等之環氧樹脂,係可以單獨使用1種,也可以併用2種以上。The epoxy compound having at least two ethylene oxide groups in one molecule, for example, may be dimethicone or a biphenol type epoxy resin ("YX4000, manufactured by Nippon Epoxy Co., Ltd." Or a mixture of these; a heterocyclic epoxy resin having an isomeric cyanate skeleton ("TEPIC, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.", "Ala Louise PT810, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd.", etc.) , bisphenol A epoxy resin, novolak epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, hydrogenated bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol S epoxy resin, phenol novolak epoxy resin, A Phenolic novolak type epoxy resin, halogenated epoxy resin (for example, low brominated epoxy resin, highly halogenated epoxy resin, brominated phenol novolak type epoxy resin, etc.), aryl group-containing bisphenol A type epoxy Resin, trisphenol methane type epoxy resin, diphenyl diphenylene type epoxy resin, epoxy resin having dicyclopentadiene skeleton ("HP-7200, HP-7200H, Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. )Company system, etc.), glycidylamine type epoxy resin (diaminodiphenyl group) Type epoxy resin, diglycidyl aniline, triglycidyl phenol, etc.), glycidyl ether type epoxy resin (diglycidyl phthalate, diglycidyl adipate, hexahydrofurfurate) Glycidyl ester, dimer acid diglycidyl ester, etc.), hindered amine type epoxy resin, alicyclic epoxy resin (3,4-epoxycycloheptylmethyl-3', 4'-epoxy Cycloheptanecarboxylate, bis(3,4-epoxycycloheptylmethyl)adipate, dicyclopentadiene epoxide, "GT-300, GT-400, ZEHPE3150; Daisy Chemical industry, etc.), bismuth imine type alicyclic epoxy resin, trihydroxyphenylmethane type epoxy resin, bisphenol A novolak type epoxy resin, tetraphenylethane type epoxy resin, tannic acid Glycidyl ester resin, tetraglycidyl xylenol ethane resin, naphthalene-containing epoxy resin (naphthol aralkyl type epoxy resin, naphthol novolac type epoxy resin, 4-functional naphthalene type epoxy resin) Commercially available products include "ESN-190, ESN-360, manufactured by Nippon Steel Chemical Co., Ltd.", "HP-4032, EXA-4750 and EXA-4700, manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. And a polyphenol compound obtained by an addition reaction between a phenol compound and a diolefin compound such as divinylbenzene or dicyclopentadiene, and a reaction product with epichlorohydrin, and a peracetic acid or the like. a ring-opening polymer of vinylcycloheptane-1-oxide to be epoxidized, an epoxy resin having a linear phosphorus-containing structure, an epoxy resin having a cyclic phosphorus-containing structure, and an α -methyl oxime type Liquid crystal epoxy resin, benzophenoxy phenoxy liquid crystal epoxy resin, azophenyl liquid crystal epoxy resin, azomethylene phenyl liquid crystal epoxy resin, binaphthyl liquid crystal epoxy resin吖 Epoxy resin, glycidyl methacrylate copolymer epoxy resin ("CP-50S and CP-50M, manufactured by Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd."); cyclohexylmaleimide and glycidol methacrylate Epoxy resin copolymer, bis(glycidyloxyphenyl)fluorene type epoxy resin, bis(glycidyloxyphenyl)adamantane type epoxy resin, and the like. These epoxy resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

又,除了前述之1分子內具有至少2個環氧乙烷基之前述環氧化合物以外,可以使用至少在1分子中含有2個在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,特佳為含有β 位經烷基取代的環氧基(較具體而言,β -烷基取代縮水甘油基等)之化合物。Further, in addition to the above-mentioned epoxy compound having at least two ethylene oxide groups in one molecule, an epoxy compound containing at least one epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β position may be used in at least one molecule. Particularly preferred is a compound containing an epoxy group substituted at the β -position with an alkyl group (more specifically, a β -alkyl group substituted with a glycidyl group, etc.).

前述之至少含有在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,可以是在1分子中所含有的2個以上之環氧基全部都是β -烷基取代縮水甘油基,也可以是至少1個的環氧基是β -烷基取代縮水甘油基。The above-mentioned epoxy compound containing at least an epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β -position may be a β -alkyl-substituted glycidyl group, and all of the two or more epoxy groups contained in one molecule may be The epoxy group which may be at least one is a β -alkyl substituted glycidyl group.

前述之至少含有在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,從在室溫下之保存安定性的觀點來看,在前述感光性組成物內所含的前述環氧化合物總量之中,全部環氧基中的β -烷基取代縮水甘油基之比例,較宜是30%以上,更宜是40%以上,特佳為50%以上。The above-mentioned epoxy compound containing at least an epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β -position, and the total epoxy compound contained in the photosensitive composition from the viewpoint of storage stability at room temperature The ratio of the β -alkyl substituted glycidyl group in all the epoxy groups is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and particularly preferably 50% or more.

前述之β -烷基取代縮水甘油基並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是β -甲基縮水甘油基、β -乙基縮水甘油基、β -丙基縮水甘油基、β -丁基縮水甘油基等;此等之中,從提昇前述感光性樹脂組成物之保存安定性之觀點、及合成容易性之觀點來看,較是β -甲基縮水甘油基。The aforementioned β -alkyl substituted glycidyl group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and for example, it may be β -methyl glycidyl group, β -ethyl glycidyl group, β- a propyl glycidyl group, a β -butyl glycidyl group, etc., among these, from the viewpoint of improving the storage stability of the photosensitive resin composition and the ease of synthesis, β -methyl group Glycidyl group.

前述之在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,例如,較宜是由多價苯酚化合物和β -烷基表鹵醇所衍生的環氧化合物。The aforementioned epoxy compound containing an epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β -position, for example, is preferably an epoxy compound derived from a polyvalent phenol compound and a β -alkylepihalool.

前述之β -烷基表鹵醇並沒有特別地限定,可以按目的而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是β -甲基表氯醇、β -甲基表溴醇、β -甲基表氟醇等之β -甲基表鹵醇;β -乙基表氯醇、β -乙基表溴醇、β -乙基表氟醇等之β -乙基表鹵醇;β -丙基表氯醇、β -丙基表溴醇、β -丙基表氟醇等之β -丙基表鹵醇;β -丁基表氯醇、β -丁基表溴醇、β -丁基表氟醇等之β -丁基表鹵醇等。此等之中,從與前述多價苯酚間之反應性及流動性的觀點來看,較宜是使用β -甲基表氯醇。The aforementioned β -alkylepihalohydrin is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and for example, it may be β -methylepichlorohydrin, β -methylepibromohydrin, β -a. the fluoro-alcohol group beta] table - methyl-epihalohydrin; beta] - ethyl-epichlorohydrin, β - ethyl epibromohydrin, β - fluoro-ethyl alcohol, etc. table beta] - ethyl-epihalohydrin; beta] - propionic Β -propyl epihalohydrin such as chlorohydrin, β -propyl epibromohydrin or β -propyl epifluorohydrin; β -butyl epichlorohydrin, β -butyl epibromohydrin, β -butyl A β -butyl epihalohydrin or the like such as epifluorohydrin. Among these, from the viewpoint of reactivity with the polyvalent phenol and fluidity, it is preferred to use β -methylepichlorohydrin.

前述之多價苯酚化合物,只要是在1分子中含有2以上的芳香族性羥基的化合物即可,並沒有特別地限定,可以按目的而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是雙酚A、雙酚F、雙酚S等之雙酚化合物;聯酚、四甲基酚等之聯酚化合物;二氫萘、聯萘酚等之萘酚化合物;苯酚-甲醛縮聚物等之酚醛清漆樹脂;甲酚-甲醛縮聚物等之碳數為1~10之單烷基取代苯酚-甲醛縮聚物;二甲酚-甲醛縮聚物等之碳數為1~10之二烷基取代苯酚-甲醛縮聚物;雙酚A-甲醛縮聚物等之酚-甲醛縮聚物;苯酚和碳數為1~10之烷基取代苯酚和甲醛之共縮聚物;以及苯酚化合物和二乙烯基苯之重加成物等。此等之中,例如,當在選擇流動性及保存安定性向上提昇目的之情況下,較宜是前述之雙酚化合物。The polyvalent phenol compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound having 2 or more aromatic hydroxyl groups in one molecule, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. For example, it may be bisphenol. A, a bisphenol compound such as bisphenol F or bisphenol S; a biphenolic compound such as a biphenol or a tetramethylphenol; a naphthol compound such as a dihydronaphthalene or a binaphthol; a novolac such as a phenol-formaldehyde polycondensate; a monoalkyl-substituted phenol-formaldehyde polycondensate having a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a phenol-formaldehyde polycondensate; a dialkyl-substituted phenol-formaldehyde having a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a xylenol-formaldehyde polycondensate a polycondensate; a phenol-formaldehyde polycondensate of bisphenol A-formaldehyde polycondensate; a copolycondensate of phenol and an alkyl substituted phenol and formaldehyde having a carbon number of 1 to 10; and a heavy addition of a phenol compound and divinylbenzene Things and so on. Among these, for example, when the purpose of selecting fluidity and preserving stability is upward, it is preferred to be the aforementioned bisphenol compound.

前述之在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是雙酚A的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚、雙酚F的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚、雙酚S的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之雙酚化合物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;聯酚的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚、四甲基聯酚的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之聯酚化合物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;二氫萘的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚、雙萘酚的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之萘酚化合物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;苯酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;甲酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之碳數為1~10之單烷基取代苯酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;二甲酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之碳數為1~10之二烷基取代苯酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;雙酚A-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等之酚-甲醛縮聚物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚;以及苯酚化合物和二乙烯基苯之聚加成物的二-β -烷基取代縮水甘油醚等。The beta] contained on the position of an epoxy compound having an epoxy group in the alkyl group, for example, which may be, for example, bisphenol-A - β - substituted alkyl ether, bisphenol F di - β - substituted alkyl ether, bisphenol S di - β - alkyl substituted bisphenol glycidyl ether compound bis - β - substituted alkyl ethers; biphenol di - β - alkyl substituted glycidyl ether, tetramethyl biphenol di - β - alkyl substituted glycidyl ether of biphenol compound di - β - substituted alkyl glycidyl ether; dihydronaphthalene di - β - substituted alkyl glycidyl ether, double naphthol di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether compound of naphthol di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether; phenol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether; cresol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether of a carbon number of 1 to 10 monoalkyl-substituted phenol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether; xylenol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - β - substituted alkyl glycidyl ether, etc. The number of 1 to 10 dialkyl-substituted phenol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether; bisphenol A- formaldehyde polycondensate di - beta] - alkyl-substituted glycidyl ether of a phenol - formaldehyde polycondensate di - β - substituted alkyl glycidyl ether; and adducts of dimeric phenol compound and divinylbenzene - β - substituted alkyl glycidyl ether.

此等之中,較宜是以下述構造(iii)所代表雙酚化合物、及其與表鹵醇等所得到的聚合物所衍生的β -烷基縮水甘油醚、以及以下述構造(iv)所代表苯酚化合物-甲醛縮聚物之聚-β -烷基縮水甘油醚。Among these, it is preferred to use a β -alkyl glycidyl ether derived from a bisphenol compound represented by the following structure (iii), a polymer obtained therefrom and an epihalohydrin, and the like (iv) A poly- β -alkyl glycidyl ether represented by a phenol compound-formaldehyde polycondensate.

但,在前述之構造(iii)中,R係代表氫原子及碳數為1~6之烷基中之任一者,n係代表0~20之整數。However, in the above structure (iii), R represents any one of a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 0 to 20.

但,在前述之構造(iv)中,R係代表氫原子及碳數為1~6之烷基中之任一者,R”係代表氫原子及CH3 中的任一者。n係代表0~20之整數。However, in the above structure (iv), R represents any one of a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and R" represents any of a hydrogen atom and CH 3 . An integer from 0 to 20.

此等在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物,係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上。又,也可以在1分子中具有至少2個環氧乙烷基的環氧化合物、以及在β 位上包含具有烷基的環氧基之環氧化合物一起併用。These epoxy compounds containing an epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β -position may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, an epoxy compound having at least two ethylene oxide groups in one molecule and an epoxy compound containing an epoxy group having an alkyl group at the β -position may be used in combination.

前述之氧雜環丁烷化合物,舉例來說,例如其可以是雙〔(3-甲基-3-氧雜環丁烷基甲氧基)甲基〕醚、雙〔(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁烷基甲氧基)甲基〕醚、1,4-雙〔(3-甲基-3-氧雜環丁烷基甲氧基)甲基〕苯、1,4-雙〔(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁烷基甲氧基)甲基〕苯、(3-甲基-3-氧雜環丁烷基)甲基丙烯酸酯、(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁烷基)甲基丙烯酸酯、(3-甲基-3-氧雜環丁烷基)甲基甲基丙烯酸酯、(3-乙基-3-氧雜環丁烷基)甲基甲基丙烯酸酯、或其寡聚物或共聚物等之多官能基氧雜環丁烷類以外的氧雜環丁烷基、酚醛清漆樹脂、聚(p-羥基苯乙烯)、龐大外掛基型雙酚類、杯芳烴類、杯間苯二酚芳烴類、與倍半矽氧烷等之具有羥基的樹脂等之間的醚化合物;除此之外,舉例來說,例如,其可以是具有氧雜環丁烷環之不飽和單體與(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯之共聚物等。The aforementioned oxetane compound, for example, may be bis[(3-methyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy)methyl]ether, bis[(3-ethyl-) 3-oxetanyl methoxy)methyl]ether, 1,4-bis[(3-methyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy)methyl]benzene, 1,4- Bis[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy)methyl]benzene, (3-methyl-3-oxetanyl)methacrylate, (3-ethyl 3-oxetanyl)methacrylate, (3-methyl-3-oxetanyl)methyl methacrylate, (3-ethyl-3-oxetane An oxetanyl group other than a polyfunctional oxetane such as a methyl methacrylate or an oligomer or a copolymer thereof, a novolac resin, or a poly(p-hydroxystyrene), An ether compound in which a bulky external bisphenol, a calixarene, a cup-resorcinol aromatic hydrocarbon, a resin having a hydroxyl group such as sesquiterpene oxide or the like is contained; in addition to, for example, It may be an unsaturated monomer having an oxetane ring and an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Copolymers, etc.

又,為了促進前述環氧化合物與前述氧雜環丁烷化合物之熱硬化,舉例來說,例如可以使用胺化合物(例如,氰胍、苄基二甲胺、4-(二甲胺基)-N,N-二甲基苄胺、4-甲氧基-N,N-二甲基苄胺、4-甲基-N,N-二甲基苄胺等),四級銨鹽化合物(例如,氯化三乙基苄基銨等),嵌段異氰酸酯化合物(例如,二甲胺等),咪唑衍生物二環式脒化合物及其鹽(例如,咪唑、2-甲基咪唑、2-乙基咪唑、2-乙基-4-甲基咪唑、2-苯基咪唑、4-苯基咪唑、1-氰基乙基-2-苯基咪唑、1-(2-氰基乙基)-2-乙基-4-甲基咪唑等),磷化合物(例如,三苯膦等),胍胺化合物(例如,三聚氰胺、胍胺、乙醯胍胺、苯并胍胺等),S-三衍生物(例如,2,4-二胺基-6-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙基-S-三、2-乙烯基-2,4-二胺基-S-三、2-乙烯基-4,6-二胺基-S-三之異三聚氰酸加成物、2,4-二胺基-6-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙基-S-三之異三聚氰酸加成物等)等。此等係可以單獨使用1種,也可以併用2種以上。另外,只要是前述環氧化合物和前述氧雜環丁烷化合物之硬化觸媒,或者是可以促進此等與羧基之反應者即可,並沒有特別地限定,也可以使用上述以外的能夠促進熱硬化之化合物。Further, in order to promote thermal hardening of the aforementioned epoxy compound and the aforementioned oxetane compound, for example, an amine compound (for example, cyanogen, benzyldimethylamine, 4-(dimethylamino)-) may be used. N,N-dimethylbenzylamine, 4-methoxy-N,N-dimethylbenzylamine, 4-methyl-N,N-dimethylbenzylamine, etc.), quaternary ammonium salt compound (for example , triethylbenzylammonium chloride, etc.), blocked isocyanate compounds (for example, dimethylamine, etc.), imidazole derivatives, bicyclic guanidine compounds and salts thereof (for example, imidazole, 2-methylimidazole, 2-B Imidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 4-phenylimidazole, 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole, 1-(2-cyanoethyl)- 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole or the like), a phosphorus compound (for example, triphenylphosphine, etc.), a guanamine compound (for example, melamine, guanamine, acetamide, benzoguanamine, etc.), S-three Derivatives (for example, 2,4-diamino-6-methacryloxyethyl-S-three 2-vinyl-2,4-diamino-S-three 2-vinyl-4,6-diamino-S-three Iso- cyanuric acid adduct, 2,4-diamino-6-methylpropenyloxyethyl-S-three A different isocyanate adduct, etc.). These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In addition, as long as it is a curing catalyst of the epoxy compound and the oxetane compound, or a reaction with the carboxyl group can be promoted, it is not particularly limited, and heat other than the above can be used. Hardened compound.

前述之能夠促進前述之環氧化合物、前述之氧雜環丁烷化合物、以及此等與羧酸間之熱硬化的化合物,其在前述感光性組成物固體成分中所佔的固體成分含量,通常是0.01~15質量%。The above-mentioned epoxy compound, the above-described oxetane compound, and a compound which is thermally hardened with the carboxylic acid, and the solid content of the photosensitive component solid component is usually It is 0.01 to 15% by mass.

又,前述之熱交聯劑係可以使用特開平5-9407號公報上所記載之聚異氰酸酯化合物;該聚異氰酸酯化合物係可以從含有至少2個異氰酸酯基之脂肪族化合物、環式脂肪族化合物、或芳香族基取代之脂肪族化合物衍生而得。具體而言,舉例來說,例如其可以是2官能異氰酸酯(例如,1,3-伸苯基二異氰酸酯與1,4-伸苯基二異氰酸酯之混合物、2,4-與2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯、1,3-與1,4-二甲苯二異氰酸酯、雙(4-異氰酸基苯基)甲烷、雙(4-異氰酸基乙醯基環己基)甲烷、異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯、伸己基二異氰酸酯、三甲基伸己基二異氰酸酯等),該2官能異氰酸酯、與三羥甲基丙烷、季戊四醇、甘油等之多官能醇,該多官能醇之環氧烷之加成物、與前述2官能異氰酸酯之加成物;伸己基二異氰酸酯、伸己基-1,6-二異氰酸酯及其衍生物等之環形三聚物等。Further, the above-mentioned thermal crosslinking agent may be a polyisocyanate compound described in JP-A-5-9407, and the polyisocyanate compound may be an aliphatic compound or a cyclic aliphatic compound containing at least two isocyanate groups. Or derived from an aromatic-substituted aliphatic compound. Specifically, for example, it may be a bifunctional isocyanate (for example, a mixture of 1,3-phenylene diisocyanate and 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate, 2,4- and 2,6-toluene) Diisocyanate, 1,3- and 1,4-dimethylbenzene diisocyanate, bis(4-isocyanatophenyl)methane, bis(4-isocyanatoethylcyclohexyl)methane, isophorone Diisocyanate, hexyl diisocyanate, trimethylhexyl diisocyanate, etc.), the bifunctional isocyanate, polyfunctional alcohol with trimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, glycerin, etc., addition of alkylene oxide of the polyfunctional alcohol And an adduct of the above-mentioned bifunctional isocyanate; a cyclic trimer of exohexyl diisocyanate, exohexyl-1,6-diisocyanate and derivatives thereof, and the like.

更且,為達成提昇本發明之感光性組成物之保存性之目的,也可以使用令前述之聚異氰酸酯及其衍生物之異氰酸酯基與嵌段劑反應而得到的化合物。Further, for the purpose of improving the preservability of the photosensitive composition of the present invention, a compound obtained by reacting the isocyanate group of the above polyisocyanate and its derivative with a block agent may be used.

前述之異氰酸基嵌段劑,舉例來說,例如其可以是醇類(例如,異丙醇、tert-丁醇等)、內醯胺類(例如,ε-己內醯胺等)、酚類(例如,酚、甲酚、p-tert-丁基酚、p-sec-丁基酚、p-sec-胺基酚、p-辛基酚、p-壬基酚等)、雜環羥基化合物(例如,3-羥基吡啶、8-羥基喹啉等)、活性亞甲基化合物(例如,丙二酸二烷酯、甲基乙基酮肟、乙醯丙酮、烷基乙醯乙酸酯肟、丙酮肟、環己酮肟等)。除此之外,尚且可以使用特開平6-295060號公報上所記載的在分子內具有至少1個可聚合之雙鍵、及至少1個嵌段異氰酸酯基中之任一者的化合物等。The above-mentioned isocyanato blocker may, for example, be an alcohol (for example, isopropanol, tert-butanol, etc.), an intrinsic amine (for example, ε-caprolactam, etc.), Phenols (for example, phenol, cresol, p-tert-butyl phenol, p-sec-butyl phenol, p-sec-aminophenol, p-octyl phenol, p-nonyl phenol, etc.), heterocyclic ring a hydroxy compound (for example, 3-hydroxypyridine, 8-hydroxyquinoline, etc.), an active methylene compound (for example, dialkyl malonate, methyl ethyl ketone oxime, acetamidine acetone, alkyl acetoacetic acid) Ester oxime, acetone oxime, cyclohexanone oxime, etc.). In addition, a compound having at least one polymerizable double bond and at least one block isocyanate group in the molecule described in JP-A-6-295060 can be used.

又且,可以使用三聚氰胺衍生物來做為前述之熱交聯劑。該三聚氰胺衍生物,舉例來說,例如其可以是羥甲基三聚氰胺、烷化羥甲基三聚氰胺(以甲基、乙基、丁基等將羥甲基予以醚化之化合物)等。此等,係可以單獨使用1種,也可以併用2種以上。在此等之中,從保存安定性良好可、有效提昇感光層之表面硬度或硬化膜本身之膜強度的觀點來看,較宜是烷基化羥甲基三聚氰胺,特佳為六甲基化羥甲基三聚氰胺。Further, a melamine derivative can be used as the aforementioned thermal crosslinking agent. The melamine derivative may, for example, be methylol melamine or alkylated methylol melamine (a compound which etherifies a methylol group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group or a butyl group). These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of maintaining good stability and effectively improving the surface hardness of the photosensitive layer or the film strength of the cured film itself, it is preferred to use alkylated methylol melamine, particularly preferably hexamethylated. Hydroxymethyl melamine.

在前述感光性組成物固體成分之中,前述熱交聯劑之固體成分含量較宜是1~50質量%,更宜是3~30質量%。當該固體成分含量小於1質量%時,硬化薄膜之薄膜強度無法確認有增加,而當超過50質量%時,則會有顯影性降低及曝光感度下降的情況。In the solid content of the photosensitive composition, the solid content of the thermal crosslinking agent is preferably from 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably from 3 to 30% by mass. When the solid content is less than 1% by mass, the film strength of the cured film cannot be confirmed to increase, and when it exceeds 50% by mass, the developability is lowered and the exposure sensitivity is lowered.

<其他的成分><Other ingredients>

前述之其他的成分,舉例來說,例如,其可以是熱聚合禁止劑、可塑劑、著色劑(著色顏料或染料)、填充顏料等;更且,也可以和基材表面之密接促進劑及其他的助劑類(例如,導電性粒子、充填劑、消泡劑、難燃劑、整平劑、剝離促進劑、抗氧化劑、香料、表面張力調整劑、鏈移動劑等)一起併用。藉由適當地含有此等成分,即可以達到調整感光性薄膜之安定性、寫真性、膜物性等性質之目的。The other components mentioned above may be, for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor, a plasticizer, a colorant (coloring pigment or dye), a filler pigment, etc., and may also be a adhesion promoter to the surface of the substrate. Other additives (for example, conductive particles, a filler, an antifoaming agent, a flame retardant, a leveling agent, a peeling accelerator, an antioxidant, a fragrance, a surface tension adjuster, a chain shifting agent, etc.) are used together. By appropriately containing these components, the properties of the photosensitive film such as stability, filminess, and film properties can be adjusted.

<<熱聚合禁止劑>><<Thermal polymerization inhibitor>>

前述之熱聚合禁止劑,可以是為了防止前述聚合性化合物的熱聚合或經時聚合之目的而添加。The above-mentioned thermal polymerization inhibiting agent may be added for the purpose of preventing thermal polymerization or polymerization over time of the above polymerizable compound.

前述之熱聚合禁止劑,舉例來說,例如其可以是4-甲氧基酚、氫醌、經烷基或芳基取代之氫醌、t-丁基兒茶酚、苯三酚、2-羥基二苯甲酮、4-甲氧基-2-羥基二苯甲酮、氯化亞銅、苯并噻、氯醌、萘胺、β-萘酚、2,6-二-t-丁基-4-甲酚、2,2’-亞甲基雙(4-甲基-6-t-丁基酚)、吡啶、硝基苯、二硝基苯、苦味酸、4-甲苯胺、亞甲基藍、銅與有機螫合劑之反應產物、柳酸甲酯和苯并噻、亞硝基化合物、及亞硝基化合物與Al之螯合物等。The aforementioned thermal polymerization inhibiting agent may, for example, be 4-methoxyphenol, hydroquinone, alkyl or aryl substituted hydroquinone, t-butylcatechol, benzenetriol, 2- Hydroxybenzophenone, 4-methoxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, cuprous chloride, benzothiazide , chloranil, naphthylamine, β-naphthol, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol ), pyridine, nitrobenzene, dinitrobenzene, picric acid, 4-toluidine, methylene blue, reaction product of copper with an organic chelating agent, methyl salicylate and benzothiazide a nitroso compound, a chelate compound of a nitroso compound and Al, and the like.

前述之熱聚合禁止劑的含量,相對於聚合性化合物計,較宜是0.001~5質量%,更佳為0.005~2質量%,特佳為0.01~1質量%。當該含量小於0.001質量%時,就會有保存安定性下降之情況,而當超過5質量%時,則對於活性能量線之感度就有降低的情況。The content of the above-mentioned thermal polymerization inhibiting agent is preferably 0.001 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 2% by mass, particularly preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass, based on the polymerizable compound. When the content is less than 0.001% by mass, the storage stability may be lowered, and when it exceeds 5% by mass, the sensitivity to the active energy ray may be lowered.

<<著色顏料>><<Coloring pigment>>

著色顏料並沒有特別地限定,可以依照目的而適當地選擇;具體例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是維多利亞純藍BO(C.I.42595)、金胺(C.I.41000)、脂黑HB(C.I.26150)、單顏料黃GT(C.I.顏料黃12)、永固黃GR(C.I.顏料黃17)、永固黃HR(C.I.顏料黃83)、永固洋紅FBB(C.I.顏料紅146)、霍斯特斑紅ESB(C.I.顏料紫19)、永固寶石紅FBH(C.I.顏料紅11)、固著性超粉紅B(C.I.顏料紅81)、單星堅牢性藍(C.I.顏料藍15)、單顏料堅牢性黑B(C.I.顏料黑1)、碳黑、C.I.顏料紅97、C.I.顏料紅122、C.I.顏料紅149、C.I.顏料紅168、C.I.顏料紅177、C.I.顏料紅180、C.I.顏料紅192、C.I.顏料紅215、C.I.顏料綠7、C.I.顏料綠36、C.I.顏料藍15:1、C.I.顏料藍15:4、C.I.顏料藍15:6、C.I.顏料藍22、C.I.顏料藍60、與C.I.顏料藍顏料藍64。此等係可以單獨使用1種,也可以併用2種以上。又,視情況需要,可以使用從公知的染料之中適當選取的染料。又,視情況需要,可以使用從公知的染料中所適當選取的染料。The coloring pigment is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose; for example, it may be, for example, Victoria Pure Blue BO (CI42595), Goldamine (CI41000), Lip Black HB (CI26150). , single pigment yellow GT (CI pigment yellow 12), permanent yellow GR (CI pigment yellow 17), permanent yellow HR (CI pigment yellow 83), permanent magenta FBB (CI pigment red 146), Horst red ESB (CI Pigment Violet 19), Everlasting Ruby Red FBH (CI Pigment Red 11), Fixative Ultra Pink B (CI Pigment Red 81), Single Star Fast Blue (CI Pigment Blue 15), Single Pigment Fast Black B (CI Pigment Black 1), Carbon Black, CI Pigment Red 97, CI Pigment Red 122, CI Pigment Red 149, CI Pigment Red 168, CI Pigment Red 177, CI Pigment Red 180, CI Pigment Red 192, CI Pigment Red 215 CI Pigment Green 7, CI Pigment Green 36, CI Pigment Blue 15:1, CI Pigment Blue 15:4, CI Pigment Blue 15:6, CI Pigment Blue 22, CI Pigment Blue 60, and CI Pigment Blue Pigment Blue 64. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, a dye appropriately selected from known dyes may be used as the case requires. Further, a dye appropriately selected from known dyes may be used as the case requires.

在前述感光性組成物固體成分中之前述著色顏料的固體成分含量,係可以考慮永久圖案形成時的感光層之曝光感度及解像性而加以決定的,雖然會隨著色顏料的種類而不同,然而一般較宜是0.05~10質量%,更佳為0.1~5質量%。The solid content of the coloring pigment in the solid content of the photosensitive composition can be determined in consideration of the exposure sensitivity and the resolution of the photosensitive layer at the time of formation of the permanent pattern, and may vary depending on the type of the color pigment. However, it is generally preferably from 0.05 to 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.1 to 5% by mass.

<<填充顏料>><<filling pigment>>

在前述之感光性組成物中,可以視需要而添加以提昇永久圖案之表面硬度、或抑制線膨脹係數之下降、或者抑制硬化膜本身之介電率及介電正切之減低做為目的之無機顏料及有機微粒子。In the above-mentioned photosensitive composition, it may be added as needed to enhance the surface hardness of the permanent pattern, or to suppress a decrease in the coefficient of linear expansion, or to suppress the dielectric constant of the cured film itself and the reduction of the dielectric tangent. Pigments and organic microparticles.

前述之無機顏料並沒有特別地限定,可以從公知物中適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是高嶺土、硫酸鋇、鈦酸鋇、氧化矽粉、微粉狀氧化矽、氣相法矽石、非定形矽石、結晶性矽石、熔融矽石、球狀矽石、滑石、黏土、碳酸鎂、碳酸鈣、氧化鋁、氫氧化鋁、雲母等。前述之無機顏料的平均粒徑較宜是小於10微米,更宜是在3微米以下。當該平均粒徑為10微米以上時,則會有因光散亂而使得解像度變差的情況。The above-mentioned inorganic pigment is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known ones, for example, it may be kaolin, barium sulfate, barium titanate, cerium oxide powder, fine powder cerium oxide, gas phase method. Stone, amorphous vermiculite, crystalline vermiculite, molten vermiculite, globular vermiculite, talc, clay, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate, alumina, aluminum hydroxide, mica, and the like. The above inorganic pigment preferably has an average particle diameter of less than 10 μm, more preferably 3 μm or less. When the average particle diameter is 10 μm or more, the resolution may be deteriorated due to light scattering.

前述之有機微粒子並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是三聚氰胺樹脂、苯并胍胺樹脂、交聯聚苯乙烯樹脂等。又,可以使用由平均粒徑為1~5微米、吸油量為100~200平方公尺/克左右的矽石、交聯樹脂所形成的球狀多孔質微粒子等。The organic fine particles described above are not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and may be, for example, a melamine resin, a benzoguanamine resin, a crosslinked polystyrene resin or the like. Further, spherical porous fine particles formed of vermiculite having an average particle diameter of 1 to 5 μm and an oil absorption of about 100 to 200 m 2 /g or a crosslinked resin can be used.

前述填充顏料之添加量較宜是5~60質量%。當該添加量小於5質量%時,則就會有不能充分降低線膨脹係數之情況;而當超過60質量%時,則在感光層表面上形成硬化膜的情況下,該硬化膜之膜就會變脆;而在使用永久圖案形成配線的情況下,則會有損害做為配線的保護膜之功能。The amount of the above-mentioned filler pigment added is preferably from 5 to 60% by mass. When the amount of addition is less than 5% by mass, there is a case where the coefficient of linear expansion cannot be sufficiently lowered; and when it exceeds 60% by mass, in the case where a cured film is formed on the surface of the photosensitive layer, the film of the cured film is It becomes brittle; in the case where wiring is formed using a permanent pattern, there is a function of impairing the protective film as a wiring.

<<密接促進劑>><<Intimate accelerator>>

為了提昇各層間之密接性、或感光層和基材間之密接性,在各層上可以使用公知的所謂之密接促進劑。In order to improve the adhesion between the layers or the adhesion between the photosensitive layer and the substrate, a known so-called adhesion promoter can be used for each layer.

前述之密接促進劑,舉例來說,例如合適者為在特開平5-11439號公報、特開平5-341532號公報、特開平6-43638號公報等之上所記載的密接促進劑。具體的例子,舉例來說,例如其可以是苯并咪唑、苯并唑、苯并噻唑、2-巰基苯并咪唑、2-巰基苯并唑、2-巰基苯并噻唑、3-嗎啉基甲基-1-苯基-三唑-2-酮、3-嗎啉基甲基-5-苯基-二唑-2-酮、5-胺基-3-嗎啉基甲基-噻二唑-2-酮、2-巰基-5-甲硫基-噻二唑、三唑、四唑、苯并三唑、羧基苯并三唑、含胺基苯并三唑、及矽烷偶合劑。For example, the adhesion promoter described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 5- No. Hei No. Hei. Specific examples, for example, may be benzimidazole, benzo Oxazole, benzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 2-mercaptobenzoene Azole, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 3-morpholinylmethyl-1-phenyl-triazol-2-one, 3-morpholinylmethyl-5-phenyl- Dioxazol-2-one, 5-amino-3-morpholinylmethyl-thiadiazol-2-one, 2-mercapto-5-methylthio-thiadiazole, triazole, tetrazole, benzo Triazole, carboxybenzotriazole, amine-containing benzotriazole, and decane coupling agent.

前述之密接促進劑的含量,相對於前述感光層中的全部成分計,較宜是0.001~20質量%,更佳為0.01~10質量%,特佳為0.1~5質量%。The content of the adhesion promoter is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total amount of the components in the photosensitive layer.

前述之感光層之形成方法,舉例來說,例如,其可以是第1態樣的將前述感光性組成物塗布於前述基體之表面上並進行乾燥之方法,又舉例來說,例如,其可以是第2態樣的在加熱及加壓中的至少任一種之下,將感光層積層於基體之表面上的方法。For example, the method of forming the photosensitive layer may be a method of applying the photosensitive composition onto the surface of the substrate and drying it, for example, for example, It is a method of laminating a photosensitive layer on the surface of a substrate under at least any one of heating and pressurization in the second aspect.

前述之第1態樣的感光層之形成方法係將前述感光性組成物塗布在前述之基體上並予以乾燥而形成感光層。In the method of forming the photosensitive layer according to the first aspect described above, the photosensitive composition is applied onto the substrate and dried to form a photosensitive layer.

前述之塗布及乾燥的方法並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇;舉例來說,例如,可以將前述感光性組成物予以溶解、乳化或分散在水或溶劑中而調製成感光性組成物溶液,並將該水溶液直接塗布於前述之基體之表面上,且進行乾燥、積層而成之方法。The method of coating and drying described above is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose; for example, the photosensitive composition may be dissolved, emulsified or dispersed in water or a solvent to prepare a photosensitive film. The composition solution is applied directly to the surface of the above-mentioned substrate, and dried and laminated.

做為前述之感光性組成物溶液之溶劑,並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選取,舉例來說,例如,其可以是甲醇、乙醇、n-丙醇、異丙醇、n-丁醇、sec-丁醇、n-己醇等之醇類;丙酮、甲基乙基酮、甲基異丁基酮、環己酮、二異丁酮等之酮類;醋酸乙酯、醋酸丁酯、醋酸-n-戊酯、硫酸甲酯、丙酸乙酯、酞酸二甲酯、安息香酸乙酯及甲氧基丙基乙酸酯等之酯類;甲苯、二甲苯、苯、乙苯等之芳香族烴類;四氯化碳、三氯乙烯、氯仿、1,1,1-三氯乙烷、二氯甲烷、單氯苯等之鹵素化烴類;四氫呋喃、二乙基醚、乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、1-甲氧基-2-丙醇等之醚類;二甲基甲醯胺、二甲基乙醯胺、二甲亞碸、環丁碸等。此等係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上。又,也可以添加公知的界面活性劑。The solvent of the photosensitive composition solution described above is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and for example, it may be methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, n. An alcohol such as butanol, sec-butanol or n-hexanol; a ketone such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone or diisobutyl ketone; ethyl acetate; Esters of butyl acetate, n-amyl acetate, methyl sulfate, ethyl propionate, dimethyl decanoate, ethyl benzoate and methoxypropyl acetate; toluene, xylene, benzene , aromatic hydrocarbons such as ethylbenzene; halogenated hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride, trichloroethylene, chloroform, 1,1,1-trichloroethane, dichloromethane, monochlorobenzene, etc.; tetrahydrofuran, diethyl Ethers such as ether, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol; dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, dimethyl hydrazine,环丁碸 and so on. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, a known surfactant may be added.

前述之塗布方法並沒有特別的限制,可依照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如,其可以是使用旋塗機、狹縫式旋塗機、輥塗機、模具塗布機、簾幕式塗布機等,於前述基體上進行直接塗布之方法。The coating method described above is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and for example, it may be a spin coater, a slit coater, a roll coater, a die coater, or a curtain. A coating machine or the like is a method of directly coating the substrate.

前述之乾燥條件,雖然隨著各成分、溶劑之種類、使用比例等而不同,然而通常是在60~110℃之溫度下進行30秒~15分鐘左右。Although the drying conditions described above vary depending on the components, the type of the solvent, the ratio of use, and the like, they are usually carried out at a temperature of 60 to 110 ° C for about 30 seconds to 15 minutes.

前述之感光層之厚度並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇,例如,較宜是3~100微米,更宜是5~70微米。The thickness of the photosensitive layer described above is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and is, for example, preferably from 3 to 100 μm, more preferably from 5 to 70 μm.

前述第2態樣的感光層之形成方法,係對於具有支撐體和由在該支撐體上積層的感光性組成物而形成的感光層之感光性薄膜,一邊進行加熱及加壓中的至少任一種,一邊將感光性薄膜積層於前述基體之表面上。另外,在前述之感光性薄膜具有後述之保護薄膜的情況下,較宜是將該保護薄膜予以剝離,並使前述感光層與前述基體重合的方式進行積層。In the method of forming the photosensitive layer of the second aspect, at least one of heat and pressure is applied to the photosensitive film having the support and the photosensitive layer formed of the photosensitive composition laminated on the support. One is to laminate a photosensitive film on the surface of the substrate. In the case where the photosensitive film described above has a protective film to be described later, it is preferred to laminate the protective film so that the photosensitive layer and the base are combined.

(感光性薄膜)(photosensitive film)

前述感光性薄膜係至少具有支撐體和感光層而成,較宜是具有保護薄膜而成,更且可視需要而具有緩衝層、氧氣遮斷層(PC層)等之其他層而成。The photosensitive film is preferably provided with at least a support and a photosensitive layer, and preferably has a protective film, and further has a buffer layer, an oxygen barrier layer (PC layer) or the like as needed.

前述感光性薄膜之形態並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是在前述支撐體上依序具有前述感光層、前述保護膜薄膜而形成的形態;於前述支撐體上依序具有前述PC層、前述感光層、前述保護薄膜而形成的形態;於前述支撐體上依序具有前述緩衝層、前述PC層、前述感光層、前述保護薄膜而形成的形態。另外,前述感光層可以是單層,也可以是複數層。The form of the photosensitive film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. For example, it may be a form in which the photosensitive layer and the protective film are sequentially formed on the support; a form in which the PC layer, the photosensitive layer, and the protective film are sequentially formed on the support; and the buffer layer, the PC layer, the photosensitive layer, and the protective film are sequentially formed on the support. form. Further, the photosensitive layer may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.

<支撐體><support>

前述之支撐體並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇,然而較宜是可以剝離前述之感光層、且光透射性良好之物;更宜是表面平滑性良好之物。The above-mentioned support is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. However, it is preferable that the photosensitive layer can be peeled off and the light transmittance is good, and it is more preferable that the surface is excellent in smoothness.

前述之支撐體較宜是合成樹脂製且為透明之物,舉例來說,例如,其可以是聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚萘酸乙二酯、聚丙烯、聚乙烯、三乙酸纖維素、二乙酸纖維素、聚(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯、聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、聚氯乙烯、聚乙烯醇、聚碳酸酯、聚苯乙烯、賽珞玢、聚偏二氯乙烯共聚物、聚醯胺、聚醯亞胺、氯乙烯.乙酸乙烯酯共聚物、聚四氟乙烯、聚三氟乙烯、纖維素系薄膜、耐綸薄膜等之各種塑膠薄膜。此等之中,特佳為聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯。此等係可以1種單獨使用,也可以併用2種以上。The aforementioned support is preferably made of a synthetic resin and is transparent. For example, it may be polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polypropylene, polyethylene, triacetate. , cellulose diacetate, alkyl poly(meth)acrylate, poly(meth)acrylate copolymer, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl alcohol, polycarbonate, polystyrene, cellophane, polyvinylidene chloride Ethylene copolymer, polyamine, polyimine, vinyl chloride. Various plastic films such as vinyl acetate copolymer, polytetrafluoroethylene, polytrifluoroethylene, cellulose film, and nylon film. Among these, polyethylene terephthalate is particularly preferred. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

另外,做為前述之支撐體者,例如,可以使用於特開平4-208940號公報、特開平5-80503號公報、特開平5-173320號公報、特開平5-72724號公報等上所記載的支撐體。In addition, as described above, the above-mentioned support can be used as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. Hei No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei 5- No. Hei. Support body.

前述之支撐體的厚度,並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇;例如,較宜是4~300微米,更宜是5~175微米。The thickness of the aforementioned support is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose; for example, it is preferably 4 to 300 μm, more preferably 5 to 175 μm.

前述支撐體的形狀並沒有特別地限定,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇;例如,較宜是長條狀。前述長條狀之支撐體的長度,並沒有特別地限定,舉例來說,例如其可以是10公尺~20000公尺。The shape of the aforementioned support body is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose; for example, it is preferably elongated. The length of the aforementioned elongated support is not particularly limited, and for example, it may be from 10 meters to 20,000 meters.

-感光性薄膜之感光層-- Photosensitive layer of photosensitive film -

前述感光性薄膜之感光層係藉由利用前述之感光性組成物而形成的。The photosensitive layer of the photosensitive film is formed by using the photosensitive composition described above.

前述感光性薄膜中用以設置前述感光層的位置並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的而適當地選擇,通常是在被積層在前述支撐體上。The position at which the photosensitive layer is provided in the photosensitive film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and is usually laminated on the support.

前述感光性薄膜中感光層的厚度並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,例如,宜為3~100微米,較宜是5~70微米。The thickness of the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive film is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and is, for example, preferably from 3 to 100 μm, more preferably from 5 to 70 μm.

前述感光性薄膜之感光層的形成,係可以利用和向前述基材塗布前述感光性組成物溶液及乾燥(前述第1態樣之感光層的形成方法)相同的方法來進行,舉例來說,例如可以使用旋塗機、狹縫式旋塗機、輥塗機、模具塗布機、廉幕式塗布機塗布該感光性組成物溶液之方法。The formation of the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive film can be carried out by the same method as the method of applying the photosensitive composition solution to the substrate and drying (method of forming the photosensitive layer of the first aspect), for example, For example, a method of applying the photosensitive composition solution by a spin coater, a slit coater, a roll coater, a die coater, or a curtain coater can be used.

<保護薄膜><Protective film>

前述之保護薄膜係能夠防止前述感光層之污漬及損傷,並具有保護的功能。The protective film described above is capable of preventing stains and damage of the photosensitive layer and has a protective function.

前述感光性薄膜中用以設置前述保護薄膜的位置並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的而適當地選擇,通常是設置在前述感光層上。The position at which the protective film is provided in the photosensitive film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, and is usually provided on the photosensitive layer.

前述之保護薄膜,舉例來說,例如其可以是使用於前述支撐體上之物、聚矽氧紙、以聚丙烯或聚乙烯積層而成之紙、聚烯烴或聚四氟乙烯片等。此等之中,較佳為聚乙烯薄膜、聚丙烯薄膜。The protective film may be, for example, a material used on the support, a polyoxynized paper, a paper laminated with polypropylene or polyethylene, a polyolefin or a polytetrafluoroethylene sheet, or the like. Among these, a polyethylene film or a polypropylene film is preferred.

前述保護薄膜之厚度並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的而適當地選擇;例如,較宜是5~100微米,更宜是8~30微米。The thickness of the protective film is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose; for example, it is preferably 5 to 100 μm, more preferably 8 to 30 μm.

在使用前述之保護薄膜的情況下,前述感光層與前述支撐體間之黏著力A、和前述感光層與保護薄膜間之黏著力B,較宜是具有:黏著力A>黏著力B之關係。In the case of using the protective film described above, the adhesive force A between the photosensitive layer and the support and the adhesive force B between the photosensitive layer and the protective film preferably have the relationship of adhesive force A and adhesive force B. .

前述支撐體與保護膜之組合(支撐體/保護膜),舉例來說,例如其可以是(聚對酞酸乙二酯/聚丙烯)、(聚對酞酸伸乙二酯/聚乙烯)、(聚氯乙烯/賽珞玢)、(聚醯亞胺/聚丙烯)、及(聚對酞酸乙二酯/聚對酞酸乙二酯)。又,藉由對支撐體及保護膜中之至少任一者進行表面處理,可以使得黏著力滿足上述之關係。前述支撐體之表面處理,可以是為了增強對感光層之黏著強度而實施,舉例來說,例如可以塗設下塗層、電暈放電處理、火燄處理、紫外線照射處理、高頻波照射處理、輝光放電處理、活性電漿照射處理、以及雷射光線處理等。The combination of the foregoing support and the protective film (support/protective film), for example, may be (polyethylene terephthalate/polypropylene) or (polyethylene terephthalate/polyethylene) , (polyvinyl chloride / cellophane), (polyimide / polypropylene), and (polyethylene terephthalate / polyethylene terephthalate). Further, by performing surface treatment on at least one of the support and the protective film, the adhesive force can satisfy the above relationship. The surface treatment of the support may be performed to enhance the adhesion strength to the photosensitive layer. For example, an undercoat layer, a corona discharge treatment, a flame treatment, an ultraviolet irradiation treatment, a high-frequency wave irradiation treatment, a glow discharge may be applied. Treatment, active plasma irradiation treatment, and laser treatment.

又,前述支撐體與前述保護薄膜間之靜摩擦係數較佳為0.3~1.4,更佳為0.5~1.2。Further, the static friction coefficient between the support and the protective film is preferably from 0.3 to 1.4, more preferably from 0.5 to 1.2.

當前述之靜摩擦係數小於0.3時,由於滑動性過高的緣故,在形成捲筒的情況下就可能產生捲繞間隙;而當超過1.4時,就會難以捲成良好的捲筒狀。When the aforementioned static friction coefficient is less than 0.3, the winding gap may be generated in the case of forming a reel due to excessive slidability; and when it exceeds 1.4, it is difficult to roll into a good reel shape.

前述之感光性薄膜,例如,捲曲成圓筒狀的捲芯,較宜是長條狀的捲筒狀來保管。前述之長條狀的感光性薄膜之長度,並沒有特別地限定,例如,可以從10公尺~20,000公尺範圍中適當地選取。又,為了讓使用者容易使用,也可以進行細縫加工而形成捲筒狀之100公尺~1,000公尺範圍的長條體。另外,在此情況下,較宜是將前述之支撐體捲在最外側。又,也可以將前述之捲筒狀感光性薄膜細分成薄片狀。保管時,從端面保護、防止侵蝕的觀點來看,較宜是在端面上設置隔離物(特別是防溼性物、裝有乾燥劑之物),又且也較宜使用梱包用及透溼性低的素材。The photosensitive film described above is, for example, a core wound in a cylindrical shape, and is preferably stored in a long roll shape. The length of the long strip-shaped photosensitive film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected, for example, from 10 meters to 20,000 meters. Further, in order to make it easy for the user to use, it is also possible to form a long strip having a roll shape ranging from 100 meters to 1,000 meters in a slit shape. Further, in this case, it is preferable to wind the aforementioned support body to the outermost side. Further, the above-mentioned roll-shaped photosensitive film may be subdivided into a sheet shape. When storing, from the viewpoint of end face protection and corrosion prevention, it is preferable to provide a separator (especially a moisture-proof substance and a desiccant) on the end surface, and it is also preferable to use a bag and a moisture-permeable bag. Low material.

為了調整保護薄膜與感光層間之黏著性質,前述之保護薄膜也可以接受表面處理。前述之表面處理,例如,可以在前述保護薄膜表面上形成一由聚有機矽氧烷、氟化聚烯烴、聚氟乙烯、與聚乙烯醇等之聚合物構成的底塗層。該底塗層之形成可以是在將前述聚合物之塗布液塗布於保護薄膜表面之後,再藉由於30℃至150℃(特別是50℃至120℃)下進行乾燥1至30分鐘而形成。In order to adjust the adhesion between the protective film and the photosensitive layer, the aforementioned protective film can also be subjected to surface treatment. In the above surface treatment, for example, an undercoat layer composed of a polymer of polyorganosiloxane, fluorinated polyolefin, polyvinyl fluoride, or polyvinyl alcohol may be formed on the surface of the protective film. The undercoat layer may be formed by applying the coating liquid of the above polymer to the surface of the protective film, followed by drying at 30 ° C to 150 ° C (especially 50 ° C to 120 ° C) for 1 to 30 minutes.

又,除了前述之感光層、前述之支撐體、前述之保護薄膜以外,也可以具有緩衝層、氧遮斷層(PC層)、剝離層、黏著層、光吸收層、表面保護層等之層。Further, in addition to the photosensitive layer, the support described above, and the protective film described above, a layer such as a buffer layer, an oxygen barrier layer (PC layer), a release layer, an adhesive layer, a light absorbing layer, and a surface protective layer may be provided.

前述之緩衝層係為在常溫下無黏性,而當以真空加熱條件積層的情況下會熔融、流動之層。The aforementioned buffer layer is a layer which is non-tacky at normal temperature and which melts and flows when laminated under vacuum heating conditions.

前述之PC層通常是聚乙烯醇為主成分所形成的0.5~5微米左右的被覆膜。The PC layer is usually a coating film of about 0.5 to 5 μm which is formed mainly of polyvinyl alcohol.

(感光性組成物之製造方法)(Manufacturing method of photosensitive composition)

前述之感光性組成物,例如,係可以按照以下之作法來製造。The photosensitive composition described above can be produced, for example, in the following manner.

首先,使包含於前述感光性組成物的材料溶解、乳化或分散於水或溶劑中,進而調製成感光性組成物用的感光性組成物溶液。又,也可以添加公知的界面活性劑。First, a material contained in the photosensitive composition is dissolved, emulsified, or dispersed in water or a solvent to prepare a photosensitive composition solution for a photosensitive composition. Further, a known surfactant may be added.

其次,藉由將前述之感光性組成物溶液塗布在前述之基體上、或前述之支撐體上,並使之乾燥而形成感光層,即可以製造感光性組成物。Next, a photosensitive composition can be produced by applying the above-mentioned photosensitive composition solution onto the above-mentioned substrate or the above-mentioned support, and drying it to form a photosensitive layer.

前述之感光性組成物溶液之塗布方法並沒有特別的限制,可依照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是噴霧法、輥塗法、回轉塗布法、狹縫塗布法、擠壓塗布法、簾幕塗布法、模具塗布法、凹槽輥塗布法、線棒塗布法、刮刀塗布法等各種的塗布法。The coating method of the photosensitive composition solution described above is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and may be, for example, a spray method, a roll coating method, a rotary coating method, a slit coating method, or extrusion. Various coating methods such as a press coating method, a curtain coating method, a die coating method, a gravure coating method, a bar coating method, and a knife coating method.

前述乾燥之條件雖然是隨著各成分、溶劑之種類、使用比例等而不同,然而通常為在60~110℃之溫度下進行30秒~15分鐘左右。Although the conditions of the drying differ depending on the type of each component, the type of the solvent, the ratio of use, and the like, it is usually carried out at a temperature of 60 to 110 ° C for about 30 seconds to 15 minutes.

<積層體之形成><Formation of laminated body>

在使用本發明之感光性組成物進行圖案形成之際,係將該感光性組成物之感光層積層於基體上而形成積層體。When the photosensitive composition of the present invention is used for pattern formation, the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive composition is laminated on a substrate to form a laminate.

前述之基體並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的而適當地選擇,例如,可以從表面平滑性高至具有凹凸表面之物中任意地選擇,然而較宜是板狀基體(印刷基板);具體而言,舉例來說,例如其可以是公知的印刷配線製造用基板(例如,覆銅積層板)、玻璃板(例如,鹼玻璃板等)、合成樹脂樹脂性之薄膜、紙、金屬板等。The above-mentioned substrate is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. For example, it may be arbitrarily selected from a surface smoothness to a surface having a concave-convex surface, but is preferably a plate-like substrate (printed substrate); For example, it may be a known printed wiring manufacturing substrate (for example, a copper-clad laminate), a glass plate (for example, an alkali glass plate, etc.), a synthetic resin-resin film, paper, a metal plate, or the like. .

前述積層體之層構成並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的而適當地選擇,例如,較宜是依序具有前述之基體、前述之感光層和前述之支撐體的層構成。另外,在前述之感光性薄膜具有後述之保護薄膜的情況下,較宜是將該保護薄膜予以剝離,並使前述之感光層與前述之基體重合的方式來進行積層。The layer structure of the above-mentioned laminated body is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. For example, it is preferred to have a layer structure in which the above-mentioned substrate, the above-mentioned photosensitive layer, and the above-mentioned support are sequentially provided. In the case where the photosensitive film described above has a protective film to be described later, it is preferred that the protective film is peeled off and the photosensitive layer is laminated to the above-mentioned basis weight.

前述積層體之形成方法並沒有特別地限定,係可以按照目的而適當地選擇,較宜是藉由將感光性組成物用之感光性組成物溶液塗布於前述之基材的表面上並進行乾燥之積層態樣、對於前述感光性組成物一邊進行加熱及加壓中的至少任一種而一邊將之積層於前述基體上之態樣。The method for forming the laminate is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and it is preferred to apply a solution of the photosensitive composition for the photosensitive composition onto the surface of the substrate and dry it. In the laminated form, the photosensitive composition is laminated on the substrate while performing at least one of heating and pressurization.

前述之加熱溫度並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,例如,較宜是70~130℃,更宜是80~110℃。The above heating temperature is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, however, for example, it is preferably 70 to 130 ° C, more preferably 80 to 110 ° C.

前述加壓之壓力並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,例如,較宜是0.01~1.0 MPa,更宜是0.05~1.0 MPa。The pressure of the pressurization is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is, for example, preferably 0.01 to 1.0 MPa, more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 MPa.

進行前述之加熱及加壓中的至少任一種之裝置,並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,舉例來說,例如適合的積層機為熱壓機、熱輥積層機(例如,大成積層機公司製之VP-II)、真空積層機(例如,尼契苟蒙筒股份有限公司製之VP130)等。The apparatus for performing at least any of the above-described heating and pressurization is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. However, for example, a suitable laminator is a hot press or a hot roll laminator. (For example, VP-II manufactured by Dacheng Laminator Co., Ltd.), a vacuum laminator (for example, VP130 manufactured by Nichiymon Co., Ltd.), and the like.

本發明之感光性組成物,由於藉由含有預定的高分子而能夠以良好效率形成一種感度良好及保存安定性優異之高精細圖案的緣故,所以可適合使用於保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等之永久圖案等之各種圖案形成用、彩色濾光片、柱材、肋材、間隔物、隔牆等之液晶構造組件之製造用、全息照相、微機械、驗證等之永久圖案形成用途上,尤其,能夠非常適合使用於印刷基板之永久圖案形成用途上。Since the photosensitive composition of the present invention can form a high-definition pattern excellent in sensitivity and excellent in storage stability with good efficiency by containing a predetermined polymer, it can be suitably used for a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and resistant. Permanent pattern formation for manufacturing liquid crystal structural components such as permanent patterns such as solder patterns, color filters, pillars, ribs, spacers, partition walls, etc., holography, micromachining, verification, etc. In particular, it can be suitably used for permanent pattern forming applications of printed boards.

本發明之圖案形成裝置係具備前述之感光層,至少具有光照射機構和光調變機構。The pattern forming apparatus of the present invention includes the above-described photosensitive layer, and has at least a light irradiation mechanism and a light modulation mechanism.

本發明之永久圖案形成方法係至少包含曝光步驟,並包含適當選擇的顯像步驟等之其他步驟。The permanent pattern forming method of the present invention comprises at least an exposure step and includes other steps of a suitably selected developing step or the like.

另外,本發明的前述之圖案形成裝置,經由本發明的前述圖案形成方法之説明,當已清楚而明白了。Further, the above-described pattern forming apparatus of the present invention has been clearly understood from the above description of the pattern forming method of the present invention.

〔曝光步驟〕[Exposure step]

前述之曝光步驟係為對於本發明之感光性組成物中的感光層進行曝光之步驟。本發明之前述的感光性組成物及基體之材料,係如以上所述。The aforementioned exposure step is a step of exposing the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive composition of the present invention. The photosensitive composition and the material of the substrate of the present invention are as described above.

前述曝光之對象,只要是前述感光性組成物中的感光層就好,雖然並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,舉例來說,例如,較宜是如以上所述,對於一邊經由對感光性薄膜進行加熱及加壓中之任一種、一邊積層在基材上所形成的積層體來進行。The object to be exposed is preferably a photosensitive layer in the photosensitive composition, and is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. However, for example, it is preferably as described above. It is carried out by laminating a layer formed on a substrate by heating and pressurizing the photosensitive film.

前述之曝光雖然並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,例如,較宜是數位曝光、類比曝光等;此等之中較佳為數位曝光。Although the aforementioned exposure is not particularly limited, it may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, however, for example, it is preferably a digital exposure, an analog exposure, or the like; among these, digital exposure is preferred.

前述之數位曝光並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,例如,使用基於所形成的圖案形成資訊產生控制信號、並隨著該控制信號所調變的光來進行;例如,較宜是對於前述之感光層,使用曝光頭,其係配備光照射機構、及具有接受來自前述光照射機構的光並予以射出之n個(但,n為2以上之自然數)的2次元狀排列之圖素部、能夠因應圖案資訊而控制前述之圖素部的光調變機構之曝光頭,且係經配置以使得前述圖素部的列方向與該曝光頭的描掃方向形成預定之設定傾斜角度θ;對於前述之曝光頭,藉著使用圖素部指定機構,由可供使用的前述圖素部之中指定使用於N次曝光(但,N為2以上之自然數)的前述圖素部;與對於前述之曝光頭,藉著圖素部控制機構,依照使得僅有經前述使用圖素部指定機構所指定的前述圖素部參與曝光之方式來進行控制前述圖素部;及使前述曝光頭相對於掃描方向移動而對於前述感光層進行曝光之方法。The aforementioned digital exposure is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the needs of the object, for example, using light generated based on the formed pattern forming information and modulated with the control signal; for example, It is preferable to use an exposure head for the photosensitive layer described above, which is provided with a light irradiation mechanism and a n-dimensional shape having n (but, n is a natural number of 2 or more) having received light from the light irradiation means and emitted. The aligned pixel portion, the exposure head capable of controlling the light modulation mechanism of the pixel portion in response to the pattern information, and configured to cause the column direction of the pixel portion to form a predetermined direction with the scanning direction of the exposure head The tilt angle θ is set. The above-described exposure head is specified by the use of the pixel portion specifying means for the N-time exposure (but N is a natural number of 2 or more) among the available pixel portions. In the above-mentioned exposure head, by means of the pixel control mechanism, the control is performed in such a manner that the aforementioned pixel portion specified by the above-mentioned use of the pixel designation institution is involved in the exposure. And a method of exposing the photosensitive layer by moving the exposure head relative to a scanning direction.

在本發明中,「N次曝光」係指在前述感光層上之被曝光面的大約全部區域中,平行於前述曝光頭的掃描方向之直線,與該被曝光面上所照射的N條光點列(圖素列)係設定成交叉而曝光。本文中,「光點列(圖素列)」係指當做由前述圖素部所生成的圖素單位的光點(圖素)列之中,比前述曝光頭的掃描方向的夾角小的方向之列。另外,前述之圖素部的配置不一定非得是矩形格子狀,例如,可以是平行四邊形狀之配置等。In the present invention, "N-time exposure" means a line parallel to the scanning direction of the exposure head in approximately the entire area of the exposed surface on the photosensitive layer, and N light irradiated on the exposed surface. The dot column (pixel column) is set to be crossed and exposed. In the present disclosure, the "spot array" is a direction which is smaller than the angle of the scanning direction of the exposure head among the pixel (pixel) columns of the pixel unit generated by the pixel portion. The list. Further, the arrangement of the aforementioned pixel portions does not necessarily have to be a rectangular lattice shape, and for example, may be a configuration of a parallelogram shape or the like.

此處所述之「大約全部區域」,就各圖素部的兩側邊緣部而論,其係由於使圖素部列呈傾斜而減少與平行於前述曝光頭的掃描方向交叉的使用圖素部之圖素列的數量,所以在此種情況下,即使是連接複數個曝光頭來使用,也會因該曝光頭的安裝角度及配置等之誤差、而使得與平行於掃描方向的直線交叉之使用圖素部之圖素部列的數量些微增減的緣故,又且各使用圖素部之圖素部列間連繫的解像度分以下之極少部分,由於安裝角度及圖素部配置等之誤差、而使得沿著與掃描方向成垂直的方向之圖素部的節距不能與其他部分之圖素部的節距嚴密地一致,因而與平行於掃描方向的直線交叉之使用圖素部的圖素部列之數量乃在±1的範圍內增減所致。另外,在以下的說明之中,係將N為2以上的自然數之N次曝光統合稱為「多次曝光」。更且,在以下的說明之中,就以本發明之曝光裝置及曝光方法當做繪圖裝置及繪圖方法來實施的形態而論,係使用「N次繪圖」及「多次繪圖」之用語來做為對應於「N次曝光」及「多次曝光」的用語。The "about all regions" described herein, in terms of the both side edges of the respective pixel portions, reduce the use of pixels that intersect the scanning direction parallel to the exposure head by tilting the pixel portion. The number of pixels in the part, so in this case, even if a plurality of exposure heads are connected for use, a straight line parallel to the scanning direction is caused by an error in the mounting angle and arrangement of the exposure head. In the case of using the number of pixels in the pixel portion, the number of pixels in the pixel portion is slightly increased or decreased, and the resolution of each of the pixel portions in the pixel portion is divided into a minimum of the following, due to the mounting angle and the arrangement of the pixel portion. The error is such that the pitch of the pixel portion along the direction perpendicular to the scanning direction cannot be strictly coincident with the pitch of the pixel portion of the other portion, and thus the pixel portion intersecting with the straight line parallel to the scanning direction is used. The number of the pixel parts is increased or decreased within the range of ±1. In addition, in the following description, the N exposure of the natural number of N or more is called "multiple exposure." Furthermore, in the following description, the exposure apparatus and the exposure method of the present invention are implemented as a drawing apparatus and a drawing method, and the terms "N times drawing" and "multiple drawing" are used. It is a term corresponding to "N exposure" and "multiple exposure".

前述之N次曝光的N,只要是2以上的自然數即可,並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而較宜是3以上之自然數,更宜是3以上7以下之自然數。The N of the N-th exposure described above is not particularly limited as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose. However, it is preferably a natural number of 3 or more, and more preferably 3 or more and 7 or less. The natural number.

一邊參照圖面,一邊進行說明與本發明之永久圖案形成方法相關之圖案形成裝置的一例。An example of a pattern forming apparatus relating to the permanent pattern forming method of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

前述之圖案形成裝置,即所謂的平頭型(Flat Head Type)曝光裝置,如第1圖所示,其係具備將使前述感光性薄膜中至少積層有前述感光層之片狀感光材料12(以下,有稱為「感光層12」的情形)予以吸附並保持於表面上的平板狀平台14。在4支腳部16所支撐的厚板狀設置台18之上面,設置沿著平台移動方向延伸的2條導件20。平台14的長度方向係朝著平台移動方向配置,同時藉由導件20可來回移動支撐。另外,在此種圖案形成裝置10中係設有使平台14沿著導件20驅動的驅動裝置(圖中沒有顯示)。The above-described pattern forming apparatus, that is, a so-called flat head type exposure apparatus, as shown in Fig. 1, is provided with a sheet-like photosensitive material 12 in which at least the photosensitive layer is laminated on the photosensitive film (hereinafter There is a flat plate-like stage 14 which is adsorbed and held on the surface, which is called "photosensitive layer 12". On the upper surface of the thick plate-like mounting table 18 supported by the four leg portions 16, two guide members 20 extending in the direction in which the platform moves are provided. The length direction of the platform 14 is disposed toward the moving direction of the platform while being supported by the guide 20 to move back and forth. Further, in the pattern forming apparatus 10, a driving device (not shown) for driving the stage 14 along the guide 20 is provided.

在設置台18之中央部位上,係設有可跨越平台14之移動路徑的字型閘22。字型閘22之端部各固定於設置台18兩側上。在夾住該閘22之一側設置掃描器24,另一側設置檢測感光材料12之前端與後端的複數個(例如2個)檢測感應器26。掃瞄器24及檢測感應器26各別安裝於閘22上,並固定配置於平台14之移動路徑的上方。另外,掃描器24及檢測感應器26連接於圖中沒有顯示的控制此等之控制器。At a central portion of the setting table 18, there is a moving path that can span the platform 14. Font gate 22. The ends of the font gates 22 are each fixed to both sides of the setting table 18. A scanner 24 is disposed on one side of the gate 22, and a plurality of (for example, two) detection sensors 26 for detecting the front end and the rear end of the photosensitive material 12 are disposed on the other side. The scanner 24 and the detecting sensor 26 are respectively mounted on the gate 22 and fixedly disposed above the moving path of the platform 14. In addition, the scanner 24 and the detection sensor 26 are connected to a controller that controls these without being shown.

本文中,為了說明,乃在平行於平台14之表面的平面上,如第1圖所示這樣地界定相互垂直的X軸及Y軸。Herein, for the sake of explanation, the X-axis and the Y-axis which are perpendicular to each other are defined as shown in FIG. 1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the stage 14.

沿著平台14的掃描方向之上游側(以下,也有單純地稱為「上游側」的情況)之端邊部位上,向著X軸方向形成「ㄑ」字型的狹縫28,並以等間隔形成10條。各個狹縫28係由位於上游側之狹縫28a和位於下游側之狹縫28b所形成。狹縫28a和狹縫28b係相互垂直,並且相對於X軸,狹縫28a為-45度而狹縫28b則具有+45度之角度。In the end portion of the upstream side of the scanning direction of the stage 14 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the upstream side"), a slit 28 having a U shape is formed in the X-axis direction at equal intervals. Form 10 pieces. Each of the slits 28 is formed by a slit 28a on the upstream side and a slit 28b on the downstream side. The slit 28a and the slit 28b are perpendicular to each other, and the slit 28a is -45 degrees with respect to the X-axis and the slit 28b has an angle of +45 degrees.

狹縫28的位置係與前述曝光頭30之中心略呈一致。又,各狹縫28之大小,係為充分地覆蓋所對應的曝光頭30之曝光區域32的寬度之大小。又,狹縫28之位置係鄰接曝光完成區域34間的重複部分之中心位置略呈一致。在此情況下,各狹縫28的大小係為可以充分覆蓋曝光完成區域34間之重複部分的寬度之大小。The position of the slit 28 is slightly coincident with the center of the aforementioned exposure head 30. Further, each slit 28 is sized to sufficiently cover the width of the exposure region 32 of the corresponding exposure head 30. Further, the position of the slit 28 is slightly coincident with the center position of the overlapping portion between the exposure completion regions 34. In this case, each slit 28 is sized to sufficiently cover the width of the overlapping portion between the exposure completion regions 34.

在平台14內部各個狹縫28的下方位置上,係組裝有分別於後述的使用圖素部指定處理中當做檢測出圖素單位之光的光點位置檢出機構之單一晶格(cell)型光檢出器(圖中未顯示)。又,各個光檢出器係接續到後述的使用圖素部指定處理中當做進行選擇前述圖素部之圖素部選擇機構的演算裝置(圖中未顯示)。A single cell type of a spot position detecting mechanism that detects light in a pixel unit in the pixel specifying process described later is incorporated in a position below each slit 28 in the stage 14 Light detector (not shown). Further, each of the photodetectors is connected to an arithmetic unit (not shown) that performs the pixel unit selection unit that selects the pixel unit in the pixel unit specifying process to be described later.

曝光時前述圖案形成裝置的動作形態,可以是使曝光頭經常地一邊移動一邊連續地進行曝光的形態,也可以是使曝光頭階段地移動,使曝光頭靜止於各移動端的位置上而進行曝光動作的形態。The operation mode of the pattern forming apparatus during exposure may be such that the exposure head is continuously exposed while moving, or the exposure head may be moved stepwise to expose the exposure head to the position of each of the moving ends to perform exposure. The form of the action.

<<曝光頭>><<Exposure head>>

各曝光頭30係以使得後述之內部數位微鏡片裝置(DMD)36的各圖素部(微鏡片)列方向與掃描方向成為預定的設定傾斜角度θ的方式安裝於掃描器24上。從而,各曝光頭30之曝光區域32乃成為相對於掃描方向呈傾斜的矩形狀區域。隨著平台14之移動,乃於感光層12上形成每個曝光頭30之帶狀曝光完成區域34。在第2圖及第3B圖所示的例子中,掃描器24係具備經排列成2行5列之大約呈矩陣狀之10個曝光頭。Each of the exposure heads 30 is attached to the scanner 24 so that the respective pixel portions (microlens) column directions of the internal digital microlens device (DMD) 36 to be described later and the scanning direction become a predetermined set inclination angle θ. Therefore, the exposure region 32 of each exposure head 30 is a rectangular region that is inclined with respect to the scanning direction. As the stage 14 moves, a strip-shaped exposure completion area 34 of each of the exposure heads 30 is formed on the photosensitive layer 12. In the examples shown in Figs. 2 and 3B, the scanner 24 is provided with ten exposure heads arranged in a matrix of two rows and five columns.

另外,在以下之中,當在顯示排列在第m行第n列的各個曝光頭之情況下,係記載為曝光頭30mn ;當在顯示排列在第m行第n列的各個曝光頭之曝光範圍的情況下,則記載為曝光區域32mnIn addition, in the following, in the case of displaying the respective exposure heads arranged in the nth row of the mth row, it is described as the exposure head 30 mn ; when the respective exposure heads arranged in the nth column of the mth row are displayed In the case of the exposure range, it is described as the exposure area 32 mn .

又,如第3A圖及第3B圖所示,經以帶狀曝光完成區域34的每一個為分別與鄰接的曝光完成區域34部分重疊的方式,而排列成線狀的各行之曝光頭30的每一個,係以預定的間隔(曝光區域之長邊的自然數倍,本實施形態為2倍)配置,沒有間隙地配置在其配列方向。因此,第1行之曝光區域3211 與曝光區域3212 之間無法曝光的部分,係可藉由第2行之曝光區域3221 來進行曝光。Further, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, each of the strip-shaped exposure completion regions 34 is partially overlapped with the adjacent exposure completion regions 34, and the exposure heads 30 of the respective rows arranged in a line shape are arranged. Each of them is disposed at a predetermined interval (a natural multiple of the long side of the exposure region, twice in the present embodiment), and is arranged in the arrangement direction without a gap. Therefore, the portion of the first row between the exposed region 32 11 and the exposed region 32 12 that is not exposed can be exposed by the exposure region 32 21 of the second row.

各個曝光頭30,如第4圖、第5A圖及第5B圖所示,係具備做為使入射的光對應於圖像數據調變每一個圖素部之光調變機構(調變各圖素部的空間光調變元件)之DMD36(美國德州儀器公司製)。此種DMD36係連接於具備數據處理部與鏡片驅動控制部之控制器上。此控制器之數據處理部,係基於所輸入的圖案資訊,對於每個曝光頭30產生驅動控制DMD36上之使用區域內的各微鏡片之控制信號。又,鏡片驅動控制部係基於圖案資訊處理部生成的控制信號,對於每個曝光頭30控制DMD36之各微鏡片的反射面之角度。Each of the exposure heads 30, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 5A, and FIG. 5B, is provided with a light modulation mechanism for modulating the incident light corresponding to the image data for each pixel portion. DMD36 (manufactured by Texas Instruments, Inc.) of the space light modulation component of the Ministry of Science and Technology. The DMD 36 is connected to a controller including a data processing unit and a lens drive control unit. The data processing unit of the controller generates a control signal for driving each microlens in the use region on the DMD 36 for each of the exposure heads 30 based on the input pattern information. Further, the lens drive control unit controls the angle of the reflection surface of each of the microlenses of the DMD 36 for each of the exposure heads 30 based on the control signal generated by the pattern information processing unit.

如第4圖所示,在DMD36之光入射側係依順序配置有具備光纖之射出端部(發光點)沿著與曝光區域32之長邊方向一致的方向一列排列的雷射射出部之纖維陣列光源38、補正自纖維陣列光源38射出的雷射光而聚光於DMD上之透鏡系40、使透過透鏡系統40之雷射光朝DMD36反射的鏡片42。另外,第4圖係為概略地表示透鏡系統40之示意圖。As shown in FIG. 4, the fibers of the laser emitting portion in which the emission end portions (light-emitting points) of the optical fibers are arranged in a line in the direction in which the longitudinal direction of the exposure region 32 is aligned are arranged in this order on the light incident side of the DMD 36. The array light source 38 corrects the laser light emitted from the fiber array light source 38 to condense the lens system 40 on the DMD, and the lens 42 that reflects the laser light transmitted through the lens system 40 toward the DMD 36. In addition, FIG. 4 is a schematic view schematically showing the lens system 40.

上述之透鏡系統40,詳如第5A圖及第5B圖所示者,其係由將自纖維陣列光源38所射出的雷射光予以平行光化的1對組合透鏡44,將已平行光化的雷射光予以補正使光量分布均一的1對組合透鏡46、及將經補正光量分布的雷射光聚光於DMD36上之聚光透鏡48所構成。The lens system 40 described above, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, is a pair of combined lenses 44 that collimate the laser light emitted from the fiber array light source 38 in parallel, and is optically parallelized. The laser beam is corrected by a pair of combined lenses 46 having a uniform light amount distribution and a collecting lens 48 for condensing the laser light having the corrected light amount distribution on the DMD 36.

又,在DMD36之光反射側上,係配置有使經以DMD36反射的雷射光成像於感光層12的曝光面上之透鏡系統50。透鏡系統50係由按照使DMD36和感光層12的曝光面成為共軛關係的方式配置之2面透鏡52及54所形成。Further, on the light reflection side of the DMD 36, a lens system 50 for imaging the laser light reflected by the DMD 36 on the exposure surface of the photosensitive layer 12 is disposed. The lens system 50 is formed by the two-plane lenses 52 and 54 which are disposed such that the exposure surfaces of the DMD 36 and the photosensitive layer 12 are in a conjugate relationship.

在本實施態樣中,由纖維陣列光源38所射出的雷射光,係經設定成在實質放大5倍之後,來自DMD36上之各個微鏡片的光線係經由上述的透鏡50而縮短成約5微米。In the present embodiment, the laser light emitted from the fiber array light source 38 is set such that after substantially five times magnification, the light from each of the microlenses on the DMD 36 is shortened to about 5 μm via the lens 50 described above.

-光調變機構--Light modulation mechanism -

前述之光調變機構,只要是具有n個(但,n為2以上之自然數)的2次元狀排列之前述圖素部、並能夠隨著前述圖案資訊來控制前述之圖素部者即可,並沒有特別地限定,雖然可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,例如,較宜是空間光調變元件。The light modulation mechanism described above is a pixel unit having n (but a natural number of 2 or more) and can control the pixel unit in accordance with the pattern information. However, it is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the needs of the object, however, for example, it is preferably a spatial light modulation element.

前述之空間光調變元件,舉例來說,例如適合者有數位微鏡片裝置(DMD)、MEMS(Micro Electro Mechanical Systems,微電子機械系統)型的空間光調變元件(SLM,Special Light Modulator;空間光調變器)、藉由電光學效果調變透射光的光學元件(PLZT元件)、液晶光快門(FLC)等;於此等之中,舉例來說,例如較佳為DMD。For example, a spatial light modulation device (SLM, Special Light Modulator) having a digital microlens device (DMD) or a MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical Systems) type is suitable. A spatial light modulator), an optical element (PLZT element) that modulates transmitted light by an electro-optical effect, a liquid crystal shutter (FLC), etc., among which, for example, DMD is preferable.

又,前述之光調變機構,較宜是具有基於所形成的圖案形成資訊而產生控制信號之圖案信號產生機構。在此種情況下,前述之光調變機構係隨著前述之圖案信號產生機構所產生的控制信號來調變光。Further, the optical modulation means described above is preferably a pattern signal generating means for generating a control signal based on the formed pattern forming information. In this case, the optical modulation mechanism described above modulates the light with a control signal generated by the pattern signal generating means described above.

前述之控制信號並沒有特別地限定,雖然可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而,舉例來說,例如適合者有數位信號等。The aforementioned control signal is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the needs of the object. However, for example, a suitable person may have a digital signal or the like.

以下,一邊參照圖面一邊說明前述之光調變機構的一個例子。Hereinafter, an example of the above-described optical modulation mechanism will be described with reference to the drawings.

如第6圖所示,DMD36係為在SRAM單位(記憶單位)56上,當做構成各個圖素(畫素)之圖素部的多數個微鏡片58以格子狀排列所成的微鏡片裝置。在本實施態樣中,雖然使用由1024列×768行之微鏡片58所配置而成的DMD36,然而可以藉由連接到此等DMD36中之控制器來驅動、即可供使用的微鏡片58,係只有1024列×256行。由於DMD36之數據處理速度是有界限的,因為是由使用的微鏡片數比例來決定每1列的調變速度,所以像這樣地只使用部分的鏡片可以使得每1列的調變速度變快。各微鏡片58係為支柱所支撐,其表面上為蒸鍍鋁等之高反射率材料。另外,在本實施態樣中,各微鏡片58之反射率係在90%以上,該排列間距係縱方向、橫方向在一個例子中皆為13.7微米。SRAM單位56,係經由含有鉸鏈及軛之支柱,而在一般半導體記憶體之生產線上所製造的矽閘之CMOS,且全體為單片(monolithic,一體型)構成。As shown in Fig. 6, the DMD 36 is a microlens device in which a plurality of microlenses 58 constituting a pixel portion of each pixel (pixel) are arranged in a lattice on the SRAM unit (memory unit) 56. In the present embodiment, although the DMD 36 configured by the 1024 columns x 768 rows of microlenses 58 is used, the microlenses 58 that can be driven by the controllers connected to the DMDs 36 can be used. , only 1024 columns × 256 rows. Since the data processing speed of the DMD 36 is limited, since the modulation speed per column is determined by the ratio of the number of microlenses used, only a part of the lens can be used to make the modulation speed of each column faster. . Each of the microlenses 58 is supported by a pillar, and the surface thereof is a highly reflective material such as vapor-deposited aluminum. Further, in the present embodiment, the reflectance of each of the microlenses 58 is 90% or more, and the arrangement pitch is 13.7 μm in one example in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction. The SRAM unit 56 is a CMOS gate which is manufactured on a general semiconductor memory production line via a pillar including a hinge and a yoke, and is entirely monolithic.

於DMD36之SRAM單位(記憶單位)56輸入構成所期望的2次元圖案之各點濃度以2個值表示的影像信號時,支撐於支柱上的微鏡片58,以對角線為中心,相對於配置有DMD36之基板側而言係傾斜±α度(例如,±10度)之範圍。第7A圖係表示微鏡片58為ON(開啟)狀態,傾斜+α度的狀態,第7B圖係表示微鏡片58為OFF(關閉)狀態,傾斜-α度的狀態。因此,藉由隨著圖案信號,如第6圖所示這樣地來控制DMD36之各個畫素中微鏡片58的傾斜度,而將入射於DMD36之雷射光束B分別地朝微鏡片58之傾斜方向反射。When the SRAM unit (memory unit) 56 of the DMD 36 inputs an image signal in which the density of each dot of the desired quaternary pattern is represented by two values, the microlens 58 supported on the pillar is centered on the diagonal line with respect to The substrate side on which the DMD 36 is disposed is inclined by ±α degrees (for example, ±10 degrees). Fig. 7A shows a state in which the microlens 58 is in an ON state, and a state of inclination + α degrees, and Fig. 7B shows a state in which the microlens 58 is in an OFF state and tilted by -α degrees. Therefore, by controlling the inclination of the microlens 58 in each pixel of the DMD 36 as shown in Fig. 6, as the pattern signal, the laser beam B incident on the DMD 36 is tilted toward the microlens 58 respectively. Directional reflection.

第6圖係顯示部分放大DMD36,且各微鏡片58被控制於+α度或-α度之狀態的一例。各微鏡片58之ON、OFF(開、關)控制係藉由連接於DMD36之前述控制器來進行。此外,在OFF(關閉)狀態之微鏡片58所反射的雷射光B進行的方向上係配置有光吸收體(圖中沒有表示)。Fig. 6 is a view showing an example in which the DMD 36 is partially enlarged and each microlens 58 is controlled to a state of +α degrees or -α degrees. The ON, OFF (on, off) control of each microlens 58 is performed by the aforementioned controller connected to the DMD 36. Further, a light absorber (not shown) is disposed in the direction in which the laser light B reflected by the microlens 58 in the OFF state is performed.

-光照射機構--Light illumination mechanism -

前述的光照射機構並沒有特別的限制,可以視目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是(超)高壓水銀燈、氙氣燈、碳弧燈、鹵素燈、影印機用等之螢光管、LED、半導體雷射等之習知光源,或可以合成2條以上之光進行照射的機構;於此等之中,較宜是可以合成2條以上之光進行照射的機構。The light irradiation mechanism is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. For example, it may be a (super) high pressure mercury lamp, a xenon lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a halogen lamp, a photocopier, etc. A conventional light source such as a light pipe, an LED, or a semiconductor laser, or a mechanism that can synthesize two or more light beams, and among these, a mechanism that can synthesize two or more pieces of light is preferably used.

從前述之光照射機構所照射的光,例如在透過支撐體進行光照射的情況,舉例來說,例如其可以是透過該支撐體、且將所使用的光聚合系化合物或增感劑予以活性化之電磁波、紫外線~可見光線、電子線、X射線、雷射光等;於此等之中,較宜是雷射光,更宜是由2條以上之光合成的雷射(以下,稱為「複合波雷射」)。另外,即使是在剝離支撐體後進行光照射的情況下,亦可以使用相同的光。The light irradiated from the light irradiation means described above, for example, when irradiated with light through a support, may be, for example, transmitted through the support and activated by the photopolymerizable compound or sensitizer used. Electromagnetic wave, ultraviolet light, visible light, electron beam, X-ray, laser light, etc.; among these, it is more suitable for laser light, and it is more suitable to be a laser synthesized by two or more lights (hereinafter, referred to as "composite Boley shot"). Further, even when light is irradiated after peeling off the support, the same light can be used.

前述紫外線~可見光線之波長,例如,較佳為300~1,500奈米,更佳為320~800奈米,特佳為330~650奈米。The wavelength of the ultraviolet to visible light is, for example, preferably 300 to 1,500 nm, more preferably 320 to 800 nm, and particularly preferably 330 to 650 nm.

前述雷射光之波長,例如,較宜是200~1,500奈米,更宜是300~800奈米,更理想是330~500奈米,特別理想是400~450奈米。The wavelength of the aforementioned laser light is, for example, preferably 200 to 1,500 nm, more preferably 300 to 800 nm, more preferably 330 to 500 nm, and particularly preferably 400 to 450 nm.

可照射前述之複合波雷射的機構,例如,較佳是具有將複數種雷射、多模光纖、與從數種雷射所各自照射的雷射光聚光,於前述多模光纖上相互結合之集合光學系統的機構。A mechanism that can illuminate the aforementioned composite laser beam, for example, preferably has a plurality of kinds of lasers, a multimode fiber, and a laser beam irradiated from each of the plurality of lasers, and is combined with each other on the multimode fiber. The mechanism of the collection optical system.

可照射前述之複合波雷射的機構(纖維陣列光源),舉例來說,例如其可以是於特開2005-258431號公報的段落編號〔0109〕~〔0146〕上所記載的機構等。For example, the mechanism described in paragraphs [0109] to [0146] of JP-A-2005-258431 can be used.

<<使用圖素部指定機構>><<Using the Ministry of the Ministry of Design>>

前述之使用圖素部指定機構,較宜是至少具備於被曝光面中檢測出圖素單位之光點位置的光點位置檢出機構、及基於前述光點位置檢出機構之檢出結果,選擇用以實現N次曝光所使用的圖素部之圖素部選擇機構。Preferably, the pixel portion specifying means is provided with a spot position detecting means that detects at least a spot position of the pixel unit on the exposed surface, and a detection result based on the spot position detecting means. A pixel selection mechanism for realizing the pixel portion used for N exposures is selected.

以下,說明藉由前述使用圖素部指定機構來指定於N次曝光使用的圖素部之指定方法。Hereinafter, a method of designating a pixel portion to be used for N exposures by using the pixel portion specifying means will be described.

(1)單一曝光頭內之使用圖素部之指定方法(1) Designation method of using the pixel part in a single exposure head

在本實施形態(1)中,係說明一種在藉由圖案形成裝置10對於感光材料12進行2次曝光的情況下,藉以減輕由於各曝光頭30之安裝角度誤差所引起的解像度變異和濃度不均一現象,並指定用以實現理想的2次曝光之使用圖素部的指定方法。In the first embodiment (1), in the case where the photosensitive material 12 is subjected to the exposure twice by the pattern forming apparatus 10, the resolution variation and the concentration which are caused by the mounting angle error of the respective exposure heads 30 are alleviated. Uniformity, and specifies the method of specifying the pixel portion to achieve the desired 2 exposures.

相對於曝光頭30之掃描方向的圖素部(微鏡片58)之列方向的設定傾斜角度θ,只要是沒有曝光頭30的安裝角度誤差等之理想狀態的話,則能夠使用可供使用的1024列×256行之圖素部,並採用比恰好2次曝光的角度θideal 稍微大些的角度。The set inclination angle θ with respect to the direction of the pixel portion (microlens 58) in the scanning direction of the exposure head 30 can be used as long as it is in an ideal state without an attachment angle error of the exposure head 30 or the like. Columns x 256 rows of pixels, and use an angle slightly larger than the angle θ ideal of exactly 2 exposures.

此種角度θideal 對於N次曝光之次數N,可供使用的微鏡片58之列方向的個數s、可供使用的微鏡片之列方向的間隔p、及曝光頭30呈傾斜狀態時之由於微鏡片所形成的掃描線間距δ而言,係具有如下述式1之關係:s p sin θideal ≧N δ (式1)The angle θ ideal is the number N of N exposures, the number s of directions of the microlenses 58 that can be used, the interval p of the available microlenses, and the tilting state of the exposure head 30. Due to the scanning line pitch δ formed by the microlens, it has a relationship of the following formula 1: sp sin θ ideal ≧N δ (Formula 1)

本實施形態中之DMD36,如以上所述,因為它是一種縱橫之配置間隔為相等之多數個微鏡片58呈矩形格子狀排列之物的緣故,所以:p cos θideal =δ (式2)In the DMD 36 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the plurality of microlenses 58 having the same vertical and horizontal arrangement intervals are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape, p cos θ ideal = δ (Expression 2)

因而上述式1乃變成:s tan θideal =N (式3)Therefore, the above formula 1 becomes: s tan θ ideal = N (Formula 3)

在本實施形態(1)中,如以上所述,s=256、N=2,所以依照前述之式3,角度θideal 係約0.45度。從而設定傾斜角度θ,例如,可以採用0.50度左右的角度。圖案形成裝置10在可以調整的範圍內,各曝光頭30、即DMD36之安裝角度之初期調整,係以接近此種設定傾斜角度θ之角度的方式來進行調整的。In the first embodiment (1), as described above, since s = 256 and N = 2, the angle θ Ideal is about 0.45 degrees in accordance with the above formula 3. Thereby, the inclination angle θ is set, and for example, an angle of about 0.50 degrees can be employed. In the range in which the pattern forming apparatus 10 can be adjusted, the initial adjustment of the attachment angle of each of the exposure heads 30, that is, the DMD 36, is adjusted so as to approach the angle of the set inclination angle θ.

第8圖係為顯示在經如以上所述進行初期調整的圖案形成裝置10中,由於1個曝光頭30之安裝角度誤差及圖案畸變之影響,而使得曝光面上之圖案產生偏差的例子之說明圖。在以下之圖面及說明之中,對於由各圖素部(微鏡片)所生成的構成被曝光面之曝光範圍的圖素單位之光點,係分別地將第m行的光點記載為r(m)、將第n列之光點記載為c(n)、將第m行第n列之光點記載為P(m,n)。Fig. 8 is a view showing an example in which the pattern on the exposure surface is deviated due to the influence of the mounting angle error and the pattern distortion of the one exposure head 30 in the pattern forming apparatus 10 which is initially adjusted as described above. Illustrating. In the following drawings and descriptions, the spot of the pixel in the pixel unit constituting the exposure range of the exposed surface generated by each pixel portion (microlens) is described as the spot of the mth line as r(m), the light spot of the nth column is described as c(n), and the light spot of the mth row and the nth column is described as P(m, n).

第8圖之上半部分係顯示:在使平台14靜止的狀態下,由感光材料12之被曝光面上所投影的可供使用的微鏡片58而來的光點群之圖案;下半部分則係顯示:在出現如上半部分所示這樣的光點群之圖案的狀態下,使平台14移動而連續進行曝光時,於被曝光面上所形成的曝光圖案之狀態。The upper half of Fig. 8 shows the pattern of the spot group from the available microlenses 58 projected on the exposed surface of the photosensitive material 12 in a state where the stage 14 is stationary; the lower half Then, in the state in which the pattern of the spot group as shown in the above half appears, the state of the exposure pattern formed on the exposed surface when the stage 14 is moved to continuously perform exposure.

另外,在第8圖之中,雖然為了方便進行說明起見而將可供使用的微鏡片58之奇數列之曝光圖案、與偶數列之曝光圖案分開地表示,然而,在實際的被曝光面上的曝光圖案,係由此等2個曝光圖案重合而成者。Further, in Fig. 8, the exposure pattern of the odd-numbered columns of the microlenses 58 that can be used and the exposure patterns of the even-numbered columns are separately shown for convenience of explanation, but the actual exposed surface is The exposure pattern on the top is formed by superimposing two exposure patterns.

在第8圖之例子中,因為設定傾斜角度θ係採用較上述角度θideal 稍大的角度之結果,以及由於難以微量調整曝光頭30之安裝角度而導致實際的安裝角度、與上述設定傾斜角度θ間具有誤差的結果,以致在被曝光面上的任一區域中也都產生濃度不均一現象。具體而言,奇數列之微鏡片的曝光圖案及偶數列之微鏡片的曝光圖案雙方,在由複數圖素部列所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言,乃變成曝光過多,以致產生圖像變為冗長的區域,並且產生濃度不均一現象。In the example of Fig. 8, since the set inclination angle θ is a result of an angle slightly larger than the above-described angle θ ideal , and the installation angle of the exposure head 30 is hardly adjusted, the actual installation angle and the above-described set inclination angle are caused. There is an error between θ, so that density unevenness occurs in any of the areas on the exposed surface. Specifically, both the exposure pattern of the odd-numbered microlens and the exposure pattern of the even-numbered microlenses are in the repeated exposure range of the exposed surface formed by the plurality of pixel portions, with respect to the ideal 2 exposures. In other words, it becomes too much exposure, so that an image becomes a redundant area, and a density unevenness phenomenon occurs.

更且,在第8圖的例子中,係為在被曝光面上出現圖案偏差的一例,投影在被曝光面上的各畫素列乃產生傾斜角度變為不均一之「角度偏差」。產生此種角度偏差之原因,舉例來說,例如,DMD36和被曝光面間光學系統的各種像差與配向偏差、以及DMD36本身之偏差及微鏡片之配置誤差等。Further, in the example of Fig. 8, an example of pattern deviation occurs on the surface to be exposed, and each pixel sequence projected on the surface to be exposed is "angle deviation" in which the inclination angle becomes uneven. The cause of such an angular deviation is, for example, various aberrations and alignment deviations of the optical system between the DMD 36 and the exposed surface, and variations in the DMD 36 itself and misalignment of the microlenses.

在第8圖之例子中所出現的角度偏差,係為一種具有對掃描方向的傾斜角度,愈靠近圖的左方之列愈小,愈靠近圖的右方之列愈大的形態之偏差。由於此種角度偏差的結果,則變成曝光過多之區域,在愈靠近圖的左方所示之被曝光面上愈小,愈靠近圖的右方所示之被曝光面上愈大。The angular deviation appearing in the example of Fig. 8 is a kind of inclination angle with respect to the scanning direction, and the smaller the column to the left of the figure is, the closer it is to the right side of the figure. As a result of such an angular deviation, it becomes an area where the exposure is excessive, and the smaller the exposure surface shown on the left side of the figure, the larger the exposure surface as shown on the right side of the figure.

如以上所述這樣,為了減輕由複數圖素部列所形成的在被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍中的濃度不均一現象,乃使用狹縫28及光檢出器之組合做為前述光點位置檢出機構,界定每個曝光頭30之實質傾斜角度θ ’,並基於該實質傾斜角度θ ’,使用做為前述圖素部選擇機構之連接於前述光檢出器的前述演算裝置,進行選擇於實際曝光所使用之微鏡片的處理。As described above, in order to alleviate the density unevenness in the repeated exposure range formed on the exposed surface by the complex pixel portion, a combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector is used as the aforementioned spot. The position detecting means defines a substantial inclination angle θ ' of each of the exposure heads 30, and based on the substantial inclination angle θ', using the above-described arithmetic means connected to the optical detector as the pixel selection means The treatment of the microlenses used in the actual exposure is selected.

實質傾斜角度θ ’係由基於光點位置檢出機構所檢出的至少2個光點位置,來界定藉由在使曝光頭呈傾斜狀態下之被曝光面上的光點列方向、與前述曝光頭之掃描方向所形成的角度。The substantial tilt angle θ ' is defined by at least two spot positions detected by the spot position detecting means to define the direction of the spot array on the exposed surface by tilting the exposure head, and the foregoing The angle formed by the scanning direction of the exposure head.

以下,使用第9圖和第12圖來說明前述實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定、及使用畫素選擇處理。Hereinafter, the definition of the aforementioned substantial inclination angle θ ' and the use of the pixel selection processing will be described using Figs. 9 and 12 .

-實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定-- Definition of the substantial tilt angle θ '

第9圖係顯示1個DMD36之曝光區域32、與對應的狹縫28間之位置關係的上視圖。狹縫28的大小係大到足以充分地覆蓋曝光區域32的寬度之大小。Fig. 9 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the exposure region 32 of one DMD 36 and the corresponding slit 28. The size of the slit 28 is large enough to adequately cover the width of the exposed area 32.

在本實施形態(1)的例子中,係測定曝光區域32的大約中心位置的第512列之光點列和曝光頭30之掃描方向所形成的角度,並將之當做實質傾斜角度θ ’。具體而言,使DMD36上之第1行第512列之微鏡片58、及第256行第512列之微鏡片58成為ON狀態,檢測出個別對應的被曝光面上之光點P(1,512)及P(256,512)之位置,並將彼等連結而成的直線、與曝光頭之掃描方向所形成的角度界定為實質傾斜角度θ ’。In the example of the first embodiment (1), the angle formed by the row of the 512th column at the approximate center position of the exposure region 32 and the scanning direction of the exposure head 30 is measured as the substantial inclination angle θ'. Specifically, the microlens 58 of the first row and the 512th column on the DMD 36 and the microlens 58 of the 256th and 512th columns are turned on, and the spot P (1, on the corresponding corresponding exposure surface is detected. The positions of 512) and P (256, 512), and the angle formed by the line connecting them and the scanning direction of the exposure head are defined as the substantial inclination angle θ '.

第10圖係說明光點(256,512)之位置的檢出手法的上視圖。Fig. 10 is a top view showing the detection method of the position of the light spot (256, 512).

首先,在使第256行第512列之微鏡片58成為點燈的狀態下,慢慢地移動平台14,使狹縫28沿著Y軸方向相對移動,光點P(256,512)在上游側的狹縫28a和下游側之狹縫28b間行走的任意位置上設置狹縫28。此時,將狹縫28a和狹縫28b間的交點座標記為(X0,Y0)。此座標(X0,Y0)之值係到平台14所賦予的驅動信號顯示上述位置為止之平台14的移動距離、以及已知的狹縫28的X方向位置來決定,並記錄。First, in a state where the microlens 58 of the 512th row and the 512th column are turned on, the stage 14 is slowly moved to relatively move the slit 28 along the Y-axis direction, and the spot P (256, 512) is upstream. A slit 28 is provided at any position between the slit 28a on the side and the slit 28b on the downstream side. At this time, the intersection between the slit 28a and the slit 28b is marked as (X0, Y0). The value of this coordinate (X0, Y0) is determined by the movement distance of the stage 14 until the drive signal given by the stage 14 shows the above position, and the position of the known slit 28 in the X direction, and is recorded.

其次,使平台14移動,並使狹縫28沿著Y軸於第10圖中的右方相對移動。接著,如第10圖之以2點虛線所示這樣地,當光點P(256,512)的光通過左側之狹縫28b而被光檢出器所檢出時,則使平台14停止。將此時之狹縫28a和狹縫28b之交點座標(X0,Y1)記錄為光點P(256,512)的位置。Next, the platform 14 is moved and the slit 28 is relatively moved along the Y-axis to the right in FIG. Next, as shown by the dotted line in Fig. 10, when the light of the light spot P (256, 512) is detected by the photodetector through the slit 28b on the left side, the stage 14 is stopped. The intersection coordinates (X0, Y1) of the slit 28a and the slit 28b at this time are recorded as the position of the light spot P (256, 512).

其次,使平台14移動,並使狹縫28沿著Y軸於第10圖中的左方相對移動。接著,如第10圖之以2點虛線所示這樣地,當光點P(256,512)的光通過左側之狹縫28a而被光檢出器所檢出時,則使平台14停止。將此時之狹縫28a和狹縫28b之交點座標(X0,Y2)記錄為光點P(256,512)的位置。Next, the platform 14 is moved and the slit 28 is relatively moved to the left in the 10th figure along the Y-axis. Next, as shown by the dotted line in Fig. 10, when the light of the light spot P (256, 512) is detected by the photodetector through the slit 28a on the left side, the stage 14 is stopped. The intersection coordinates (X0, Y2) of the slit 28a and the slit 28b at this time are recorded as the position of the light spot P (256, 512).

由以上之測定結果,表示光點P(256,512)之在被曝光面上的位置之座標(X,Y),係由X=X0+(Y1-Y2)/2、Y=(Y1+Y2)/2計算決定。也藉由同樣的測定,來決定P(1,512)的位置座,而導出各個座標連結而成的直線、與曝光頭30之掃描方向所形成的傾斜角度,並將之定義為實質傾斜角度θ ’。From the above measurement results, the coordinates (X, Y) indicating the position of the spot P (256, 512) on the surface to be exposed are X = X0 + (Y1 - Y2) / 2, Y = (Y1 + Y2) / 2 calculation decision. The position of the P (1, 512) is determined by the same measurement, and the angle formed by the line connecting the coordinates and the scanning direction of the exposure head 30 is derived and defined as the substantial inclination angle. θ '.

-使用圖素部之選擇-- Use the choice of the pixel part -

使用此種做法所定義的實質傾斜角度θ ’,連接於前述光檢出器的前述演算裝置,乃導出最接近滿足下述之關係式4:t tan θ ’=N (式4)的值t之自然數T,並進行由DMD36上之第1行到T行之微鏡片選擇出本曝光時實際使用的微鏡片之處理。藉此,選取在第512列附近之曝光範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言,成為曝光過多的區域、和成為曝光不足的區域之面積總和為最小的微鏡片,來當做實際使用的微鏡片。Using the substantial tilt angle θ ' defined by this method, the above-described arithmetic means connected to the above-described photodetector derives the value t which is closest to the relationship 4: t tan θ '= N (Expression 4) satisfying the following The natural number T, and the microlens from the first row to the T row on the DMD 36 are selected to process the microlens actually used in the exposure. Therefore, in the exposure range in the vicinity of the 512th column, the microlens which is the smallest area of the area which is excessively exposed and the area which is underexposed is the smallest in comparison with the ideal two exposures, and is actually used. Microlens.

本文中,也可以導出值t以上之最小的自然數,來替代所導出之最接近上述之值t的自然數。在該情況下,可以在第512列附近之曝光範圍中,選取相對於理想的2次曝光而言,曝光過多區域的面積變為最小、且不產生曝光不足區域的微鏡片,來當做實際使用時的微鏡片。In this context, the smallest natural number above the value t can also be derived instead of the derived natural number closest to the above value t. In this case, in the exposure range near the 512th column, the microlens having the area of the overexposed area which becomes the smallest and the underexposed area is not generated with respect to the ideal 2nd exposure can be selected as the actual use. Microlens when.

又,也可導出值t以下之最大的自然數。在此情況下,可以在第512列附近之曝光範圍中,選取相對於理想的2次曝光而言,曝光不足區域的面積變為最小、且不產生曝光過多區域的微鏡片,來當做實際使用時的微鏡片。Also, the largest natural number below the value t can be derived. In this case, in the exposure range near the 512th column, the microlens having the area of the underexposed area which is minimized and the excessive exposure area is not generated with respect to the ideal 2nd exposure can be selected as the actual use. Microlens when.

第11圖係顯示如上述之做法選取實際使用時之微鏡片,只使用經選擇的微鏡片所生成的光點來進行曝光,以說明如何改善第8圖所示之曝光面上之不均一現象的說明圖。Figure 11 shows the microlens in actual use as described above, and only the spot generated by the selected microlens is used for exposure to illustrate how to improve the unevenness on the exposure surface shown in Fig. 8. Illustration of the diagram.

在此例子之中,導出T=253來做為上述之自然數T,並選取第1行到第253行之微鏡片。相對於所選擇的第254行到第256行之微鏡片而言,藉由前述圖素部控制機構來送出平時設定成OFF狀態的角度,彼等之微鏡片實質上係與曝光無關。如第11圖所示,在第512列附近之曝光範圍中,幾乎完全解除曝光過多和曝光不足的現象,因而能夠實現極為接近理想的2次曝光之均一的曝光。In this example, T = 253 is derived as the natural number T described above, and the microlenses from the 1st line to the 253th line are selected. With respect to the selected microlenses of the 254th to 256th rows, the angles normally set to the OFF state are sent by the aforementioned pixel control mechanism, and the microlenses are substantially independent of the exposure. As shown in Fig. 11, in the exposure range in the vicinity of the 512th column, the phenomenon of excessive exposure and underexposure is almost completely canceled, so that uniform exposure which is extremely close to the ideal two exposures can be realized.

另一方面,在第11圖左方範圍(圖中之c(1)附近)中,因為前述角度偏差的緣故,於是在被曝光面上光線列之傾斜角度乃變得比中央附近(圖中c(512)附近)範圍中光線列之傾斜角度還要小。從而,就只有以基於以c(512)為基準所測定的實質傾斜角度θ ’而選擇的微鏡片來進行曝光而論,偶數列之曝光圖案及奇數列之曝光圖案,相對於2次曝光而言為曝光,乃恐怕會分別地產生僅有少許不足的區域。On the other hand, in the left-hand range of FIG. 11 (near c(1) in the figure), because of the aforementioned angular deviation, the inclination angle of the ray column on the exposed surface becomes closer to the center (in the figure) The angle of inclination of the ray column in the range near c(512) is even smaller. Therefore, only the microlenses selected based on the substantial tilt angle θ′ measured on the basis of c (512) are used for exposure, and the even-numbered exposure patterns and the odd-numbered exposure patterns are compared with the two exposures. If the words are exposed, I am afraid that there will be separate areas with only a few shortcomings.

然而,在圖示之奇數列之曝光圖案和偶數列之曝光圖案重合而成的實際曝光圖案中,曝光不足的區域乃相互地補足,因而可以將前述之角度偏差之曝光不均一現象,藉由2次曝光之互補效果而使之變為最小。However, in the actual exposure pattern in which the exposure pattern of the odd-numbered columns and the exposure pattern of the even-numbered columns are overlapped, the underexposed regions complement each other, so that the exposure unevenness of the aforementioned angular deviation can be obtained by The complementary effect of the 2 exposures minimizes it.

又,第11圖右方之範圍(圖中c(1024)附近)中,由於前述之角度偏差,而使得被曝光面上之光線列的傾斜角度係比中央附近(圖中c(512)附近)範圍中光線列之傾斜角度還要大。從而,就只有以基於以c(512)為基準所測定的實質傾斜角度θ ’而選擇的微鏡片來進行曝光而論,偶數列之曝光圖案及奇數列之曝光圖案,相對於2次曝光而言為曝光,乃恐怕會分別地產生僅有少許過多的區域。Further, in the range on the right side of Fig. 11 (near c (1024) in the figure), the angle of inclination of the ray column on the exposed surface is closer to the center than in the vicinity of the center due to the aforementioned angular deviation (in the vicinity of c (512) in the figure) The tilt angle of the ray column in the range is larger. Therefore, only the microlenses selected based on the substantial tilt angle θ′ measured on the basis of c (512) are used for exposure, and the even-numbered exposure patterns and the odd-numbered exposure patterns are compared with the two exposures. Words are exposed, but I am afraid that there will be only a few extra areas.

然而,在圖示之奇數列之曝光圖案和偶數列之曝光圖案重合而成的實際曝光圖案中,曝光過多的區域乃相互地補足,因而可以將前述之角度偏差之曝光不均一現象,藉由2次曝光之互補效果而使之變為最小。However, in the actual exposure pattern in which the exposure pattern of the odd-numbered columns and the exposure pattern of the even-numbered columns are overlapped, the areas where the exposure is excessively complement each other, and thus the unevenness of the exposure of the aforementioned angular deviation can be obtained by The complementary effect of the 2 exposures minimizes it.

在本實施形態(1)中,如以上所述,測定第512列之光線列之實質傾斜角度θ ’,並基於使用該實質傾斜角度θ ’、以前述之式(4)所導出的T來選擇使用的微鏡片58,然而該實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定,也可以藉由分別測定被數個圖素部之列方向(光點列)、和前述曝光頭之掃描方向所形成的被數個實質傾斜角度,將彼等之平均值、中央值、最大值及最小值中之任一者界定為實質傾斜角度θ ’,再藉由前述式4來選擇於實質曝光時實際使用的微鏡片之形態。In the first embodiment (1), as described above, the substantial inclination angle θ ' of the ray row of the 512th column is measured, and based on the T derived from the above formula (4) using the substantial inclination angle θ ' The microlens 58 to be used is selected. However, the definition of the substantial tilt angle θ ' can also be determined by respectively determining the direction of the column direction of the plurality of pixel portions (the spot array) and the number of scans of the exposure head. a substantial tilt angle, which defines one of the average, the central value, the maximum value, and the minimum value as the substantial tilt angle θ ', and then selects the microlens actually used during the substantial exposure by the above formula 4. The form.

若以前述之平均值或前述中央值做為實質傾斜角度θ ’的話,則可以實現相對於想理的N次曝光而言曝光過多區域和曝光不足區域間之平衡良好的曝光。例如,可以實現曝光過多的區域、和曝光不足的區域之面積總和控制成最小,且曝光過多區域的圖素單位(光點數)、和曝光不足區域之圖素單位(光點數)相等之曝光。When the average value or the central value is used as the substantial inclination angle θ ', it is possible to achieve a good balance between the excessive exposure region and the underexposed region with respect to the N exposures which are supposed to be reasonable. For example, it is possible to control the sum of the area of the overexposed area and the area of the underexposed area to be minimized, and the pixel unit (the number of spots) of the overexposed area and the pixel unit (the number of spots) of the underexposed area are equal. exposure.

又,若以前述之最大值做為實質傾斜角度θ ’的話,則可以實現排除相對於N次曝光而言為曝光過多區域爾為較重要的曝光,例如,能夠將曝光不足區域的面積抑制到最小,且不產生曝光過多的區域之曝光。Moreover, if the maximum value is used as the substantial inclination angle θ ', it is possible to eliminate the exposure which is important for the exposure area with respect to the N exposures. For example, the area of the underexposed area can be suppressed to The smallest, and does not produce exposure to areas that are overexposed.

另外,若以前述之最小值做為實質傾斜角度θ ’的話,則可以實現排除相對於N次曝光而言為曝光不足區域爾為較重要的曝光,例如,能夠將曝光過多區域的面積抑制到最小,且不產生曝光不足的區域之曝光。In addition, if the minimum value is used as the substantial inclination angle θ ', it is possible to eliminate the exposure which is important for the underexposed area with respect to the N exposures. For example, the area of the excessive exposure area can be suppressed to The smallest, and does not produce exposure to underexposed areas.

另一方面,前述實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定,不限定為基於同一圖素部之列(光點列)中的至少2個光點位置之方法。例如,,也可以將同一圖素部列c(n)中之1個或複數個之光點位置、和該c(n)附近的列中之1個或複數個光點位置所求得角度,界定為實質傾斜角度θ ’。On the other hand, the definition of the substantial inclination angle θ ' is not limited to a method based on at least two spot positions in the same pixel portion (spot array). For example, an angle may be obtained from one or a plurality of light spot positions in the same pixel portion c(n) and one or a plurality of light spot positions in the vicinity of the c(n) column. , defined as the substantial inclination angle θ '.

具體而言,可以藉由檢出c(n)中之1個光點位置、與沿著曝光頭之掃描方向的直線上及附近的光點列所含的1個或複數個光點位置,而從此等之位置資訊來求得實質傾斜角度θ ’。更且,也可以基於c(n)列附近的光點列中之立少2個光點(例如,橫跨c(n)配置之2個光點)的位置所求得的角度,將之界定為實質傾斜角度θ ’。Specifically, it is possible to detect one or a plurality of spot positions included in one of the spot positions of c(n) and the line of dots along the line along the scanning direction of the exposure head and in the vicinity. From this position information, the substantial inclination angle θ ' is obtained. Furthermore, it is also possible to obtain an angle based on the position of two light spots (for example, two light spots arranged across c(n)) among the light spot columns in the vicinity of the c(n) column. Defined as the substantial tilt angle θ '.

如以上所述,若依照使用圖案形成裝置10之本實施形態(1)之使用圖素部之指定方法的話,則可以減輕各曝光頭之安裝角度誤差及圖案不均一現象之影響而產生的解像度變異及濃度之不均一,並能夠實現理想的N次曝光。As described above, according to the method of specifying the pixel portion in the first embodiment (1) using the pattern forming apparatus 10, the resolution of the exposure angle error and the pattern unevenness of each exposure head can be reduced. Variability and concentration are not uniform and can achieve the desired N exposures.

(2)複數曝光頭間之使用圖素部之指定方法<1>(2) Designation method for the use of the pixel part between the multiple exposure heads <1>

在本實施形態(2)中,說明一種在藉由圖案形成裝置10對於感光材料12進行2次曝光的情況下,藉以減輕由複數個曝光頭30所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍之頭間連繫區域中,關於2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 )之X軸方向相對位置因與理想狀態之間隙所引起的解像度變異和濃度不均一現象,並指定用以實現理想的2次曝光之使用圖素部的方法。In the second embodiment, a case where the exposure of the photosensitive material 12 by the pattern forming apparatus 10 is performed twice, thereby reducing the repeated exposure range of the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads 30 is explained. In the connection area between the heads, the resolution difference and density unevenness caused by the relative positions of the two exposure heads (for example, one of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 ) due to the gap with the ideal state, and Specify the method of using the pixel portion to achieve the desired 2 exposures.

各曝光頭30,即各DMD36之設定傾斜角度θ,只要是沒有曝光頭30的安裝角度誤差等之理想狀態的話,則使用可供使用的1024列×256行之圖素部微鏡片58並採用恰好成為2次曝光的角度θidealEach of the exposure heads 30, that is, the set tilt angle θ of each of the DMDs 36, is used as long as it is an ideal state in which the mounting angle error of the exposure head 30 is not used, and the 1024-row by 256-row pixel portion microlens 58 is used and used. It happens to be the angle θ ideal of 2 exposures.

此種角度θideal 可按照上述實施形態(1)之做法,以前述式1~3而求得。在本實施形態(2)中,圖案形成裝置10之初期調整是經調整以使得各曝光頭30、即各DMD36的安裝角度成為角度θidealSuch an angle θ ideal can be obtained by the above-described formulas 1 to 3 in accordance with the above embodiment (1). In the second embodiment, the initial adjustment of the pattern forming apparatus 10 is adjusted so that the attachment angle of each of the exposure heads 30, that is, the respective DMDs 36 is an angle θ ideal .

第12圖係為顯示在經如以上所述進行初期調整的圖案形成裝置10中,由於2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 )之關於X軸方向的相對位置偏離理想狀態的影響,而使得被曝光面上之圖案產生偏差的例子之說明圖。各曝光頭之關於X方向的相對位置之偏離(間隙),係由於曝光頭間之相對位置難以進行微調整所衍生而得到的。Fig. 12 is a view showing the relative positional deviation with respect to the X-axis direction of the two exposure heads (for example, one of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 ) in the pattern forming apparatus 10 which is initially adjusted as described above. An explanatory diagram of an example in which the influence of the ideal state causes a deviation in the pattern on the exposed surface. The deviation (gap) of the relative position of each exposure head with respect to the X direction is derived from the fact that the relative position between the exposure heads is difficult to perform fine adjustment.

第12圖之上半部分係顯示:在使平台14靜止的狀態下,由感光材料12之被曝光面上所投影的具有曝光頭3012 和3021 之DMD36的可供使用的微鏡片58而來的光點群之圖案。第12圖之下半部分則係顯示:在出現如上半部分所示這樣的光點群之圖案的狀態下,使平台14移動而連續進行曝光時,關於曝光區域3212 和3221 在被曝光面上所形成的曝光圖案之狀態。The upper half of Fig. 12 shows the available microlenses 58 of the DMD 36 having the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 projected from the exposed surface of the photosensitive material 12 while the stage 14 is stationary. The pattern of the light spot group. The lower half of Fig. 12 shows that in the state where the pattern of the spot group as shown in the above half appears, when the stage 14 is moved to continuously perform exposure, the exposure areas 32 12 and 32 21 are exposed. The state of the exposure pattern formed on the surface.

另外,在第12圖之中,雖然為了方便進行說明起見而將可供使用的微鏡片58之間隔1列之曝光圖案,分別地以畫素列群A之曝光圖案和畫素列群B之曝光圖案表示,然而,在實際的被曝光面上的曝光圖案,係由此等2個曝光圖案重合而成者。Further, in Fig. 12, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the exposure patterns of the microlenses 58 which are available for use in one row are respectively exposed by the exposure pattern of the pixel group A and the pixel group B. The exposure pattern indicates that, however, the exposure pattern on the actual exposed surface is such that the two exposure patterns are overlapped.

在第12圖之例子中,上述之關於X軸方向的曝光頭3012 和3021 間之相對位置偏離理想狀態的結果,畫素列群A之曝光圖案和畫素列群B之曝光圖案雙方,在曝光區域3212 和3221 之前述的頭間連繫區域中,與理想的2次曝光之狀態相較之下,乃產生曝光量過多的部分。In the example of Fig. 12, the above-mentioned relative position between the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 in the X-axis direction deviates from the ideal state, and both the exposure pattern of the pixel group A and the exposure pattern of the pixel group B are both. In the aforementioned inter-head contact region of the exposure regions 32 12 and 32 21 , a portion having an excessive exposure amount is generated as compared with the state of the ideal two exposures.

如以上所述,為了藉由複數個前述之曝光頭來減輕在被曝光面上所形成的前述之頭間連繫區域,在本實施形態(2)中,乃使用狹縫28及光檢出器之組合做為前述光點位置檢出機構,對於來自曝光頭3012 和3021 的光點群中構成在被曝光面上所形成的前述頭間連繫區域的光點的數量,檢測出其位置(座標)。基於該位置(座標),使用做為前述圖素部選擇機構之連接於前述光檢出器的前述演算裝置,進行選擇於實際曝光所使用之微鏡片的處理。As described above, in order to reduce the aforementioned inter-head contact region formed on the surface to be exposed by a plurality of the above-described exposure heads, in the second embodiment, slits 28 and light detection are used. The combination of the above-described light spot position detecting means detects the number of light spots constituting the aforementioned inter-head contact region formed on the exposed surface among the light spot groups from the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 Its position (coordinate). Based on the position (coordinate), the processing for selecting the microlens used for the actual exposure is performed using the above-described arithmetic device connected to the photodetector as the pixel portion selecting means.

-位置(座標)之檢出-- Detection of position (coordinate) -

第13圖係顯示和第12圖同樣的曝光區域3212 和3221 、與對應的狹縫28間之位置關係的上視圖。狹縫28的大小係大到足以充分地覆蓋曝光頭3012 和3021 之曝光完成區域34的寬度之大小;即可以充分覆蓋藉由曝光頭3012 和3021 而於被曝光面上所形成的前述頭間連繫區域之大小。Fig. 13 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the exposure regions 32 12 and 32 21 and the corresponding slits 28 in the same manner as in Fig. 12 . The size of the slit line 28 is large enough to sufficiently cover Exposure head 30 30 21 12 and the size of the complete width of region 34; i.e., can sufficiently cover the exposure head 30 by 12 and 30 21 and on the exposed surface of the formed The size of the aforementioned inter-header connection area.

第14圖係說明在檢出曝光區域3221 之光點P(256,1024)的位置時之檢出手法的一例之上視圖。Fig. 14 is a top view showing an example of a detection method when the position of the light spot P (256, 1024) of the exposure region 32 21 is detected.

首先,在使第256行第1024列之微鏡片成為點燈的狀態下,慢慢地移動平台14,使狹縫28沿著Y軸方向相對移動,光點P(256,1024)在上游側的狹縫28a和下游側之狹縫28b間行走的任意位置上設置狹縫28。此時,將狹縫28a和狹縫28b間的交點座標記為(X0,Y0)。此座標(X0,Y0)之值係到平台14所賦予的驅動信號顯示上述位置為止之平台14的移動距離、以及已知的狹縫28的X方向位置來決定,並記錄。First, in a state where the microlens of the 256th row and the 1024th column are turned on, the stage 14 is gradually moved to relatively move the slit 28 along the Y-axis direction, and the spot P (256, 1024) is on the upstream side. A slit 28 is provided at any position between the slit 28a and the slit 28b on the downstream side. At this time, the intersection between the slit 28a and the slit 28b is marked as (X0, Y0). The value of this coordinate (X0, Y0) is determined by the movement distance of the stage 14 until the drive signal given by the stage 14 shows the above position, and the position of the known slit 28 in the X direction, and is recorded.

其次,使平台14往相反方向移動,並使狹縫28沿著Y軸於第14圖中的右方相對移動。接著,如第14圖之以二點虛線所示這樣地,當光點P(256,1024)的光通過左側之狹縫28b而被光檢出器所檢出時,則使平台14停止。將此時之狹縫28a和狹縫28b之交點座標(X0,Y1)記錄為光點P(256,1024)的位置。Next, the platform 14 is moved in the opposite direction, and the slit 28 is relatively moved along the Y-axis to the right in FIG. Next, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 14, when the light of the light spot P (256, 1024) is detected by the photodetector through the slit 28b on the left side, the stage 14 is stopped. The intersection coordinates (X0, Y1) of the slit 28a and the slit 28b at this time are recorded as the position of the light spot P (256, 1024).

接著,使平台14移動,並使狹縫28沿著Y軸於第14圖中的左方相對移動。接著,如第14圖之以二點虛線所示這樣地,當光點P(256,1024)的光通過右側之狹縫28a而被光檢出器所檢出時,則使平台14停止。將此時之狹縫28a和狹縫28b之交點座標(X0,Y2)記錄為光點P(256,1024)的位置。Next, the stage 14 is moved, and the slit 28 is relatively moved to the left in Fig. 14 along the Y-axis. Next, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 14, when the light of the light spot P (256, 1024) is detected by the photodetector through the slit 28a on the right side, the stage 14 is stopped. The intersection coordinates (X0, Y2) of the slit 28a and the slit 28b at this time are recorded as the position of the light spot P (256, 1024).

由以上之測定結果,藉由X=X0+(Y1-Y2)/2、Y=(Y1+Y2)/2之計算來決定,表示光點P(256,1024)之在被曝光面上的位置之座標(X,Y)。From the above measurement results, by the calculation of X=X0+(Y1-Y2)/2, Y=(Y1+Y2)/2, the coordinates indicating the position of the light spot P (256, 1024) on the exposed surface are determined. (X, Y).

-不使用圖素部之界定-- Do not use the definition of the pixel part -

在第12圖的例子中,首先,藉由狹縫28及光檢出器之組合做為前述光點位置檢出機構,檢出曝光區域3212 之光點P(256,1)的位置。接著,依照P(256,1024)、P(256,1023)...的順序輪番地檢出曝光區域3221 之第256行的光點r(256)上之各光點位置,當檢出顯示比曝光區域3212 之光點P(256,1)大的X座標之曝光區域3221 的光點P(256,n)時,即為完成檢出動作。然後,將對應於構成曝光區域3221 的光點之光點列c(n+1)到c(1024)的光點之微鏡片,界定為於本曝光時不使用的微鏡片(不使用圖素部)。In the example of Fig. 12, first, the position of the spot P (256, 1) of the exposure region 32 12 is detected by the combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector as the spot position detecting means. Then, according to P (256, 1024), P (256, 1023). . . The order of the light spots on the light spot r (256) of the 256th line of the exposure area 32 21 is detected in turn, and the X coordinate larger than the light spot P (256, 1) of the exposure area 32 12 is detected. light spot 32 of the exposure area 21 P (256, n), the detection operation that is completed. Then, the microlens corresponding to the spot of the light spot column c(n+1) to c(1024) constituting the spot of the exposed region 32 21 is defined as a microlens that is not used at the time of exposure (the pixel portion is not used) ).

例如,在第12圖中,曝光區域3221 的光點P(256,1020)係顯示出比曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,1)還大的X座標,當以該曝光區域3221 的光點P(256,1020)被檢測出時做為檢出動作完成時,將對應於構成相當於在第15圖中以斜線覆蓋的部分70之曝光區域3221 的第1021行到第1024行之光點的微鏡片,界定為於本曝光中不使用的微鏡片。For example, in FIG. 12, the spot P (256, 1020) of the exposure region 32 21 shows an X coordinate larger than the spot P (256, 1) of the exposure region 32 12 when the exposure region 32 is used. When the spot P (256, 1020) of 21 is detected as the completion of the detection operation, it corresponds to the 1021st line to the exposure area 32 21 constituting the portion 70 covered with the oblique line in FIG. A microlens of 1024 lines of light is defined as a microlens that is not used in this exposure.

其次,相對於N次曝光之次數N,檢出曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,N)之位置。在本實施形態(2)中,由於N=2,所以檢出光點P(256,2)。Next, the position of the light spot P (256, N) of the exposure region 32 12 is detected with respect to the number N of N exposures. In the second embodiment (2), since N = 2, the spot P (256, 2) is detected.

接著,在曝光區域3221 的光點列之中,除了界定對應於上述之本曝光時不使用的微鏡片的光點列以外,由P(1,1020)起依照P(1,1020)、P(2,1020)...之順序輪番地檢出構成最右側的第1020列之光點位置,當檢出顯示比曝光區域3212 之光點P(256,2)大的X座標之光點P(m,1020)時,即為完成檢出動作。Next, among the light spot columns of the exposure region 32 21 , in addition to the light spot row defining the microlenses that are not used in the above-described exposure, P (1, 1020) is used in accordance with P (1, 1020), P(2,1020). . . The order of the light spots of the 10th 20th column which constitutes the far right side is detected in turn, and when the spot P (m, 1020) of the X coordinate which is larger than the light spot P (256, 2) of the exposure area 32 12 is detected, , that is, to complete the checkout action.

然後,在連接到前述之光檢出器的演算裝置之中,比較曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,2)之X座標、與曝光區域3221 的光點P(m,1020)及P(m-1,1020)的X座標,當曝光區域3221 的光點P(m,1020)的X座標係接近曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,2)的情況下,則將對應於曝光區域3221 的光點P(1,1020)到P(m-1,1020)的微鏡片界定為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Then, in the calculation device is connected to the photodetector to compare the exposure spot region 3212 of the P (256,2) of the X coordinate, and the light spot 32 of the exposure area 21 P (m, 1020), and The X coordinate of P(m-1, 1020), when the X coordinate of the spot P(m, 1020) of the exposure region 32 21 approaches the spot P (256, 2) of the exposure region 32 12 , The microlenses corresponding to the spot P (1, 1020) to P (m-1, 1020) of the exposed region 32 21 are defined as microlenses that are not used at the time of exposure.

又,當在曝光區域3221 的光點P(m-1,1020)的X座標係接近曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,2)的情況下,則將曝光區域3221 的光點P(1,1020)到P(m-2,1020)界定為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Further, when the X coordinate system of the light spot P (m-1, 1020) in the exposure region 32 21 approaches the light spot P (256, 2) of the exposure region 32 12 , the light spot of the exposure region 32 21 is used. P(1,1020) to P(m-2,1020) are defined as microlenses that are not used during exposure.

更且,對於曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,N-1)、即光點P(256,1)的位置、和構成曝光區域3221 的下一列之第1019列之各光點的位置,也是同樣地進行檢出處理及界定不使用的微鏡片。Furthermore, for the spot P (256, N-1) of the exposed region 32 12 , that is, the position of the spot P (256, 1), and the respective spots of the 1019th column constituting the next column of the exposed region 32 21 The position is also similarly detected and the microlenses that are not used are defined.

結果,例如,對應於在第15圖中以網點覆蓋之範圍72的光點之微鏡片,乃被追加為於實際曝光時不使用的微鏡片。此等之微鏡片,平時係傳送將該微鏡片之角度設定在OFF狀態的角度之信號,彼等之微鏡片實質上不使用於曝光。As a result, for example, the microlens corresponding to the spot of the range 72 covered by the halftone dots in Fig. 15 is added as a microlens which is not used at the time of actual exposure. Such microlenses are typically signals that transmit the angle at which the angle of the microlenses is set to an OFF state, and that the microlenses are not substantially used for exposure.

如此,藉由界定實際曝光時不使用的微鏡片,並選擇該不使用的微鏡片以外之物來做為在實際曝光時所使用的微鏡片,則在曝光區域3212 和3221 之前述頭間連繫區域中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光過多的區域、及曝光不足的區域之面積總和可以變成最小,以及可以實現如第15圖之下半部分所示的極為接近於理想的2次曝光之均一的曝光。Thus, by defining microlenses that are not used during actual exposure, and selecting objects other than the unused microlenses as the microlenses used in actual exposure, the aforementioned heads in the exposed areas 32 12 and 32 21 In the interconnected region, the area of the area that is excessively exposed and the area that is underexposed may be minimized with respect to the ideal two exposures, and that the extremely close as shown in the lower half of Fig. 15 can be achieved. A uniform exposure of the ideal 2 exposures.

另外,就上述的例子而言,於界定構成在第15圖中以網點覆蓋之範圍72的光點時,也可以不進行曝光區域3212 的光點P(256,2)之X座標、與曝光區域3221 的光點P(m,1020)及P(m-1,1020)的X座標間之比較,而直接地將對應於曝光區域3221 的光點P(1,1020)到P(m-2,1020)的微鏡片界定為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。在此種情況下,可以選擇於前述頭間連繫區域中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光過多之區域面積最小、且不產生曝光不足的區域之微鏡片,而將之界定為實際上不使用的微鏡片。Further, in the above-described example, when the light spot constituting the range 72 covered by the halftone dot in Fig. 15 is defined, the X coordinate of the light spot P (256, 2) of the exposure region 32 12 may not be performed. Comparing the light spots P (m, 1020) of the exposure region 32 21 with the X coordinates of P (m-1, 1020), and directly corresponding to the light spot P (1, 1020) of the exposure region 32 21 to P The microlenses of (m-2, 1020) are defined as microlenses that are not used during exposure. In this case, it is possible to select, in the aforementioned inter-head contact region, a microlens having a region with an excessively exposed area which is the smallest in exposure and which does not cause an underexposed region, and is defined as Microlenses that are not actually used.

又,也可以將對應於曝光區域3221 的光點P(1,1020)到P(m-1,1020)的微鏡片界定為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。在此種情況下,可以選擇於前述頭間連繫區域中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光不足之區域面積最小、且不產生曝光過多的區域之微鏡片,而將之界定為實際上不使用的微鏡片。Further, the microlens corresponding to the spot P (1, 1020) to P (m-1, 1020) of the exposed region 32 21 may be defined as a microlens which is not used at the time of exposure. In this case, it is possible to select, in the aforementioned inter-head contact region, a microlens which is the smallest area of the underexposed area and does not generate an excessively exposed area with respect to the ideal two exposures, and defines it as Microlenses that are not actually used.

更且,也可以選擇於前述頭間連繫區域中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光過多區域的圖素單位數(光點數)、與曝光不足區域的圖素單位數(光點數)相等者,將之界定為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Further, in the above-described inter-head contact region, the number of pixel units (the number of light spots) and the number of pixel units of the underexposed region may be selected for the ideal secondary exposure (light) If the number of points is equal, it is defined as a microlens that is not used when exposed.

如以上所述,若依照使用圖案形成裝置10之本實施形態(2)之使用圖素部之指定方法的話,則可以減輕各曝光頭之安裝角度誤差及圖案不均一現象之影響而產生的解像度變異及濃度之不均一,並能夠實現理想的N次曝光。As described above, according to the method of specifying the pixel portion in the second embodiment (2) using the pattern forming apparatus 10, the resolution of the exposure angle error and the pattern unevenness of each exposure head can be reduced. Variability and concentration are not uniform and can achieve the desired N exposures.

(3)複數曝光頭間之使用圖素部之指定方法<2>(3) The method of specifying the use of the pixel part between the multiple exposure heads <2>

在本實施形態(3)中,說明一種在藉由圖案形成裝置10對於感光材料12進行2次曝光的情況下,藉以減輕由複數個曝光頭30所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍之頭間連繫區域中,關於2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 )之X軸方向相對位置因與理想狀態間之間隙(偏離)、以及各曝光頭之安裝誤差、2個曝光頭間之相對安裝角度誤差與相對位置間之間隙(偏離)所引起的解像度變異和濃度不均一現象,並指定用以實現理想的2次曝光之使用圖素部的方法。In the third embodiment, in the case where the photosensitive material 12 is exposed twice by the pattern forming apparatus 10, the repeated exposure range of the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads 30 is reduced. In the connection area between the heads, the relative position of the X exposure directions of the two exposure heads (for example, one of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 ) is due to the gap (deviation) from the ideal state, and the mounting error of each exposure head. The resolution variation and density non-uniformity caused by the relative mounting angle error between the two exposure heads and the gap (deviation) between the relative positions, and the method of using the pixel portion for realizing the ideal two exposures is specified.

各曝光頭30,即各DMD36之設定傾斜角度,只要是沒有曝光頭30的安裝角度誤差等之理想狀態的話,則可以使用可供使用的1024列×256行之圖素部(微鏡片58),並採用比恰好2次曝光的角度θideal 稍微大一些的角度。Each of the exposure heads 30, that is, the set tilt angle of each of the DMDs 36, can be used as long as it is in an ideal state without the mounting angle error of the exposure head 30, etc., and the available pixel portions of 1024 columns × 256 rows (microlenses 58) can be used. And adopt an angle slightly larger than the angle θ ideal of exactly 2 exposures.

此種角度θideal 可使用前述式1~3,按照上述實施形態(1)之做法而求得。在本實施形態中,如以上所述,s=256、N=2,所以角度θideal 為約0.45度。從而,設定傾斜角度θ,例如,可以採用0.50度左右的角度。圖案形成裝置10在可以調整的範圍內,各曝光頭30、即DMD36之安裝角度之初期調整,係以接近此種設定傾斜角度θ之角度的方式來進行調整的。Such an angle θ ideal can be obtained by the above-described embodiment (1) using the above formulas 1-3. In the present embodiment, as described above, s = 256 and N = 2, so the angle θ ideal is about 0.45 degrees. Therefore, the inclination angle θ is set, and for example, an angle of about 0.50 degrees can be employed. In the range in which the pattern forming apparatus 10 can be adjusted, the initial adjustment of the attachment angle of each of the exposure heads 30, that is, the DMD 36, is adjusted so as to approach the angle of the set inclination angle θ.

第16圖係為顯示在各曝光頭30、即DMD36之按裝角度已如以上所述這樣地進行初期調整過的圖案形成裝置10中,由於2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 )之安裝誤差、以及各曝光頭3012 和3021 之相對位置偏離之影響,而於曝光面上之圖案產生不均一現象之例子的說明圖。Fig. 16 is a view showing the pattern forming apparatus 10 which has been initially adjusted as described above in each of the exposure heads 30, i.e., the DMD 36, since two exposure heads (for example, one of them is the exposure head 30) An explanation of an example in which the mounting error of 12 and 30 21 ) and the relative positional deviation of each of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 are different, and the pattern on the exposure surface produces a non-uniform phenomenon.

在第16圖中,係和第12圖之例子同樣地,由於關於X軸方向的曝光頭3012 和3021 之相對位置間之間隙的結果,因而間隔一列的光點群(畫素列群A及B)之曝光圖案雙方,在曝光區域3212 和3221 的被曝光面上之前述曝光頭的掃描方向成垂直的座標軸上重複曝光範圍中,產生與理想的2次曝光的狀態相較之下為曝光過多的範圍74,並引起濃度不均一現象。In Fig. 16, similarly to the example of Fig. 12, since a result of a gap between the relative positions of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 in the X-axis direction, a group of light spots (pixel groups) are separated by one column. Both of the exposure patterns of A and B) are repeated in the repeated exposure range on the coordinate axis of the exposure head of the exposure areas 32 12 and 32 21 on the exposed surface of the exposure head, resulting in a state of ideal two exposures. Below is a range 74 of excessive exposure, and causes a phenomenon of density non-uniformity.

更且,在第16圖的例子中,由於各曝光頭之設定傾斜角度θ係比滿足前述式(1)的角度θideal 稍微大一些的結果、以及因為難以進行各曝光頭之安裝角度的微調整之緣故而使實際的安裝角度偏離上述之設定傾斜角度θ的結果,所以即使是在與被曝光面上之前述曝光頭的掃描方向成垂直的座標上重複曝光之範圍以外的範圍,間隔一列的光點群(畫素列群A及B)之曝光圖案雙方,也會在由複數個圖素部列所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的圖素部列間連繫區域中,產生與理想的2次曝光的狀態相較之下為曝光過多的範圍76,因而更進一步地引起濃度不均一現象。Furthermore, in the example of Fig. 16, the set inclination angle θ of each exposure head is slightly larger than the angle θ ideal satisfying the above formula (1), and since it is difficult to perform the mounting angle of each exposure head. Since the actual mounting angle is deviated from the above-described set tilt angle θ as a result of the adjustment, even in a range other than the range in which the exposure is repeated on the coordinate perpendicular to the scanning direction of the exposure head on the exposure surface, the interval is one column. The exposure patterns of the spot group (the pixel groups A and B) are also in the connection region between the pixel portions of the repeated exposure range of the exposed surface formed by the plurality of pixel portions. A state 76 in which the exposure is excessive is produced in comparison with the state of the ideal two exposures, thereby further causing the density unevenness.

在本實施形態(3)中,首先,為了減輕各曝光頭3012 和3021 之安裝角度誤差、與相對安裝角度之間隙的影響而產生濃度不均一之現象,於是進行使用畫素選擇處理。In the third embodiment, first, in order to reduce the influence of the mounting angle error of each of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 and the influence of the gap with respect to the mounting angle, density unevenness occurs, and the pixel selection processing is performed.

具體而言,使用狹縫28及光檢出器之組合做為前述光點位置檢出機構,對於曝光頭3012 和3021 分別界定實質傾斜角度θ ’,並基於該實質傾斜角度θ ’,使用做為前述圖素部選擇機構之連接於前述光檢出器的前述演算裝置,進行選擇於實際曝光所使用之微鏡片的處理。Specifically, a combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector is used as the aforementioned spot position detecting mechanism, and the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 respectively define a substantial inclination angle θ ', and based on the substantial inclination angle θ ', The processing for selecting the microlens used for the actual exposure is performed using the above-described arithmetic device connected to the photodetector as the pixel portion selecting means.

-實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定-- Definition of the substantial tilt angle θ '

實質傾斜角度θ ’之界定,係藉由於上述之實施形(2)中所使用的狹縫28和光檢出器之組合,而分別地檢出曝光頭3012 之曝光區域3212 內的P(1,1)和P(256,1)的位置、與曝光頭3021 之曝光區域3221 內的P(1,1024)和P(256,1024)的位置,測定彼等連結之直線的傾斜角度和曝光頭之掃描方向間形成的角度來進行的。The substantial inclination angle θ ' is defined by the combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector used in the above-described embodiment (2), and the P in the exposure region 32 12 of the exposure head 30 12 is separately detected ( The positions of 1,1) and P(256,1), and the positions of P(1,1024) and P(256,1024) in the exposure area 32 21 of the exposure head 30 21 , the inclination of the line connecting them is measured. The angle is formed by the angle formed between the angle and the scanning direction of the exposure head.

-不使用圖素部之界定-- Do not use the definition of the pixel part -

使用如此做法所界定的實質傾斜角度θ ’,使用連接於前述光檢出器的前述演算裝置,和上述實施形態(1)中之演算裝置同樣地,分別對於曝光頭3012 和3021 導出最接近滿足下述關係式4:t tan θ ’=N (式4)的值t之自然數T,並進行將DMD36上之第(T+1)行到第256行之微鏡片界定為本曝光中不使用的微鏡片。Using the above-described arithmetic device connected to the above-described photodetector, the above-described arithmetic device connected to the above-described photodetector is used to derive the most for the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 in the same manner as the arithmetic device in the above-described embodiment (1). The natural number T satisfying the value t of the following relation 4: t tan θ '=N (formula 4) is approximated, and the microlens of the (T+1)th row to the 256th row on the DMD 36 is defined as being not in the exposure. Microlenses used.

例如,假定就曝光頭3012 而言導出T=254,對於曝光頭3021 而言導出T=255時,則將對應於構成在第17圖中的以斜線覆蓋之部分78和80的光點的微鏡片,界定為不使用於本曝光之微鏡片。藉此,即可以使得在曝光區域3212 和3221 之中的頭間連繫區域以外的各範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光過多的區域、和曝光不足的區域之面積總和,變為最小。For example, assume that T = 254 is derived for the exposure head 30 12 and T = 255 for the exposure head 30 21 , then the spot corresponding to the portions 78 and 80 that are covered by the oblique lines in Fig. 17 will be corresponding. The microlens is defined as a microlens that is not used in the exposure. Thereby, it is possible to make the area of the overexposed area and the area of the underexposed area with respect to the ideal two exposures in each range other than the inter-head contact area among the exposed areas 32 12 and 32 21 . The sum becomes the smallest.

本文中,也可以導出值t以上之最小的自然數,來替代所導出之最接近上述之值t的自然數。在此種情況下,曝光區域3212 和3221 之由複數個曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域以外的各範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光量過多的面積變為最小,且不產生曝光量不足之面積。In this context, the smallest natural number above the value t can also be derived instead of the derived natural number closest to the above value t. In this case, in each of the ranges other than the inter-head contact region of the repeated exposure range of the exposed areas formed by the plurality of exposure heads, the exposure regions 32 12 and 32 21 are opposed to the ideal two exposures. The area where the amount of exposure is excessive is minimized, and the area where the amount of exposure is insufficient is not generated.

或者,也可導出值t以下之最大的自然數。在此種情況下,即可以使得在曝光區域3212 和3221 之由複數個曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍的頭間連繫區域以外的各範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光不足的區域之面積變為最小,且不產生曝光過多的區域。Alternatively, the largest natural number below the value t can also be derived. In this case, it is possible to make each range outside the inter-head contact region of the repeated exposure range of the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads of the exposure regions 32 12 and 32 21 relative to the ideal In the case of the second exposure, the area of the underexposed area becomes the smallest, and the area where the exposure is excessive is not generated.

也可以依照使得在由複數各曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍之頭間連繫區域以外的各範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言為曝光過多的區域之圖素單位(光點數)、和曝光不足的區域之圖素單位(光點數)相等的方式,來界定於本曝光中不使用的微鏡片。It is also possible to use a pixel which is an excessively exposed region with respect to an ideal secondary exposure in each range other than the inter-head contact region of the repeated exposure range on the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads. The unit (the number of spots) and the pixel unit (the number of spots) of the underexposed area are equal to each other to define the microlens that is not used in the exposure.

然後,關於與第17圖中的以斜線覆蓋之部分78和80的光點以外的光點相對應之微鏡片,進行和使用第12至15圖所說明的本實施形態(3)同樣的處理,界定構成在第17圖中的以斜線覆蓋之範圍82及以網點覆蓋的範圍84之光點相對應的微鏡片,追加為本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Then, the microlens corresponding to the light spot other than the spot of the portions 78 and 80 covered with oblique lines in Fig. 17 is processed in the same manner as in the third embodiment (3) described in Figs. The microlens corresponding to the spot 82 covered by the oblique line and the spot 84 covered by the halftone dot in Fig. 17 are defined, and the microlens which is not used at the time of exposure is added.

相對於此等曝光時不使用之經界定的微鏡片,藉由前述圖素部控制機構,送出平時設定為OFF狀態之角度的信號,彼等之微鏡片實質上與曝光無關。With respect to the defined microlenses that are not used during the exposure, the pixel control mechanism sends signals that are normally set to an OFF state, and the microlenses are substantially independent of exposure.

如以上所述,若依照使用使用圖案形成裝置10之本實施形態(3)之使用圖素部之指定方法的話,則可以減輕複數個曝光之關於X軸方向的相對位置之偏離、以及各曝光頭之安裝角度誤差、及曝光頭間之相對安裝角度而產生的解像度變異及濃度之不均一現象,並能夠實現理想的N次曝光。As described above, according to the method of specifying the pixel portion in the third embodiment (3) using the pattern forming apparatus 10, the deviation of the relative positions of the plurality of exposures in the X-axis direction and the exposure can be reduced. The difference in resolution and concentration of the head due to the mounting angle error of the head and the relative mounting angle between the exposure heads, and the ideal N exposure can be achieved.

以上,雖然藉由圖案形成裝置10詳細地說明使用圖素部指定方法,然而上述實施形態(1)~(3)只不過是例子之一而已,在不跳脫本發明之範圍是可以進行種種變更的。As described above, the pattern forming apparatus 10 has been described in detail using the pixel portion specifying method. However, the above-described embodiments (1) to (3) are merely examples, and various types can be performed without departing from the scope of the present invention. Changed.

又,在上述實施形態(1)~(3)中,雖然使用狹縫28和單一型的光檢出器之組合來做為用以檢出被曝光面上之光點位置之機構,然而不限於此,也可以使用任何形成之物,例如,可以使用2次元檢出器等。Further, in the above embodiments (1) to (3), a combination of the slit 28 and the single type photodetector is used as a mechanism for detecting the position of the spot on the exposed surface, but In addition to this, any formed object may be used, and for example, a 2-dimensional detector or the like may be used.

更且,在上述實施形態(1)~(3)中,雖然是從狹縫28和光檢出器之組合的被曝光面上光點位置之檢出結果而求得實質傾斜角度θ ’,並基於該實質傾斜角度θ ’來選擇使用的微鏡片,然而也可以是不透過導出實質傾斜角度θ ’來選擇可供使用的微鏡片之形態。更且,例如,藉由使用全部的可供使用的微鏡片來進行參照曝光,從參照曝光結果以目視確認解像度及濃度之不均一現象,使操作者以手動來指定使用的微鏡片之形態,也是包括在本發明之範圍內。Further, in the above-described embodiments (1) to (3), the substantial inclination angle θ ' is obtained from the detection result of the position of the spot on the exposure surface of the combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector, and The microlens to be used is selected based on the substantial inclination angle θ '. However, the form of the microlens that can be used may be selected without deriving the substantial inclination angle θ '. Furthermore, for example, by using all available microlenses for reference exposure, visually confirming the resolution and density non-uniformity from the reference exposure result, the operator can manually specify the shape of the microlens to be used. It is also included in the scope of the invention.

另外,於被曝光面上所產生的圖案偏差,除了上述的例子中所說明的角度偏差以外,尚有其他各種的形態存在。Further, in addition to the angular deviation described in the above examples, the pattern deviation generated on the exposed surface may be in various other forms.

舉一個例子來說,例如,第18A圖所示之來自DMD36上之各微鏡片58的光線,係以不同的倍率到達曝光面上之曝光區域32的倍率不均之形態。As an example, for example, the light rays from the respective microlenses 58 on the DMD 36 shown in Fig. 18A are in a form in which the magnifications of the exposure regions 32 on the exposure surface are uneven at different magnifications.

又,另一個例子,如第18B圖所示之來自DMD36上之各微鏡片58的光線,係以不同的光束直徑到達曝光面上之曝光區域32的光束直徑不均之形態。此等之倍率不均及光束直徑不均,對要是由於DMD36和曝光面間之光學系統的各種條差及排列間隙所引起的。Further, as another example, the light rays from the respective microlenses 58 on the DMD 36 as shown in Fig. 18B are in a form in which the beam diameters of the exposure regions 32 on the exposure surface are not uniform with different beam diameters. These uneven magnifications and uneven beam diameters are caused by various variations and alignment gaps of the optical system between the DMD 36 and the exposure surface.

更且,其他的例子,例如,來自DMD36上之各微鏡片58的光線,係以不同的光量到達曝光面上之曝光區域32的光量不均之形態。此種光量不均除了是由於各種像差及排列間隙所造成的以外,尚且是由於DMD36和曝光面間之光學因子(例如,1面透鏡之第5A圖及第5B圖的透鏡52和54)之透光率的位置依存性、及DMD36本身之光量不均所引起的。此等形態之圖案偏差,也會造成曝光面上所形成的圖案之解像度及濃度不均。Further, in another example, for example, the light rays from the respective microlenses 58 on the DMD 36 are in a form in which the amount of light reaching the exposure region 32 on the exposure surface is uneven with different amounts of light. Such unevenness of light amount is due to various aberrations and arrangement gaps, and is also due to optical factors between the DMD 36 and the exposure surface (for example, lenses 5 and 5 of the 1st lens and lenses 52 and 54 of the 5B). The positional dependence of the light transmittance and the uneven amount of light of the DMD 36 itself. The pattern deviation of these forms also causes the resolution and density unevenness of the pattern formed on the exposed surface.

若依照上述之實施形態(1)~(3)的話,於選擇實際使用於本曝光之微鏡片後,此等形態的圖案偏差之殘留因子和上述之角度偏差之殘留因子同樣地,也能夠藉由曝光進行互補而均一化,亦能夠減輕各曝光頭在曝光全體範圍中的解像度及濃度的不均勻現象。According to the above embodiments (1) to (3), after selecting the microlens actually used for the exposure, the residual factor of the pattern deviation of the above forms can be borrowed in the same manner as the residual factor of the angular deviation described above. By complementing and uniformizing the exposure, it is also possible to reduce the resolution and concentration unevenness of each exposure head in the entire range of exposure.

<<參照曝光>><<reference exposure>>

上述之實施形態(1)~(3)的變更例,係僅使用在可供使用的微鏡片中間隔(N-1)列的微鏡片列、或構成全光點列中的相當於1/N行的相鄰行的微鏡片群來進行參照曝光;為使可以實現均一的曝光之目的,也可以在前述參照曝光時所使用的微鏡片中界定實際曝光時不使用的微鏡片。The modified examples (1) to (3) of the above embodiments are used only in the microlens array of the (N-1) row in the available microlenses or the equivalent of 1/1 in the all-light-point array. The microlens group of adjacent rows of N rows is subjected to reference exposure; for the purpose of achieving uniform exposure, microlenses that are not used during actual exposure may be defined in the microlenses used in the aforementioned reference exposure.

將前述藉由參照曝光機構進行參照曝光的結果以試樣輸出,並對於該經輸出的參照曝光結果,進行解像度的變異及濃度偏差之確認、與推定實質傾斜角度等之分析。前述參照曝光結果之分析也可以藉由操作者之目視來進行分析。The result of the reference exposure by the reference exposure means is output as a sample, and the resolution of the resolution and the deviation of the concentration deviation, the estimation of the estimated substantial tilt angle, and the like are performed on the output reference exposure result. The analysis of the aforementioned reference exposure results can also be analyzed by visual observation by the operator.

第19A圖及第19B圖係為顯示使用單一曝光頭,並且只使用間隔(N-1)列之微鏡片來進行參照曝光的形態之一例的說明圖。19A and 19B are explanatory views showing an example of a form in which a single exposure head is used and reference exposure is performed using only microlenses in the interval (N-1).

在此例子之中,由於本曝光時係進行2次曝光,從而N=2。首先,只使用與第19A圖中以實線表示的奇數列之光點列相對應的微鏡片來進行參照曝光,並將參照曝光結果以試樣輸出。基於前述經以試樣輸出的參照曝光結果,藉由確認解像度之變異及濃度偏差,並推定實質傾斜角度,即可以指定於本曝光時所使用的微鏡片。In this example, since this exposure is performed twice, N=2. First, the reference exposure is performed using only the microlens corresponding to the dot array of the odd-numbered columns indicated by the solid line in Fig. 19A, and the reference exposure result is output as a sample. Based on the reference exposure result by the sample output, the microlens used in the present exposure can be specified by confirming the variation of the resolution and the concentration deviation and estimating the substantial tilt angle.

例如,對應於第19B圖之以斜線覆蓋所表示的光點列的微鏡片以外的微鏡片,在構成奇數列之光點列的微鏡片之中,係被指定為實際使用於本曝光者。就偶數列之光點列而言,也能夠以其他方法同樣地進行參照曝光,指定使用於本曝光的微鏡片,並且也可以適用於與對應於奇數列之光點列的圖案為相同的圖案。For example, microlenses other than the microlenses corresponding to the spot array indicated by oblique lines in Fig. 19B are designated as the actual use of the present lens among the microlenses constituting the odd-numbered column. In the case of the spot array of the even-numbered columns, the reference exposure can be similarly performed by other methods, and the microlens used for the exposure can be specified, and can also be applied to the same pattern as the pattern corresponding to the dot array of the odd-numbered columns. .

像這樣的做法,藉由指定使用於本曝光時的微鏡片,在使用奇數列及偶數列雙方的微鏡片之本曝光中,即可以實現接近理想的2次曝光之狀態。In such a manner, by designating the microlens used in the present exposure, it is possible to achieve a state close to the ideal two exposures in the present exposure using the microlenses of both the odd and even columns.

第20圖係為顯示使用複數個曝光頭,並且只使用間隔(N-1)列之微鏡片來進行參照曝光的形態之一例的說明圖。Fig. 20 is an explanatory view showing an example of a form in which a plurality of exposure heads are used and reference exposure is performed using only microlenses of the interval (N-1).

在此例子之中,由於本曝光時係進行2次曝光,從而N=2。首先,只使用與第20圖中以實線表示的關於X軸方向相鄰的2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 )的奇數列之光點列相對應的微鏡片來進行參照曝光,並將參照曝光結果以試樣輸出。基於前述經以試樣輸出的參照曝光結果,藉由確認因2個曝光頭而於被曝光面上所形成的頭間連繫區域以外的範圍中之解像度之變異及濃度偏差,並推定實質傾斜角度,即可以指定於本曝光時所使用的微鏡片。In this example, since this exposure is performed twice, N=2. First, only the micro-correlation column corresponding to the odd-numbered columns of the two exposure heads (for example, one of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 ) adjacent to the X-axis direction indicated by the solid line in FIG. 20 is used. The lens is used for reference exposure, and the reference exposure result is output as a sample. Based on the reference exposure result outputted from the sample, the resolution of the resolution and the concentration deviation in the range other than the inter-head contact region formed on the exposed surface by the two exposure heads are confirmed, and the substantial tilt is estimated The angle, that is, the microlens used in the exposure can be specified.

例如,對應於第20圖之以斜線覆蓋所表示的範圍86及網點所表示的範圍88內之光點列的微鏡片以外的微鏡片,在構成奇數列之光點列的微鏡片之中,係被指定為實際使用於本曝光者。就偶數列之光點列而言,也能夠以其他方法同樣地進行參照曝光,指定使用於本曝光的微鏡片,並且也可以適用於與對應於奇數列之光點列的圖案為相同的圖案。For example, the microlens other than the microlens corresponding to the range 86 indicated by the slanted line in FIG. 20 and the spot array in the range 88 indicated by the halftone dot are among the microlenses constituting the array of the odd-numbered columns. It is designated as the actual use of this exposure. In the case of the spot array of the even-numbered columns, the reference exposure can be similarly performed by other methods, and the microlens used for the exposure can be specified, and can also be applied to the same pattern as the pattern corresponding to the dot array of the odd-numbered columns. .

像這樣的做法,藉由指定使用於本曝光時的微鏡片,在使用奇數列及偶數列雙方的微鏡片之本曝光中,即可以對於因2個曝光頭而於被曝光面上所形成的頭間連繫區域以外的範圍中,實現接近理想的2次曝光之狀態。In this way, by designating the microlens used in the present exposure, in the exposure using the microlenses of both the odd and even columns, it is possible to form on the exposed surface by the two exposure heads. In a range other than the connection area between the heads, a state close to the ideal two exposures is achieved.

第21A圖及第21B圖係為顯示使用單一曝光頭,並且只使用構成相當於全光點行數之1/N行的鄰接行的微鏡片群來進行參照曝光的形態之一例的說明圖。21A and 21B are explanatory views showing an example in which a single exposure head is used and only a microlens group constituting an adjacent row corresponding to 1/N of the total number of lines is used for reference exposure.

在此例子之中,由於本曝光時係進行2次曝光,從而N=2。首先,只使用與第21A圖中以實線表示的第1行到第128(=256/2)行之光點相對應的微鏡片來進行參照曝光,並將參照曝光結果以試樣輸出。基於前述經以試樣輸出的參照曝光結果,即可以指定於本曝光時所使用的微鏡片。In this example, since this exposure is performed twice, N=2. First, the reference exposure is performed using only the microlenses corresponding to the light spots of the 1st line to the 128th (=256/2) lines indicated by the solid line in Fig. 21A, and the reference exposure result is output as a sample. Based on the aforementioned reference exposure result by the sample output, the microlens used in the present exposure can be specified.

例如,對應於第21B圖之以斜線覆蓋所表示的光點群的微鏡片以外的微鏡片,在第1行到第128行之微鏡片中,係可以被指定為實際使用於本曝光者。就第129行到第256行之微鏡片而言,也能夠以其他方法同樣地進行參照曝光,指定使用於本曝光的微鏡片,並且也可以適用於與對應於第1行到第128行之微鏡片的圖案為相同的圖案。For example, microlenses other than the microlenses corresponding to the spot group indicated by oblique lines in Fig. 21B can be designated as the actual use of the present in the microlenses of the first to 128th rows. For the microlenses of the 129th line to the 256th line, the reference exposure can be similarly performed by other methods, and the microlens used for the exposure can be specified, and can also be applied to correspond to the 1st to 128th lines. The pattern of the microlenses is the same pattern.

像這樣的做法,藉由指定使用於本曝光時的微鏡片,在使用全部的微鏡片之本曝光中,即可以實現接近理想的2次曝光之狀態。In such a manner, by designating the microlens used in the present exposure, it is possible to achieve a state close to the ideal two exposures in the present exposure using all of the microlenses.

第22圖係為顯示使用複數個曝光頭,並且對關於X軸方向相鄰的2個曝光頭(例如,其中一例為曝光頭3012 和3021 ),分別地只使用構成相當於全光點行數之1/N行的鄰接行的微鏡片群來進行參照曝光的形態之一例的說明圖。Fig. 22 is a view showing that a plurality of exposure heads are used, and two exposure heads adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction (for example, one of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 ) are respectively used to constitute the equivalent light spot. An explanatory diagram of an example of a form in which a microlens group of adjacent rows of 1/N rows is subjected to reference exposure.

在此例子之中,由於本曝光時係進行2次曝光,從而N=2。首先,只使用與第22圖中以實線表示的第1行到第128(=256/2)行之光點相對應的微鏡片來進行參照曝光,並將參照曝光結果以試樣輸出。基於前述經以試樣輸出的參照曝光結果,依照可以實現將因2個曝光頭而於被曝光面上所形成的頭間連繫區域以外的範圍中之解像度的變異及濃度偏差抑制到最小限度這樣的方式,即可以指定於本曝光時所使用的微鏡片。In this example, since this exposure is performed twice, N=2. First, the reference exposure is performed using only the microlenses corresponding to the light spots of the 1st line to the 128th (=256/2) lines indicated by the solid line in Fig. 22, and the reference exposure result is output as a sample. Based on the reference exposure result by the sample output, it is possible to minimize the variation in the resolution and the concentration deviation in the range other than the inter-head contact region formed on the exposed surface by the two exposure heads. In this way, the microlenses used in the present exposure can be specified.

例如,對應於第22圖之以斜線覆蓋所表示的範圍90及以網點表示之範圍92內之光點列的微鏡片以外的微鏡片,在第1行到第128行之微鏡片中,係可以被指定為實際使用於本曝光者。就第129行到第256行之微鏡片而言,也能夠以其他方法同樣地進行參照曝光,指定使用於本曝光的微鏡片,並且也可以適用於與對應於第1行到第128行之微鏡片的圖案為相同的圖案。For example, microlenses other than the microlenses corresponding to the range 90 indicated by the oblique line and the spot array in the range 92 indicated by the halftone dots in the microlens of the first row to the 128th row are Can be specified as the actual use of this exposure. For the microlenses of the 129th line to the 256th line, the reference exposure can be similarly performed by other methods, and the microlens used for the exposure can be specified, and can also be applied to correspond to the 1st to 128th lines. The pattern of the microlenses is the same pattern.

像這樣的做法,藉由指定使用於本曝光時的微鏡片,在因2個曝光頭而於被曝光面上所形成的頭間連繫區域以外的範圍中,即可以實現接近理想的2次曝光之狀態。In such a manner, by designating the microlens used in the present exposure, it is possible to achieve near-ideal 2 times in a range other than the inter-head contact region formed on the exposed surface by the two exposure heads. The state of exposure.

以上之實施形態(1)~(3)及變更例,雖然分別地說明以2次曝光當做本曝光之情況,然而並非限定於此,也可以是2次曝光以上之任何的多次曝光。尤其,藉由3次曝光到7次曝光,可以確保高解像度、以及實現減輕解像度之變異及濃度偏差之曝光。In the above embodiments (1) to (3) and the modified examples, the case where the exposure is performed by the secondary exposure is separately described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be any multiple exposure of the secondary exposure or more. In particular, by three exposures to seven exposures, it is possible to ensure high resolution and to achieve exposure which reduces the variation of the resolution and the concentration deviation.

又,關於上述之實施形態及變更例的曝光裝置,更宜是設有一種影像圖案變換機構,其為一種可以將表示影像圖案之2次元圖案的預定部分之尺寸改變成使之與可以藉由所選擇的使用圖素實現的對應部分之尺寸相互一致之機構。藉由使用像這樣的影像圖案變換機構,即可以在曝光面上形成如所期望的2次元圖案之高精細圖案。Further, in the exposure apparatus according to the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is preferable to provide an image pattern changing mechanism which is capable of changing the size of a predetermined portion of the 2-dimensional pattern representing the image pattern so as to be The selected mechanism that uses the corresponding parts of the pixel to achieve the same size. By using an image pattern changing mechanism like this, it is possible to form a high-definition pattern of a desired quaternary pattern on the exposure surface.

〔顯像步驟〕[development step]

前述之顯像係藉由去除前述感光層之未曝光部分來進行顯像的。The foregoing development is developed by removing the unexposed portions of the photosensitive layer.

前述未硬化區域之去除方法並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以使用顯像液予以除去之方法等。The method for removing the unhardened region is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and for example, a method in which it can be removed using a developing solution, or the like.

前述之顯像液並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,舉例來說,例如其可以是鹼性水溶液、水系顯像液、有機溶劑等;此等之中,較宜是弱鹼性之水溶液。該弱鹼水溶液之鹼基成分,舉例來說,例如其可以是氫氧化鋰、氫氧化鈉、氫氧化鉀、碳酸鋰、碳酸鈉、碳酸鉀、碳酸氫鋰、碳酸氫鈉、碳酸氫鉀、磷酸鈉、磷酸鉀、焦磷酸鈉、焦磷酸鉀、硼砂等。The above-mentioned developing liquid is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose of the object. For example, it may be an alkaline aqueous solution, a water-based developing liquid, an organic solvent or the like; among these, it is preferably weak. Alkaline aqueous solution. The base component of the weak alkaline aqueous solution may be, for example, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, lithium hydrogencarbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate or potassium hydrogencarbonate. Sodium phosphate, potassium phosphate, sodium pyrophosphate, potassium pyrophosphate, borax, and the like.

前述弱鹼性水溶液之pH值,舉例來說,例如,較佳為約8~12,更佳為約9~11。前述弱鹼性水溶液,舉例來說,例如,其可以是0.1~5質量%之碳酸鈉水溶液或碳酸鉀水溶液等。The pH of the aforementioned weakly alkaline aqueous solution is, for example, preferably from about 8 to 12, more preferably from about 9 to 11. The weakly alkaline aqueous solution may be, for example, 0.1 to 5% by mass of an aqueous sodium carbonate solution or an aqueous potassium carbonate solution.

前述顯像液之溫度,雖然可以適當地選擇合於前述感光層之顯像性者,然而,例如,較佳為約25℃~40℃。The temperature of the developing solution may be appropriately selected from those of the photosensitive layer. However, for example, it is preferably about 25 to 40 °C.

前述之顯像液也可以併用界面活性劑、消泡劑、有機鹼(例如,乙二胺、乙醇胺、氫氧化四甲銨、二伸乙三胺、三伸乙五胺、嗎啉、三乙醇胺等)、或促進顯像用的有機溶劑(例如,醇類、酮類、酯類、醚類、醯胺類、內酯類等)等。又,前述之顯像液可以是水或鹼水溶液與有機溶劑混合形成的水系顯像液,亦可以是單獨的有機溶劑。The above-mentioned developing solution may also be used in combination with a surfactant, an antifoaming agent, and an organic base (for example, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, diethylenetriamine, triethyleneamine, morpholine, triethanolamine). Or an organic solvent (for example, alcohols, ketones, esters, ethers, guanamines, lactones, etc.) for promoting development. Further, the developing solution may be a water-based developing solution formed by mixing water or an aqueous alkali solution with an organic solvent, or may be a single organic solvent.

〔硬化處理步驟〕[hardening treatment step]

前述之硬化處理步驟係在進行前述顯像步驟之後,對於所形成的圖案中之感光層進行硬化處理之步驟。The aforementioned hardening treatment step is a step of performing a hardening treatment on the photosensitive layer in the formed pattern after performing the above-described developing step.

前述之硬化處理並沒有特別的限制,可以依照目的需要而適當選擇,舉例來說,例如適合者有全面曝光處理、全面加熱處理等。The hardening treatment described above is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose of the object. For example, for example, a suitable exposure treatment, a total heat treatment, or the like may be employed.

前述之全面曝光的處理方法,舉例來說,例如,其可以是在前述顯像步驟之後,再對於已形成有前述永久圖案的前述積層體之全面進行曝光的方法。藉由該全面曝光,可以促進形成前述感光層的感光性組成物中之樹脂的硬化,並將前述永久圖案的表面予以硬化。For example, the treatment method for the overall exposure may be, for example, a method of exposing the entire laminated body in which the permanent pattern has been formed after the development step. By the overall exposure, the hardening of the resin in the photosensitive composition forming the photosensitive layer can be promoted, and the surface of the permanent pattern can be hardened.

進行前述全面曝光之裝置並沒有特別地限定,可以按照目的需要而適當地選擇,然而舉例來說,例如適合者有超高壓水銀燈等之UV曝光機等。The apparatus for performing the above-described overall exposure is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the needs of the object. For example, for example, a UV exposure machine such as an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp or the like is suitable.

前述之全面加熱的處理方法,舉例來說,例如其可以是在前述顯像步驟之後,對於已形成有前述永久圖案的前述積層體上進行全面加熱之方法。藉由該全面加熱,可以提高前述永久圖案表面的膜強度。The above-described overall heating treatment method may be, for example, a method of performing overall heating on the laminated body on which the permanent pattern has been formed after the development step. By this overall heating, the film strength of the surface of the aforementioned permanent pattern can be improved.

前述全面加熱之加熱溫度較宜是120~250℃,更宜是120~200℃。當該加熱溫度小於120℃時,則就會得不到藉由加熱處理而提高膜強度之效果;而當超過250℃時,則前述感光性組成物中的樹脂就會分解,並使得膜質變弱變脆。The heating temperature of the above comprehensive heating is preferably 120 to 250 ° C, more preferably 120 to 200 ° C. When the heating temperature is less than 120 ° C, the effect of increasing the film strength by heat treatment is not obtained; and when it exceeds 250 ° C, the resin in the photosensitive composition is decomposed and the film quality is changed. Weak and brittle.

前述之全面加熱的加熱時間,較宜是10~120分鐘,更宜是15~60分鐘。The heating time of the above-mentioned overall heating is preferably 10 to 120 minutes, more preferably 15 to 60 minutes.

進行前述之全面加熱的裝置並沒有特別的限制,舉例來說,可以從公知的裝置中依照目的而適當地選擇,例如,其可以是乾燥烘箱、加熱板、IR加熱器等。The apparatus for performing the above-described overall heating is not particularly limited. For example, it can be appropriately selected from known apparatuses according to the purpose, and for example, it may be a drying oven, a heating plate, an IR heater or the like.

-保護膜、層間絕緣膜、耐焊永久圖案形成方法-- Protective film, interlayer insulating film, solder resist permanent pattern forming method -

在前述之圖案形成方法為形成保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案中的至少任一種之永久圖案形成方法的情況下,可以藉由前述之永久圖案形成方法,在印刷配線基板上形成永久圖案,更進一步地按照以下的方式來進行軟焊附加(焊接)。In the case where the pattern forming method is a permanent pattern forming method of forming at least one of a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a solder resist pattern, a permanent pattern can be formed on the printed wiring substrate by the above-described permanent pattern forming method. Further, soldering addition (welding) is performed in the following manner.

也就是說,藉由前述之顯像,形成前述永久圖案的硬化層,並於前述印刷配線板之表面露出金屬層。對於露出於該印刷配線板表面的金屬層部位進行金鍍敷之後,再進行軟焊。然後,在已進行軟焊的部位上按裝半導體或零件等。此時,因前述之硬化層的永久圖案而可以發揮做為保護膜或絕緣膜(層間絕緣膜)的機能,以及可防止從外部而來的衝擊及相鄰電極彼此之導通。That is, the hardened layer of the permanent pattern is formed by the above-described development, and the metal layer is exposed on the surface of the printed wiring board. After gold plating is applied to the metal layer portion exposed on the surface of the printed wiring board, soldering is performed. Then, a semiconductor or a part or the like is mounted on the portion where the soldering has been performed. At this time, the function as a protective film or an insulating film (interlayer insulating film) can be exhibited by the permanent pattern of the hardened layer described above, and the impact from the outside and the conduction between the adjacent electrodes can be prevented.

就前述之圖案形成裝置及永久圖案形成方法而言,當藉由前述之永久圖案形成方法所形成的永久圖案為前述保護膜、前述層間絕緣膜時,則可以保護配線避免因外部引起的衝擊及彎曲,特別是在為前述層間絕緣膜的情況下,例如,係可以有效地使用於如向多層配線基板、堆疊配線基板等按裝半導體或零件之高密度實裝上。In the above-described pattern forming apparatus and permanent pattern forming method, when the permanent pattern formed by the above-described permanent pattern forming method is the protective film or the interlayer insulating film, the wiring can be protected from external impact and The bending, particularly in the case of the above-mentioned interlayer insulating film, can be effectively used, for example, in a high-density mounting of a semiconductor or a component such as a multilayer wiring substrate, a stacked wiring substrate or the like.

本發明之前述的永久圖案形成方法,由於係使用本發明之前述感光性組成物的緣故,因而可以適合使用於保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等之永久圖案等各種圖案之形成用、彩色濾光片、柱材、肋材、隔離片、隔牆等之液晶構造組件之製造、全息照相、微機器、驗證等之製造,特別是可以適合使用於印刷基板之永久圖案形成用途上。In the above-described permanent pattern forming method of the present invention, since the photosensitive composition of the present invention is used, it can be suitably used for forming various patterns such as a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a permanent pattern such as a solder resist pattern. The manufacture of liquid crystal structural components such as color filters, pillars, ribs, spacers, partition walls, etc., manufacturing of holograms, micromachines, verification, etc., can be suitably used for permanent pattern formation of printed substrates.

【實施例】[Examples]

以下,藉由實施例更進一步具體地說明本發明,然而本發明不因此等而受到限制。Hereinafter, the present invention will be further specifically described by way of examples, but the invention is not limited thereto.

(合成例1)(Synthesis Example 1)

在1,000毫升之三口燒瓶中投入159克之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇,於氮氣流下加熱到85℃。於其中,以2小時滴下63.4克之甲基丙烯酸苄酯、72.3克之甲基丙烯酸、4.15克V-601(和光純藥)之159克的1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液。當滴下終了後,更進一步地加熱5小時使之反應。然後,停止加熱而得到甲基丙烯酸苄酯/丙烯酸(30/70莫耳%比)的共聚物。159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was placed in a 1,000 ml three-necked flask and heated to 85 ° C under a nitrogen stream. Thereto, 63.4 g of benzyl methacrylate, 72.3 g of methacrylic acid, and 4.15 g of V-601 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) of 159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol solution were added dropwise over 2 hours. When the dropping was completed, it was further heated for 5 hours to cause a reaction. Then, the heating was stopped to obtain a copolymer of benzyl methacrylate/acrylic acid (30/70 mol%).

接著,將前述之共聚物溶液中的120.0克移入300毫升的三口燒瓶內,加入16.6克之甲基丙烯酸苄酯、0.16克之p-甲氧基酚,並予以攪拌使之溶解。溶解後,加入2.4克之三苯基膦,於100℃、加熱下進行加成反應。當確認甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯消失後,停止加熱。加入1-甲氧基-2-丙醇,調製成固體成分為30質量%之以下述表1所示的高分子化合物1之溶液。Next, 120.0 g of the above copolymer solution was transferred into a 300 ml three-necked flask, and 16.6 g of benzyl methacrylate and 0.16 g of p-methoxyphenol were added and stirred to dissolve. After the dissolution, 2.4 g of triphenylphosphine was added, and the addition reaction was carried out under heating at 100 °C. When it was confirmed that the glycidyl methacrylate disappeared, the heating was stopped. 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added to prepare a solution of the polymer compound 1 shown in Table 1 below in a solid content of 30% by mass.

所得到的高分子化合物之質量平均分子量(Mw)係為藉由以聚乙烯做為標準物質的膠透析色譜法(GPC)來測定,結果為15,000。The mass average molecular weight (Mw) of the obtained polymer compound was measured by gel dialysis chromatography (GPC) using polyethylene as a standard material, and it was 15,000.

又,使用氫氧化鈉滴定所得到的單位固體成分之酸價(羧基之含量)為2.2 meq/g。Further, the acid value (the content of the carboxyl group) per unit solid content obtained by titration with sodium hydroxide was 2.2 meq/g.

更且,藉由碘價滴定所求得的單位固體成分之乙烯性不飽和鍵的含量(C=C價)係2.1 meq/g。Further, the content of the ethylenically unsaturated bond (C=C valence) per unit solid content determined by titration of iodine was 2.1 meq/g.

(合成例2~27)(Synthesis Example 2~27)

為了得到目標之高分子化合物,所以除了將合成例1中之苄基甲基丙烯酸酯、甲基丙烯酸、及甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯適當地變更為任意的單體以外,和合成例1同樣地按照表1~表5所示分別調製高分子化合物2~27。In order to obtain the target polymer compound, in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1, except that benzyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, and glycidyl methacrylate in Synthesis Example 1 were appropriately changed to an arbitrary monomer. Polymer compounds 2 to 27 were prepared as shown in Tables 1 to 5, respectively.

在表1~表5之中,* 1係代表以下述構造式(a)所代表的構造及以構造式(b)所代表的構造之混合物;* 2係代表以下述構造式(c)所代表的構造及以構造式(d)所代表的構造之混合物。In Tables 1 to 5, * 1 represents a mixture of the structure represented by the following structural formula (a) and the structure represented by the structural formula (b); * 2 represents the following structural formula (c) A representative construction and a mixture of constructions represented by structural formula (d).

(合成例28)(Synthesis Example 28)

在1,000毫升之三口燒瓶中投入159克之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇,於氮氣流下加熱到85℃。於其中,以2小時滴下含36克之甲基丙烯酸甲酯、72.3克之甲基丙烯酸、4.15克V-601(和光純藥)之159克的1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液。當滴下終了後,更進一步地加熱5小時使之反應。然後,停止加熱而得到甲基丙烯酸甲酯/丙烯酸(30/70莫耳%比)的共聚物。159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was placed in a 1,000 ml three-necked flask and heated to 85 ° C under a nitrogen stream. Thereto, a solution of 36 g of methyl methacrylate, 72.3 g of methacrylic acid, 4.15 g of V-601 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) of 159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added dropwise over 2 hours. When the dropping was completed, it was further heated for 5 hours to cause a reaction. Then, the heating was stopped to obtain a copolymer of methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid (30/70 mol%).

接著,將前述之共聚物溶液中的120.0克移入300毫升的三口燒瓶內,加入16.6克之甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、0.16克之p-甲氧基酚,並予以攪拌使之溶解。溶解後,加入2.4克之三苯基膦,於100℃、加熱下進行加成反應。當確認甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯消失後,停止加熱。加入1-甲氧基-2-丙醇,調製成固體成分為30質量%之以下述構造式所代表的高分子化合物28之溶液。Next, 120.0 g of the above copolymer solution was transferred into a 300 ml three-necked flask, and 16.6 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.16 g of p-methoxyphenol were added and stirred to dissolve. After the dissolution, 2.4 g of triphenylphosphine was added, and the addition reaction was carried out under heating at 100 °C. When it was confirmed that the glycidyl methacrylate disappeared, the heating was stopped. A solution of the polymer compound 28 represented by the following structural formula was prepared by adding 1-methoxy-2-propanol to a solid content of 30% by mass.

所得到的高分子化合物之質量平均分子量(Mw)係為藉由以聚乙烯做為標準物質的膠透析色譜法(GPC)來測定,結果為15,000。The mass average molecular weight (Mw) of the obtained polymer compound was measured by gel dialysis chromatography (GPC) using polyethylene as a standard material, and it was 15,000.

又,使用氫氧化鈉滴定所得到的單位固體成分之酸價(羧基之含量)為2.3 meq/g。Further, the acid value (the content of the carboxyl group) per unit solid content obtained by titration with sodium hydroxide was 2.3 meq/g.

更且,藉由碘價滴定所求得的單位固體成分之乙烯性不飽和鍵的含量(C=C價)係2.6 meq/g。Further, the content of the ethylenically unsaturated bond (C=C valence) per unit solid content determined by iodine titration was 2.6 meq/g.

(實施例1)(Example 1)

-感光性組成物之調製-將各成分按照下述之量予以摻混而調製成感光性組成物溶液。- Preparation of Photosensitive Composition - Each component was blended in the following amounts to prepare a photosensitive composition solution.

〔感光性組成物溶液之各成分量〕[Amount of each component of the photosensitive composition solution]

.前述之高分子化合物1(在前述之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液中之固體成分質量為30質量%).......87.4質量份.二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(聚合性化合物)...14質量份.路西林-TPO(醯基氧化膦化合物、光聚合起始劑.........................6質量份.艾波妥特YD-8125(環氧當量170g/eq.、雙酚A系環氧樹脂)鹼不溶性熱交聯劑...........7.8質量份.熱硬化劑(氰胍).............0.77重量份.氟系界面活性劑(梅伽法克F-176、大日本油墨化學工業(股)公司製、30質量%之2-丁酮溶液)....0.2質量份.硫酸鋇分散液(堺化學工業公司製、B-30)..80質量份.甲基乙基酮...............15質量份 . The above polymer compound 1 (the solid content of the above 1-methoxy-2-propanol solution is 30% by mass). . . . . . . 87.4 parts by mass. Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (polymeric compound). . . 14 parts by mass. Luciferin-TPO (fluorenyl phosphine oxide compound, photopolymerization initiator.........................6 parts by mass. Apodot YD -8125 (epoxy equivalent 170g/eq., bisphenol A epoxy resin) alkali insoluble thermal crosslinking agent..............7.8 parts by mass. Thermal hardener (cyanide)... ..........0.77 parts by weight. Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafak F-176, manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 30% by mass 2-butanone solution). ...0.2 parts by mass. Barium sulfate dispersion (manufactured by Dai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., B-30): 80 parts by mass. Methyl ethyl ketone...............15 mass Share

另外,前述之硫酸鋇分散液係預先將30質量份的硫酸鋇(堺化學公司製、B30)、29.2質量份的前述之高分子化合物1(在前述之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液中之固體成分質量為30質量%)、0.2質量份之C.I.顏料藍15:3、0.05質量份之C.I.顏料黃185、40.55質量份之甲基乙基酮予以混合之後,再以馬達研磨機M-200(愛伽公司製),使用直徑為1.0毫米的鋯珠,於周速度為9公尺/秒下進行分散歷3.5小時調製而成。In addition, 30 parts by mass of barium sulfate (B30), and 29.2 parts by mass of the above-mentioned polymer compound 1 (in the above 1-methoxy-2-propanol), are used in advance. The mass of the solid component in the solution is 30% by mass), 0.2 parts by mass of CI Pigment Blue 15:3, 0.05 parts by mass of CI Pigment Yellow 185, and 40.55 parts by mass of methyl ethyl ketone are mixed, and then a motor grinder M-200 (manufactured by Aga Co., Ltd.) was prepared by dispersing zirconium beads having a diameter of 1.0 mm at a peripheral speed of 9 m/sec for 3.5 hours.

另外,在本實施例1之中,「熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比」係(7.8/170)/(87.4*0.3*0.002+29.2*0.3*0.8*0.0022)=0.63。Further, in the first embodiment, the molar ratio of the molar ratio of the crosslinking group of the thermal crosslinking agent to the acidic group of the binder is (7.8/170)/(87.4*0.3*0.002+29.2). *0.3*0.8*0.0022)=0.63.

又,在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的溶劑可溶性成分之總量係為0%,而在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量係為0.9%。Further, the total amount of the solvent-soluble component having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 0%, and the component amount of all the bases having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 0.9%.

-感光性薄膜之製造-將所得到的感光性組成物溶液,以棒塗法塗布於做為前述支撐體的16微米厚、300毫米寬、200公尺長之PET(聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯)薄膜(東麗公司製,16FB50)上,於80℃熱風循環式乾燥機中進行乾燥,形成厚度為30微米之感光層。接著,在該感光層上,藉由積層機積層做為保護膜的20微米膜厚、310毫米寬、210公尺長之聚丙烯膜(王子製紙公司製,E-200)而製造成感光性薄膜。-Production of Photosensitive Film - The obtained photosensitive composition solution was applied by bar coating to a 16 μm thick, 300 mm wide, 200 m long PET (polyethylene terephthalate) as the support. The diester film (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc., 16FB50) was dried in a hot air circulating dryer at 80 ° C to form a photosensitive layer having a thickness of 30 μm. Then, on the photosensitive layer, a 20 μm film thickness, a 310 mm wide, and a 210 m long polypropylene film (E-200, manufactured by Oji Paper Co., Ltd.) was used as a protective film to form a photosensitive film. film.

--感光性薄膜輥(圓筒)之製作--以捲包機將前述之感光性薄膜予以捲曲,以製造感光性薄膜之初始輥(圓筒)。- Preparation of Photosensitive Film Roller (Cylinder) - The above-mentioned photosensitive film was crimped by a winder to produce an initial roll (cylinder) of a photosensitive film.

將所得到的前述之感光性薄膜之初始圓筒,以同軸滾筒予以細長(slit)化,在長度為30毫米、內徑為76毫米的ABS樹脂製圓筒狀捲芯上,以250毫米寬捲取成150公尺,而製作成感光性薄膜圓筒。The initial cylinder of the obtained photosensitive film was slit by a coaxial roller, and was 250 mm wide on a cylindrical core of ABS resin having a length of 30 mm and an inner diameter of 76 mm. The coil was taken up to 150 meters to form a photosensitive film cylinder.

將如此所得到的前述感光性薄膜圓筒,打包在黑色聚乙烯製的筒狀袋(膜厚度:80微米、水蒸氣穿透率:25克/平方公尺.24小時以下),將聚丙烯製刷押入捲芯的兩端。The photosensitive film cylinder thus obtained was packed in a tubular bag made of black polyethylene (film thickness: 80 μm, water vapor permeability: 25 g/m 2 .24 hours or less), and polypropylene was obtained. The brush is pushed into both ends of the core.

-永久圖案之形成---感光性積層體之調製--接著,對於、印刷基板、即所謂之經配線完成的覆銅積層板(無貫穿孔、銅厚度為12微米)之表面實施化學研磨處理並調製而當做前述之基材。使前述感光性薄膜之感光層接於前述覆銅積層,並且一邊將前述感光性薄膜中的保護薄膜予以剝離,一邊使用真空積層機(尼契苟蒙筒(股)公司製、VP130)進行積層,進而調製出依照前述覆銅積層板、前述感光層、前述聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜(支撐體)的順序積層而成的積層體。- Formation of permanent pattern - Modulation of photosensitive laminate - Next, chemical polishing is performed on the surface of a printed substrate, a so-called copper-clad laminate (without through holes, copper thickness of 12 μm) Processed and modulated as the substrate described above. The photosensitive layer of the photosensitive film was bonded to the copper-clad laminate, and the protective film of the photosensitive film was peeled off, and a vacuum laminator (VP130, VP130) was used for lamination. Further, a laminate in which the copper-clad laminate, the photosensitive layer, and the polyethylene terephthalate film (support) are laminated in this order is prepared.

壓合條件係為:真空吸引時間為40秒、壓合溫度為70℃、壓合壓力為0.2 Mpa、加壓時間為10秒。The pressing conditions were as follows: vacuum suction time was 40 seconds, pressing temperature was 70 ° C, pressing pressure was 0.2 Mpa, and pressing time was 10 seconds.

對於前述之感光性積層體,進行最短顯像時間、感度、解像度、保存安定性及邊緣粗糙度之評價。結果如表6所示。The shortest development time, sensitivity, resolution, storage stability, and edge roughness were evaluated for the photosensitive laminate described above. The results are shown in Table 6.

<解像度之評價>(1)最短顯像時間之評價方法一邊從前述感光性積層體剝取聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜(支撐體),一邊對於覆銅積層板上的前述感光層之全面,以0.15 MPa之壓力噴灑30℃、1質量%之碳酸鈉水溶液,測定自碳酸鈉水溶液之噴灑開始直到溶解除去覆銅積層板上的前述感光層為止所需要的時間,並以此當做最短顯像時間。<Evaluation of the resolution> (1) Evaluation method of the shortest development time When the polyethylene terephthalate film (support) is peeled off from the photosensitive laminate, the photosensitive layer on the copper clad laminate is In general, a 30 ° C, 1% by mass aqueous sodium carbonate solution is sprayed at a pressure of 0.15 MPa, and the time required from the spraying of the sodium carbonate aqueous solution until the dissolution of the photosensitive layer on the copper clad laminate is measured, and the shortest time is taken as the shortest Development time.

(2)感度之評價方法對於前述所調製的感光性積層體中的感光性薄膜之感光層,使用以下所說明的圖案形成裝置,以21/2 倍間隔、照射從0.1 mJ/cm2 起到100 mJ/cm2 為止的不同光能量之光來進行曝光,以使前述感光層的一部分區域硬化。在室溫下靜置10分鐘後,以前述(1)所求得的最短顯像時間之2倍時間,將30℃的1質量%之碳酸鈉水溶液,以0.15MPa之壓力噴灑在覆銅積層板上之感光層全面上,以溶解去除未硬化區域,測定所殘留的硬化區域之厚度。其次,繪製光之照射量與硬化層之厚度的關係,以得到感度曲線。從該感度曲線求取硬化區域之厚度成為和曝光前的感光層相同的30微米之厚度時的光能量,將之當做使感光層硬化時所必需要的曝光能量。(2) Evaluation method of sensitivity The photosensitive layer of the photosensitive film in the photosensitive layered body prepared above was irradiated from 0.1 mJ/cm 2 at intervals of 2 1/2 times using the pattern forming apparatus described below. Exposure is performed by light of different light energies up to 100 mJ/cm 2 to harden a part of the photosensitive layer. After standing at room temperature for 10 minutes, a 1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 30 ° C was sprayed on the copper-clad laminate at a pressure of 0.15 MPa at twice the shortest development time obtained in the above (1). The photosensitive layer on the plate was entirely removed to dissolve and remove the unhardened region, and the thickness of the remaining hardened region was measured. Next, the relationship between the amount of irradiation of light and the thickness of the hardened layer is plotted to obtain a sensitivity curve. From the sensitivity curve, the light energy at a thickness of 30 μm which is the same as the thickness of the photosensitive layer before exposure was obtained as the exposure energy necessary for hardening the photosensitive layer.

<<圖案形成裝置>>使用具備曝光頭30之圖案形成裝置10,該曝光頭係具有做為前述光照射機構的特開2005-258431號公報上所記載的複合波雷射光源、和做為前述光調變機構之可控制成僅驅動如第6圖之概略圖所示之在主掃描方向上排列1024個微鏡片58之微鏡片列、在副掃描方向上排列768組微鏡片陣列中之1024個×256列的DMD36,以及排列有將光成像於前述感光性薄膜的如第5A圖及第5B圖所示的光學系統。<<Pattern forming apparatus>> The pattern forming apparatus 10 which has the exposure head 30 which has the composite-wave laser light source which is described in the Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-258431. The light modulation mechanism can be controlled to drive only the microlens array of 1024 microlenses 58 arranged in the main scanning direction as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 6, and the 768 microlens arrays are arranged in the sub-scanning direction. 1024 x 256 columns of DMDs 36, and an optical system as shown in Figs. 5A and 5B in which light is imaged on the photosensitive film.

各曝光頭30,即各DMD36之設定傾斜角度,可以使用可供使用的1024列×256行之微鏡片58,並採用比恰好2次曝光的角度θideal 稍微大一些的角度。此種角度θideal 對於N次曝光之次數N,可供使用的微鏡片58之列方向的個數s、可供使用的微鏡片之列方向的間隔p、及曝光頭30呈傾斜狀態時之由於微鏡片所形成的掃描線間距δ而言,係具有如下述式1之關係:s p sin θideal ≧N δ (式1)For each of the exposure heads 30, i.e., the set tilt angle of each of the DMDs 36, the available microlens 58 of 1024 columns x 256 rows can be used at an angle slightly larger than the angle θ ideal of exactly two exposures. The angle θ ideal is the number N of N exposures, the number s of directions of the microlenses 58 that can be used, the interval p of the available microlenses, and the tilting state of the exposure head 30. Due to the scanning line pitch δ formed by the microlens, it has a relationship of the following formula 1: sp sin θ ideal ≧N δ (Formula 1)

本實施形態中之DMD36,如以上所述,因為它是一種縱橫之配置間隔為相等之多數個微鏡片58呈矩形格子狀排列之物的緣故,所以:p cos θideal =δ (式2)因而上述式1乃變成:s tan θideal =N (式3)In the DMD 36 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the plurality of microlenses 58 having the same vertical and horizontal arrangement intervals are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape, p cos θ ideal = δ (Expression 2) Therefore, the above formula 1 becomes: s tan θ ideal = N (Formula 3)

由於s=256、N=2,所以角度θideal 係約0.45度。從而設定傾斜角度θ,例如,可以採用0.50度。Since s = 256 and N = 2, the angle θ Ideal is about 0.45 degrees. Thereby, the inclination angle θ is set, for example, 0.50 degrees can be employed.

首先,為了補正2次曝光中解像度之變異及曝光不均一現象,所以調整被曝光面之曝光圖案的狀態。結果如第16圖所示。在第16圖中,係顯示一在令平台14呈靜止之狀態下投影於積層體12之被曝光面上,具有曝光頭3012 和3021 之DMD36的可供使用的微鏡片58而來的光點群之圖案。又,在出現如下半部分、上半部分所示之光點群的圖案之狀態下,移動平台14進行連續曝光之際,對於曝光區域3212 和3221 顯示在被曝光面上所形成的曝光圖案的狀態。另外,在第16圖中,雖然為了方便說明起見而將可供使用的微鏡片58之間隔1列的曝光圖案,分開為畫素列群A之曝光圖案與畫素列群B之曝光圖案來表示,然而實際的被曝光面上之圖案係由此等2種曝光圖案重合而成者。First, in order to correct the variation of the resolution and the unevenness of the exposure in the two exposures, the state of the exposure pattern of the exposed surface is adjusted. The result is shown in Figure 16. In Fig. 16, a projection of the microlens 58 of the DMD 36 having the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 projected onto the exposed surface of the laminated body 12 in a state where the stage 14 is stationary is shown. The pattern of light spots. Further, in the state in which the pattern of the spot group shown in the lower half and the upper half appears, the exposure stage 32 12 and 32 21 are exposed to the exposed surface when the moving stage 14 performs continuous exposure. The state of the pattern. In addition, in FIG. 16, the exposure pattern of one row of the microlenses 58 that can be used is divided into the exposure pattern of the pixel group A and the exposure pattern of the pixel group B for convenience of explanation. In addition, the actual pattern on the exposed surface is formed by superimposing two kinds of exposure patterns.

如第16圖所示,可明白:由於曝光頭3012 和3021 之間的相對位置的偏離理想狀態的結果,所以畫素列群A之曝光圖案與畫素列群B之曝光圖案雙方,在曝光區域3212 和3221 之前述曝光頭的掃描方向成垂直的座標軸上之重複曝光範圍之中,皆產生比理想的2次曝光狀態更多曝光的曝光過多的範圍。As shown in Fig. 16, it can be understood that the exposure pattern of the pixel group A and the exposure pattern of the pixel group B are both due to the deviation of the relative position between the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 as a result of the ideal state. Among the repeated exposure ranges on the coordinate axes in which the scanning directions of the exposure heads 32 12 and 32 21 are perpendicular to each other, a range in which the exposure is more exposed than the ideal two exposure states is excessive.

使用狹縫28及光檢出器之組合做為前述光點位置檢出機構,對於曝光頭3012 和3021 檢測出曝光區域3212 內的光點P(1,1)和P(256,1)的位置、曝光區域3212 內的光點P(1,1024)和P(256,1024)的位置,並測定彼等連結之直線的傾斜角度和曝光頭之掃描方向間形成的角度。Using the combination of the slit 28 and the photodetector as the aforementioned spot position detecting mechanism, the spot P(1, 1) and P (256, in the exposure region 32 12 are detected for the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 , 1) The position, the positions of the light spots P (1, 1024) and P (256, 1024) in the exposure area 32 12 , and the angle formed between the inclination angle of the line connecting them and the scanning direction of the exposure head are measured.

使用實質傾斜角度θ ’,分別導出關於曝光頭3012 和3021 之出最接近滿足下述之關係式4:t tan θ ’=N (式4)的值t之自然數T。分別導出如下:對於曝光頭3012 而言T=254;對於曝光頭3021 而言T=255。結果,構成在第17圖中以斜線覆蓋之部分78及80的微鏡片係被界定為於本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Using the substantial inclination angle θ ', the natural number T about the value t of the exposure heads 30 12 and 30 21 which is closest to the relationship 4: t tan θ ' = N (Expression 4) which follows is derived, respectively. Derived separately as follows: T = 254 for exposure head 30 12 and T = 255 for exposure head 30 21 . As a result, the microlenses constituting the portions 78 and 80 covered with oblique lines in Fig. 17 are defined as microlenses which are not used at the time of exposure.

然後,關於和構成在第17圖中以斜線覆蓋之部分78及80的光點以外之光點相對應的微鏡片,以同樣的做法界定與構成在第17圖中以斜線覆蓋之範圍82及以網點覆蓋之範圍84之光點相對應的微鏡片,追加為於本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。係被界定為於本曝光時不使用的微鏡片。Then, with respect to the microlens corresponding to the light spot other than the spot constituting the portions 78 and 80 covered with oblique lines in Fig. 17, the same is defined and the range 82 which is covered by the oblique line in Fig. 17 and The microlens corresponding to the spot of the range 84 covered by the dot is added as a microlens which is not used in the present exposure. It is defined as a microlens that is not used during this exposure.

對於此等之曝光時不使用之經界定的微鏡片,藉由圖素部控制機構,送出平時設定為OFF狀態的角度之信號,來控制此等之微鏡片使成為實質上與曝光無關。For the defined microlenses that are not used during such exposure, the micro-lens is controlled by the pixel control mechanism to send an angle of the angle that is normally set to the OFF state, so that the microlenses are substantially independent of exposure.

藉此,即可以使得在曝光區域3212 和3221 之中,以複數個前述曝光頭所形成的被曝光面上之重複曝光範圍之頭間連繫區域以外之各範圍中,相對於理想的2次曝光而言,成為曝光過多的區域、和成為曝光不足的區域之面積總和變為最小。Thereby, it is possible to make each of the exposure regions 32 12 and 32 21 in a range other than the connection region between the heads of the repeated exposure ranges on the exposed surface formed by the plurality of exposure heads, with respect to the ideal In the case of the secondary exposure, the total area of the area that is excessively exposed and the area that is underexposed is minimized.

(3)解像度之評價方法以和前述(1)之最短顯像時間之評價方法相同的方法及條件製作前述感光性積層體,在室溫(23℃、55%RH)靜置10分鐘。從所得到的感光性積層體之聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜(支撐體)上方,使用前述之圖案形成裝置,以列/空間=1/1、以1微米刻度進行線寬10微米~100微米為止的各線寬之曝光。此時之曝光量係為使前述(2)之感光層硬化所需要的光能量。在室溫下靜置10分鐘後,從前述感光性積層體剝取聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜(支撐體)。在覆銅積層板上的感光層之全面上,以0.15 MPa的壓力及以前述(1)求得的最短顯像時間之2倍時間,噴灑作為前述顯像液的30℃、1質量%之碳酸鈉水溶液,以溶解去除未硬化區域。以光學顯微透鏡觀察如此所得到的附有硬化樹脂圖案之覆銅積層板的表面,測定硬化樹脂圖案之列上沒有堵塞、波浪紋等異常、並且能形成空間的最小列寬,以其當作解像度。該解像度係數值愈小愈佳。結果示於表1中。(3) Evaluation method of the resolution The photosensitive laminate was produced in the same manner and under the same conditions as the evaluation method of the shortest development time of the above (1), and allowed to stand at room temperature (23 ° C, 55% RH) for 10 minutes. From the above-mentioned pattern forming apparatus, the above-described pattern forming apparatus was used to form a line width of 10 μm on a 1 μm scale from the polyethylene terephthalate film (support) of the obtained photosensitive laminate. Exposure of each line width up to 100 microns. The exposure amount at this time is the light energy required to harden the photosensitive layer of the above (2). After standing at room temperature for 10 minutes, a polyethylene terephthalate film (support) was peeled off from the photosensitive laminate. On the entire surface of the photosensitive layer on the copper clad laminate, 30 ° C and 1% by mass of the developing solution were sprayed at a pressure of 0.15 MPa and twice the shortest development time obtained by the above (1). An aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is dissolved to remove the unhardened area. Observing the surface of the thus obtained copper-clad laminate having the cured resin pattern with an optical microlens, and measuring the minimum column width of the hardened resin pattern without abnormalities such as clogging, wavy, and the like, and forming a space For resolution. The smaller the resolution coefficient value, the better. The results are shown in Table 1.

<保存安定性(顯像時間之經時變化率)之評價>-顯像時間之測定-(顯像時間T1 之測定)將前述之積層體置於25℃暗處歷時20分鐘後,剝取聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜(支撐體),並對於前述之感光層進行顯像處理。前述之顯像處理係藉由使用30℃、1質量%之碳酸鈉水溶液做為鹼顯像液,對於覆銅積層板上的前述感光層之全面進行淋洗,測定覆銅積層板上的前述感光層完全被除去為止所需要的時間,並以此當做顯像時間T1<Evaluation of storage stability (change over time of development time)> - Measurement of development time - (Measurement of development time T 1 ) The above-mentioned laminated body was placed in a dark place at 25 ° C for 20 minutes, and then peeled off. A polyethylene terephthalate film (support) was taken, and the above-mentioned photosensitive layer was subjected to development processing. The development process described above is carried out by using a sodium carbonate aqueous solution of 30° C. and 1% by mass as an alkali developing solution, and rinsing the entire photosensitive layer on the copper clad laminate to measure the aforementioned layer on the copper clad laminate. The time required until the photosensitive layer is completely removed, and is taken as the development time T 1 .

(顯像時間T2 之測定)將感光性積層體投入於防溼袋(黑色聚乙烯製之筒狀袋、膜厚度:80微米、水蒸氣穿透率:25克/平方公尺.24小時以下)中,在40℃之環境下靜置保存72小時,然後藉由和上述顯像時間T1 之測定方法相同的方法來測定顯像時間T2(Measurement of development time T 2 ) The photosensitive laminate was placed in a moisture-proof bag (barrel bag made of black polyethylene, film thickness: 80 μm, water vapor permeability: 25 g/m 2 .24 hours) below), in an environment of 40 ℃ allowed to stand for 72 hours and then measured by the above-described developing time T 1 of the same method to determine the developing time T 2.

(顯像時間的變化率之測定)由所測定的顯像時間T2 和前述之顯像時間T1 計算出顯像時間的變化率(T2 /T1 ),並基於下述之評價基準來評價保存安定性。(Measurement of Change Rate of Development Time) The change rate (T 2 /T 1 ) of the development time is calculated from the measured development time T 2 and the aforementioned development time T 1 , and is based on the following evaluation criteria. To evaluate the preservation stability.

〔評價基準〕◎...顯像時間的變化滿足0.5<(T2 /T1 )<2.5;○...顯像時間的變化滿足0.5<(T2 /T1 )<3;×...顯像時間的變化不能滿足0.5<(T2 /T1 )<3;如此做法所求得的T1 、T2 、(T2/T1)及評價係示表6中。[Evaluation criteria] ◎. . . The change of imaging time satisfies 0.5<(T 2 /T 1 )<2.5; ○. . . The change of imaging time satisfies 0.5<(T 2 /T 1 )<3;×. . . The change in development time did not satisfy 0.5 < (T 2 / T 1 ) <3; T 1 , T 2 , (T2/T1) and evaluations obtained in this manner are shown in Table 6.

(實施例2~實施例7及比較例1~3)(Example 2 to Example 7 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3)

在實施例1之中,除了分別以如下述表6所示的高分子化合物來代替前述之高分子化合物以外,以和實施例1同樣地調製感光性薄膜感光性積層體,並和實施例1同樣地進行感度、解像度、保存安定性之評價。結果如表6所示。In the first embodiment, the photosensitive thin film photosensitive laminate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer compound shown in the following Table 6 was used instead of the polymer compound described above, and Example 1 was prepared. The evaluation of sensitivity, resolution, and preservation stability was performed in the same manner. The results are shown in Table 6.

另外,在下述表6之中,於比較例1所使用的高分子化合物(B-1)及比較例2所使用的高分子化合物(B-2)係分別按照下述方法進行合成。In the following Table 6, the polymer compound (B-1) used in Comparative Example 1 and the polymer compound (B-2) used in Comparative Example 2 were each synthesized according to the following method.

又,在下述表6之中,於比較例3所使用的高分子化合物(B-3)係採用以下述構造所表示的高分子化合物(Mw:8,000、酸價:80毫克KOH/克。In the polymer compound (B-3) used in Comparative Example 3, a polymer compound (Mw: 8,000, acid value: 80 mg KOH/g) represented by the following structure was used.

(合成例29)(Synthesis Example 29)

除了將合成例1中之2.4克的三苯基膦變更為2.4克的四乙基氯化銨以外,以同樣的做法進行合成而得到高分子化合物(B-1)。The polymer compound (B-1) was obtained by the same procedure except that 2.4 g of triphenylphosphine in Synthesis Example 1 was changed to 2.4 g of tetraethylammonium chloride.

(合成例30)(Synthesis Example 30)

除了將合成例28中之2.4克的三苯基膦變更為2.4克的四乙基氯化銨以外,以同樣的做法進行合成而得到高分子化合物(B-2)。The polymer compound (B-2) was obtained by the same procedure except that 2.4 g of triphenylphosphine in Synthesis Example 28 was changed to 2.4 g of tetraethylammonium chloride.

(實施例8)(Example 8)

除了將各成分按照下述之量予以摻混而調製成感光性組成物溶液之外,和實施例1同樣地製造感光性薄膜及感光性積層體。A photosensitive film and a photosensitive laminate were produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the components were blended in the following amounts to prepare a photosensitive composition solution.

〔感光性組成物溶液之各成分量〕.前述之高分子化合物1(在前述之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液中之固體成分質量為30質量%)......87.4質量份.二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(聚合性化合物)...14質量份.Irgacure 819(醯基氧化膦化合物、汽巴特殊化學品公司製、光聚合起始劑).............4質量份.艾波妥特YD-8170C(環氧當量155 g/eq.、雙酚F系環氧樹脂、鹼不溶性熱交聯劑).......11.3質量份.熱硬化劑(氰胍).............0.77重量份.氟系界面活性劑(梅伽法克F-176、大日本油墨化學工業(股)公司製、30質量%之2-丁酮溶液)....0.2質量份.硫酸鋇分散液(堺化學工業公司製、B-30)..80質量份.甲基乙基酮...............15質量份 [Amount of each component of the photosensitive composition solution] . The above polymer compound 1 (the solid content of the above 1-methoxy-2-propanol solution is 30% by mass). . . . . . 87.4 parts by mass. Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (polymeric compound). . . 14 parts by mass. Irgacure 819 (sulfonyl phosphine oxide compound, Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., photopolymerization initiator). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 parts by mass. Apodox YD-8170C (epoxy equivalent 155 g / eq., bisphenol F epoxy resin, alkali insoluble thermal crosslinker). . . . . . . 11.3 parts by mass. Thermal hardener (cyanide). . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.77 parts by weight. Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafak F-176, manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemicals Co., Ltd., 30% by mass 2-butanone solution). . . . 0.2 parts by mass. Barium sulfate dispersion (manufactured by Dai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., B-30). . 80 parts by mass. Methyl ethyl ketone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 parts by mass

另外,前述之硫酸鋇分散液係以和實施例1同樣的方法進行調製。Further, the above-described barium sulfate dispersion was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1.

在本實施例8之中,「熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比」係(11.3/155)/(87.4*0.3* 0.0022+29.2*0.3*0.8*0.0022)=1.0。In the eighth embodiment, "the molar ratio of the molar ratio of the crosslinking group of the thermal crosslinking agent / the acidic group of the binder" is (11.3/155) / (87.4 * 0.3 * 0.0022 + 29.2 * 0.3) *0.8*0.0022)=1.0.

又,在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的溶劑可溶性成分之總量係為0%,而在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量係為0.9%。Further, the total amount of the solvent-soluble component having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 0%, and the component amount of all the bases having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 0.9%.

又,對於之感光性薄膜及感光性積層體,和實施例1同樣地進行感度、解像度及保存安定性之評價。顯像後,以超高壓水銀燈、50 mJ/cm2 進行全面曝光。又,藉由以下之方法進行無電解金屬鍍敷耐性之評價。此等之結果如表7所示。Further, in the photosensitive film and the photosensitive laminate, the sensitivity, the resolution, and the storage stability were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. After the development, the full exposure was performed with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp at 50 mJ/cm 2 . Moreover, the evaluation of the electroless metal plating resistance was performed by the following method. The results of these are shown in Table 7.

<無電解金屬鍍敷耐性之評價>依照後述之工程,對於前述的試驗基板進行無電解金屬鍍敷,並對於該試驗基板進行外觀變化及使用賽珞玢(玻璃紙)黏著性膠帶的剝離試驗,按照以下之基準評價光阻皮膜之剝離狀態。<Evaluation of Electroless Metal Plating Resistance> Electrolytic metal plating was performed on the test substrate described above, and the test substrate was subjected to an appearance change and a peeling test using a cellophane (cellophane) adhesive tape. The peeling state of the photoresist film was evaluated in accordance with the following criteria.

-評價基準-○:外觀無變化,光阻皮膜全部沒有剝離;△:雖然外觀無變化,但光阻皮膜有些許剝離;×:可見到光阻皮膜浮腫,可認知到鍍敷沉陷,於剝離試驗時光阻皮膜大大地剝離。- Evaluation criteria - ○: No change in appearance, no peeling of the photoresist film; △: Although the appearance did not change, the photoresist film was slightly peeled off; ×: Visible film edema was observed, and plating subsidence was observed, and peeling was observed. The photoresist film was largely peeled off during the test.

--無電解金屬鍍敷工程--將形成耐焊圖案(永久圖案)之試驗基板,浸漬於30℃之酸性脫脂液(日本馬克達米特公司製、Metex L-5B之20質量%水溶液)3分鐘後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗3分鐘。-- Electroless metal plating project -- A test substrate in which a solder resist pattern (permanent pattern) is formed, and immersed in an acidic degreasing liquid at 30 ° C (20% by mass aqueous solution of Metex L-5B, manufactured by KK Damit, Japan) After 3 minutes, it was immersed in running water for 3 minutes.

其次,在室溫下,於14.3質量%之過硫酸銻水溶液中浸漬3分鐘後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗3分鐘;更且在室溫下,將試驗基板浸漬於10質量%之硫酸水溶液中歷1分鐘後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗30秒~1分鐘。Next, it was immersed in a 14.3 mass% aqueous solution of barium persulfate for 3 minutes at room temperature, and then immersed in running water for 3 minutes; and the test substrate was immersed in a 10 mass% sulfuric acid aqueous solution at room temperature. After 1 minute, it was immersed in running water and washed with water for 30 seconds to 1 minute.

接著,將此基板浸漬於30℃之觸媒(梅魯特庫斯公司製、金屬板活化劑350之10質量%水溶液)歷7分鐘後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗3分鐘;然後,於85℃之鎳鍍敷液(梅魯特庫斯公司製、金屬板Ni-865M、20容量%水溶液、pH:4.6)中浸漬20分鐘,並進行無電解鍍鎳後,在室溫下於10質量%之硫酸水溶液中浸漬1分鐘後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗30秒~1分鐘。Next, the substrate was immersed in a catalyst at 30 ° C (manufactured by Merlot Co., Ltd., a 10% by mass aqueous solution of a metal plate activator 350) for 7 minutes, and then immersed in running water for 3 minutes; then, at 85 The nickel plating solution (manufactured by Merut Couss Co., Ltd., metal plate Ni-865M, 20% by volume aqueous solution, pH: 4.6) was immersed for 20 minutes, and subjected to electroless nickel plating at room temperature at 10 mass. After immersing in a % sulfuric acid aqueous solution for 1 minute, it was immersed in running water and washed with water for 30 seconds to 1 minute.

接著,將試驗基板浸漬於75℃之金屬鍍敷液(奧野製藥工業公司製、OPC無電母液、pH:12~13、金屬鍍敷厚度:0.3微米)中歷4分鐘,進行無電解金屬鍍敷後,於流水中浸漬進行水洗3分鐘;然後更進一步地於60℃之溫水中浸漬3分鐘充分進行水洗後,再進行乾燥而得到經過無電解金屬鍍敷之試驗基板。Next, the test substrate was immersed in a metal plating solution (manufactured by Okuno Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., OPC electroless mother liquid, pH: 12 to 13, metal plating thickness: 0.3 μm) at 75 ° C for 4 minutes to carry out electroless metal plating. Thereafter, the mixture was immersed in running water for 3 minutes, and further immersed in warm water of 60 ° C for 3 minutes to be sufficiently washed with water, and then dried to obtain a test substrate subjected to electroless metal plating.

(實施例9~13)(Examples 9 to 13)

在實施例8之中,除了將前述之高分子化合物改為以下述表7所示的高分子化合物之外,以和實施例8同樣的做法製成感光性薄膜及感光性積層體。In the same manner as in Example 8, except that the polymer compound described above was changed to the polymer compound shown in Table 7 below, a photosensitive film and a photosensitive laminate were produced.

又,對於前述之感光性薄膜及感光性積層體,和實施例8同樣地進行感度、解像度、無電解金屬鍍敷耐性及保存安定性之評價。結果如表7所示。Further, in the photosensitive film and the photosensitive laminate, the sensitivity, the resolution, the electroless metal plating resistance, and the storage stability were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 8. The results are shown in Table 7.

(比較例4)(Comparative Example 4)

在實施例8之中,除了將前述之高分子化合物改為以下述的構造式(f)所示的高分子化合物(B-4,Mw:30,000、酸價:2.0 meq/g)來替代之外,以和實施例8同樣的做法製成感光性薄膜及感光性積層體。In the eighth embodiment, the polymer compound (B-4, Mw: 30,000, acid value: 2.0 meq/g) represented by the following structural formula (f) is replaced by the polymer compound described above. Further, a photosensitive film and a photosensitive laminate were produced in the same manner as in Example 8.

(實施例14)(Example 14)

除了將各成分按照下述之量予以摻混而調製成感光性組成物溶液之外,和實施例1同樣地製造感光性薄膜及感光性積層體。A photosensitive film and a photosensitive laminate were produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the components were blended in the following amounts to prepare a photosensitive composition solution.

〔感光性組成物溶液之各成分量〕.前述之高分子化合物1(在前述之1-甲氧基-2-丙醇溶液中之固體成分質量為30質量%)......87.4質量份.二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(聚合性化合物)...14質量份.下述構造式(g)所示之增感劑.......0.6質量份.Irgacure 907(汽巴特殊化學品公司製、含有胺基烷基之鹼基性光聚合起始劑...........1.5質量份.TEPIC-S(環氧當量99 g/eq.、難溶性環氧樹脂、鹼不溶性熱交聯劑)..............3.73質量份.熱硬化劑(氰胍).............0.77重量份.氟系界面活性劑(梅伽法克F-176、大日本油墨化學工業(股)公司製、30質量%之2-丁酮溶液)....0.2質量份.硫酸鋇分散液(堺化學工業公司製、B-30)..80質量份.甲基乙基酮...............15質量份 [Amount of each component of the photosensitive composition solution] . The above polymer compound 1 (the solid content of the above 1-methoxy-2-propanol solution is 30% by mass). . . . . . 87.4 parts by mass. Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (polymeric compound). . . 14 parts by mass. The sensitizer shown in the following structural formula (g). . . . . . . 0.6 parts by mass. Irgacure 907 (base-based photopolymerization initiator containing aminoalkyl group, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd. 1.5 parts by mass. TEPIC-S (epoxy equivalent 99 g/ Eq., poorly soluble epoxy resin, alkali-insoluble thermal crosslinking agent)..............3.73 parts by mass. Thermal hardener (cyanide)......... ....0.77 parts by weight. Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafak F-176, manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemicals Co., Ltd., 30% by mass of 2-butanone solution)....0.2 parts by mass . Barium sulfate dispersion (B-30, manufactured by Seiko Chemical Co., Ltd.): 80 parts by mass. Methyl ethyl ketone...15 parts by mass

另外,前述之硫酸鋇分散液係以和實施例1同樣的方法進行調製。Further, the above-described barium sulfate dispersion was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1.

在本實施例14之中,「熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比」係(3.73/99)/(87.4*0.3* 0.0022+29.2*0.3*0.8*0.0022)=0.52。In the present Example 14, "the molar ratio of the molar ratio of the crosslinking agent of the thermal crosslinking agent / the molar ratio of the binder" (3.73/99) / (87.4 * 0.3 * 0.0022 + 29.2 * 0.3) *0.8*0.0022)=0.52.

又,在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的溶劑可溶性成分之總量係為1.9%,而在部分構造上具有鹼性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量係為2.8%。Further, the total amount of the solvent-soluble component having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 1.9%, and the component amount of all the bases having a basic substituent in a partial structure was 2.8%.

對於之感光性薄膜及感光性積層體,和實施例1同樣地進行感度、解像度及保存安定性之評價。結果如表8所示。The photosensitive film and the photosensitive laminate were evaluated for sensitivity, resolution, and storage stability in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 8.

(實施例15及比較例15)(Example 15 and Comparative Example 15)

在實施例14之中,除了將前述高分子化合物的種類改為以下述表8所示者之外,以和實施例14同樣的做法製成感光性積層體。In the same manner as in Example 14, except that the type of the polymer compound was changed to that shown in Table 8 below, a photosensitive laminate was produced.

又,對於前述之感光性薄膜及感光性積層體,和實施例14同樣地進行感度、解像度及保存安定性之評價。結果如表8所示。Further, in the same manner as in Example 14, the photosensitive film and the photosensitive laminate were evaluated for the sensitivity, the resolution, and the storage stability. The results are shown in Table 8.

(實施例16)(Embodiment 16)

在實施例8之中,除了將4質量份之光聚合起始劑「Irgacure 819(醯基氧化膦化合物、汽巴特殊化學品公司製)」變更為3質量份之Irgacure 651(烷基苯酮型、汽巴特殊化學品公司製),更且進一步地將11.3質量份之鹼不溶性熱交聯劑「艾波妥特YD-8170C(環氧當量155 g/eq.、雙酚F系環氧樹脂)」變更為11.3質量份之「艾波妥特YDCN-701(環氧當量195 g/eq.、酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂)」之外,以和實施例8同樣的做法製成感光性薄膜及感光性積層體。In the eighth embodiment, 4 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator "Irgacure 819 (manufactured by sulfhydryl phosphine compound, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd.)" was changed to 3 parts by mass of Irgacure 651 (alkyl benzophenone). Type, Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd.), and further, 11.3 parts by mass of the alkali-insoluble thermal crosslinking agent "Apodote YD-8170C (epoxy equivalent 155 g / eq., bisphenol F-based epoxy) In the same manner as in Example 8, except that the resin was changed to 11.3 parts by mass of "Apotox YDCN-701 (epoxy equivalent: 195 g/eq., novolak type epoxy resin)". Film and photosensitive laminate.

對於此種感光性積層體,另外製做具有和實施例1同樣的圖案之玻璃製負光罩,使此種負光罩接觸於積層體上,以超高水銀燈、100 mJ/cm2 的曝光量進行曝光。然後,以和實施例1同樣的方法進行顯像、解像度之評價,並和實施例1同樣地對於前述之感光性薄膜進行保存安定性之評價。結果如表9所示。For the photosensitive laminate, a glass negative mask having the same pattern as in Example 1 was separately prepared, and the negative mask was brought into contact with the laminate to expose the ultrahigh mercury lamp to 100 mJ/cm 2 . The amount is exposed. Then, development and evaluation of the resolution were carried out in the same manner as in Example 1, and the storage stability of the photosensitive film was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 9.

(實施例17及比較例16)(Example 17 and Comparative Example 16)

在實施例16之中,除了將前述高分子化合物的種類改為以下述表9所示者之外,以和實施例16同樣的做法製成感光性積層體。In the same manner as in Example 16, except that the type of the polymer compound was changed to the one shown in the following Table 9, a photosensitive laminate was produced.

又,對於前述之感光性薄膜及感光性積層體,和實施例16同樣地進行感度、解像度及保存安定性之評價。結果如表9所示。Further, in the same manner as in Example 16, the photosensitive film and the photosensitive laminate were evaluated for sensitivity, resolution, and storage stability. The results are shown in Table 9.

由表6~9之結果,可明白:使用含有本發明之高分子化合物的實施例1~17之感光性組成物形成的感光層所成之感光性薄膜,保存安定性是高的;更且藉由實施例1~17之曝光方法所形成的永久圖案,不會損害感度及解像度,且能夠有效率地形成高精細之永久圖案(保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等)。From the results of Tables 6 to 9, it is understood that the photosensitive film formed by using the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive compositions of Examples 1 to 17 containing the polymer compound of the present invention has high storage stability; The permanent pattern formed by the exposure methods of Examples 1 to 17 can efficiently form a high-definition permanent pattern (a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, a solder resist pattern, etc.) without impairing the sensitivity and the resolution.

又,藉由實施例8~13可以判定:除了能夠得到上述性能以外,尚且能夠提供無電解金屬鍍敷耐性。Further, it can be judged from Examples 8 to 13 that in addition to the above properties, electroless metal plating resistance can be provided.

更且,因為使用普通且廉價的熱交聯劑而達成上述效果的緣故,所以能減輕熱交聯劑所需要的成本,並且可以擴大該熱交聯劑之選擇幅度。Further, since the above effects are achieved by using a common and inexpensive thermal crosslinking agent, the cost required for the thermal crosslinking agent can be alleviated, and the selection range of the thermal crosslinking agent can be expanded.

【產業可利用性】[Industrial Availability]

本發明之感光性組成物及感光性薄膜,由於能夠藉由含有指定的高分子化合物而可以有效率地形成感度、解像度及保存安定性優異、且高精細的圖案的緣故,所以能夠適合使用於保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等之永久圖案等的各種圖案形成、彩色濾光片、柱材、肋材、隔離片、隔牆等之液晶構造組件之製造、全息照相、微機器、驗證等之圖案形成用,特別是可以適合使用於印刷基板之永久圖案形成用途之上。The photosensitive composition and the photosensitive film of the present invention can be suitably used because they can form a high-definition pattern which is excellent in sensitivity, resolution, and storage stability by efficiently containing a predetermined polymer compound. Manufacturing of liquid crystal structural components such as various patterns such as a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a permanent pattern such as a solder resist pattern, a color filter, a pillar, a rib, a spacer, and a partition, a hologram, a micromachine, For pattern formation such as verification, it is particularly suitable for use in permanent pattern forming applications of printed substrates.

本發明之永久圖案形成方法,由於使用本發明之前述感光性組成物的緣故,所以可以適合使用於保護膜、層間絕緣膜及耐焊圖案等之永久圖案的各種圖案形成、彩色濾光片、柱材、肋材、隔離片、隔牆等之液晶構造組件之製造、全息照相、微機器、驗證等之圖案形成用,特別是可以適合使用於印刷基板之永久圖案形成用途上。Since the permanent pattern forming method of the present invention uses the photosensitive composition of the present invention, it can be suitably used for various pattern formation, color filters, and permanent patterns such as a protective film, an interlayer insulating film, and a solder resist pattern. For the formation of liquid crystal structural components such as pillars, ribs, separators, partition walls, etc., for the formation of patterns such as holograms, micromachines, and verification, it is particularly suitable for use in permanent pattern formation of printed substrates.

B...雷射光束B. . . Laser beam

P...光點P. . . light spot

10...圖案形成裝置10. . . Pattern forming device

12...感光材料、感光層12. . . Photosensitive material, photosensitive layer

14...移動平台14. . . mobile platform

16...腳部16. . . Foot

18...設置台18. . . Setting table

20...導件20. . . Guide

22...閘twenty two. . . brake

24...掃描器twenty four. . . scanner

26...感應器26. . . sensor

28...狹縫28. . . Slit

28a...上游側之狹縫28a. . . Slot on the upstream side

28b...下游側之狹縫28b. . . Slit on the downstream side

30...曝光頭30. . . Exposure head

3012 ...曝光頭30 12 . . . Exposure head

3021 ...曝光頭30 21 . . . Exposure head

32...曝光區域32. . . Exposure area

3212 ...曝光區域32 12 . . . Exposure area

3221 ...曝光區域32 21 . . . Exposure area

34...曝光完成區域34. . . Exposure completion area

36...數位微鏡片裝置(DMD)36. . . Digital microlens device (DMD)

38...纖維陣列光源38. . . Fiber array light source

40...透鏡系統40. . . Lens system

42...鏡片42. . . lens

44、46...組合透鏡44, 46. . . Combined lens

48...聚光透鏡48. . . Condenser lens

50...透鏡系統50. . . Lens system

52、54...透鏡52, 54. . . lens

56...SRAM單位(記憶體)56. . . SRAM unit (memory)

58...微鏡片58. . . Microlens

78、80、82...斜線覆蓋範圍78, 80, 82. . . Slash coverage

72、84、88、92...網點覆蓋範圍72, 84, 88, 92. . . Dot coverage

第1圖係顯示圖案形成裝置之一例的外觀之斜視圖。Fig. 1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of an example of a pattern forming device.

第2圖係顯示圖案形成裝置之掃描器的構成之斜視圖。Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a scanner of the pattern forming apparatus.

第3A圖係為顯示形成於感光層之被曝光面上的曝光完成區域之平面圖。Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an exposure completion region formed on the exposed surface of the photosensitive layer.

第3B圖係為顯示各曝光頭之曝光區域之排列的平面圖。Fig. 3B is a plan view showing the arrangement of the exposed areas of the respective exposure heads.

第4圖係顯示曝光頭之概略構成的一例之斜視圖。Fig. 4 is a perspective view showing an example of a schematic configuration of an exposure head.

第5A圖係顯示曝光頭之詳細構成的一例之上視圖。Fig. 5A is a top view showing an example of the detailed configuration of the exposure head.

第5B圖係顯示曝光頭之詳細構成的一例之側面圖。Fig. 5B is a side view showing an example of a detailed configuration of an exposure head.

第6圖為顯示第1圖之圖案形成裝置的DMD之一例的部分放大圖。Fig. 6 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of a DMD of the pattern forming apparatus of Fig. 1.

第7A圖係用以說明DMD之動作的斜視圖。Fig. 7A is a perspective view for explaining the action of the DMD.

第7B圖係用以說明DMD之動作的斜視圖。Fig. 7B is a perspective view for explaining the action of the DMD.

第8圖係顯示在曝光頭之安裝角度誤差及圖案有畸變時,被曝光面上之圖案產生偏差的例子之說明圖。Fig. 8 is an explanatory view showing an example in which the pattern on the exposed surface is deviated when the mounting angle error of the exposure head and the pattern are distorted.

第9圖係顯示1個DMD的曝光區域、與相對應的狹縫間之位置關係的上視圖。Fig. 9 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the exposure region of one DMD and the corresponding slit.

第10圖係用以說明使用狹縫來測定被曝光面上之光點位置的手法之上視圖。Figure 10 is a top view showing the use of a slit to measure the position of a spot on an exposed surface.

第11圖係顯示只有經選擇的微鏡片使用於曝光,結果改善產生於被曝光面上的圖案之偏差的狀態之說明圖。Fig. 11 is an explanatory view showing a state in which only the selected microlenses are used for exposure, and as a result, the state of the deviation of the pattern generated on the exposed surface is improved.

第12圖係顯示在鄰接的曝光頭間具有相對位置之偏離時,於被曝光面上之圖案產生偏差的例子之說明圖。Fig. 12 is an explanatory view showing an example in which a pattern on the surface to be exposed is deviated when there is a deviation in relative position between adjacent exposure heads.

第13圖係顯示鄰接的2個曝光頭之曝光區域、與相對應的狹縫間之位置關係的上視圖。Fig. 13 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the exposure regions of the adjacent two exposure heads and the corresponding slits.

第14圖係用以說明使用狹縫來測定曝光面上之光點位置的手法之上視圖。Fig. 14 is a view showing a top view of a method of measuring the position of a light spot on an exposure surface using a slit.

第15圖係顯示在第12圖的例子中只有經選擇的使用圖素實際動作,而得以改善產生於被曝光面上的圖案之偏差的狀態之說明圖。Fig. 15 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the deviation of the pattern generated on the exposed surface is improved only by the selected actual operation using the pixel in the example of Fig. 12.

第16圖係顯示在鄰接的曝光頭間具有相對位置之偏離及安裝角度誤差時,於被曝光面上之圖案產生偏差的例子之說明圖。Fig. 16 is an explanatory view showing an example in which the pattern on the surface to be exposed is deviated when there is a deviation in the relative position between the adjacent exposure heads and an error in the mounting angle.

第17圖係顯示於第16圖中只有使用經選擇的使用圖素部之曝光的說明圖。Fig. 17 is an explanatory view showing the exposure using only the selected pixel portion in Fig. 16.

第18A圖係顯示倍率偏差的例子之說明圖。Fig. 18A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the magnification deviation.

第18B圖係顯示光束徑偏差的例子之說明圖。Fig. 18B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the deviation of the beam diameter.

第19A圖係顯示使用單一曝光頭之參照曝光的第一例子之說明圖。Fig. 19A is an explanatory view showing a first example of reference exposure using a single exposure head.

第19B圖係顯示使用單一曝光頭之參照曝光的第一例子之說明圖。Fig. 19B is an explanatory view showing a first example of reference exposure using a single exposure head.

第20圖係顯示使用複數曝光頭之參照曝光的第一例子之說明圖。Fig. 20 is an explanatory view showing a first example of reference exposure using a complex exposure head.

第21A圖係顯示使用單一曝光頭之參照曝光的第二例子之說明圖。Fig. 21A is an explanatory view showing a second example of the reference exposure using a single exposure head.

第21B圖係顯示使用單一曝光頭之參照曝光的第二例子之說明圖。Fig. 21B is an explanatory view showing a second example of the reference exposure using a single exposure head.

第22圖係顯示使用複數曝光頭之參照曝光的第二例子之說明圖。Fig. 22 is an explanatory view showing a second example of reference exposure using a plurality of exposure heads.

Claims (20)

一種感光性組成物,其特徵在於:其係至少包括黏合劑、聚合性化合物、光聚合起始系化合物及熱交聯劑之感光性組成物;當在將前述感光性組成物積層於基體上,於25℃暗處下歷時20分鐘後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T1 ;而對於該被積層於前述基體上的感光性組成物,將該感光層置於40℃暗處下歷時72小時後,藉由顯像液除去被積層於前述基體上的該感光性組成物之未曝光部分所需的時間(最短顯像時間)表記為T2 之情況,係滿足0.5<T2 /T1 <3之關係,其中黏合劑係從在觸媒共存下將含有環狀醚基的聚合性化合物加成於高分子化合物之一部分的酸性基上而得之物、以及在觸媒共存下將含有羧基的聚合性化合物加成於高分子化合物之一部分或全部的環狀醚基上而得之物中任意選取的高分子化合物;且前述之觸媒係從酸性化合物及中性化合物之中任意選取。A photosensitive composition characterized by comprising at least a photosensitive composition of a binder, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization-initiating compound, and a thermal crosslinking agent; when the photosensitive composition is laminated on a substrate After 20 minutes in the dark at 25 ° C, the time required for removing the unexposed portion of the photosensitive composition deposited on the substrate by the developing solution (the shortest development time) is expressed as T 1 ; The photosensitive composition deposited on the substrate was placed in a dark portion at 40 ° C for 72 hours, and the photosensitive composition deposited on the substrate was removed by a developing solution. The time required for the exposed portion (the shortest development time) is expressed as T 2 , which satisfies the relationship of 0.5 < T 2 / T 1 < 3, wherein the binder is derived from a cyclic ether group in the presence of a catalyst. The polymerizable compound is added to an acidic group of a part of the polymer compound, and a polymerizable compound containing a carboxyl group is added to a part or all of the cyclic ether group of the polymer compound in the presence of a catalyst. Any choice The polymer compound; and the aforementioned catalyst is arbitrarily selected from the group consisting of an acidic compound and a neutral compound. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中黏合劑係包括在側鏈上具有酸性基和乙烯性不飽和鍵之高分子化合物。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the binder comprises a polymer compound having an acidic group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond in a side chain. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中黏合劑係包括在側鏈上具有酸性基、可含有雜環之芳香族基和乙烯性不飽和鍵之高分子化合物。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the binder comprises a polymer compound having an acidic group in a side chain, an aromatic group which may contain a hetero ring, and an ethylenically unsaturated bond. 如申請專利範圍第2項之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物含有0.5~3.0 meq/g之乙烯性不飽和鍵。 The photosensitive composition of claim 2, wherein the polymer compound contains an ethylenically unsaturated bond of 0.5 to 3.0 meq/g. 如申請專利範圍第2項之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物係在側鏈上具有羧基,且在高分子化合物中的前述羧基之含量係1.0~4.0 meq/g。 The photosensitive composition of claim 2, wherein the polymer compound has a carboxyl group in a side chain, and the content of the carboxyl group in the polymer compound is 1.0 to 4.0 meq/g. 如申請專利範圍第2項之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物之平均分子量係10,000以上而小於100,000。 The photosensitive composition of claim 2, wherein the polymer compound has an average molecular weight of 10,000 or more and less than 100,000. 如申請專利範圍第2項之感光性組成物,其中高分子化合物係含有20莫耳%以上之以下述構造式(I)所代表的構造單位; 但,在前述之構造式(I)中,R1 、R2 及R3 係代表氫原子或1價的有機基;L係代表有機基,即使沒有也可以;Ar係代表可含有雜環之芳香族基。The photosensitive composition of claim 2, wherein the polymer compound contains 20 mol% or more of a structural unit represented by the following structural formula (I); However, in the above structural formula (I), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group; L represents an organic group, if not, and Ar represents a heterocyclic ring. Aromatic group. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中聚合性化合物係包括具有1個以上的乙烯性不飽和鍵之化合物。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the polymerizable compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑 係從環氧化合物,氧雜環丁烷化合物、聚異氰酸酯化合物、使聚異氰酸酯化合物與嵌段劑反應而得到之化合物、三聚氰胺衍生物之中任意選擇的至少一種。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the thermal crosslinking agent It is at least one selected from the group consisting of an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, a polyisocyanate compound, a compound obtained by reacting a polyisocyanate compound with a block agent, and a melamine derivative. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑係鹼不溶性。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the thermal crosslinking agent is alkali-insoluble. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中熱交聯劑之交聯基的莫耳比/黏合劑之酸性基的莫耳比係0.1~1.5。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the molar ratio of the molar ratio of the crosslinking agent of the thermal crosslinking agent to the binder is 0.1 to 1.5. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其於感光性組成物中係存在著以下的至少任一種:部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的溶劑可溶性之成分的總量為5%以下、及部分構造上所具有鹼基性取代基的全部鹼基之成分量為7%以下。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein at least one of the following components is present in the photosensitive composition: a total amount of solvent-soluble components having a partial structural substituent is 5%. The component amount of all bases having a base substituent in the following structures and partial structures is 7% or less. 如申請專利範圍第12項之感光性組成物,其中鹼基性取代基係從1級~3級胺基、4級銨基、胺基三含有基、咪唑含有基、及胍胺基之中任意選取。The photosensitive composition of claim 12, wherein the base substituent is from a grade 1 to a grade 3 amine group, a grade 4 ammonium group, an amine group III The base group, the imidazole group, and the guanamine group are optionally selected. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中T1 為5~120秒,而T2 為5~240秒。The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein T 1 is 5 to 120 seconds, and T 2 is 5 to 240 seconds. 如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物,其中之光聚合起始劑係從醯基氧化膦系化合物及酮化合物之中任意選擇。 The photosensitive composition of claim 1, wherein the photopolymerization initiator is arbitrarily selected from the group consisting of a fluorenylphosphine oxide compound and a ketone compound. 一種感光性薄膜,其特徵在於:具有支撐體、與在該支撐體上之由如申請專利範圍第1項之感光性組成物形成的感光層。 A photosensitive film comprising a support and a photosensitive layer formed on the support by the photosensitive composition of claim 1 of the patent application. 如申請專利範圍第16項之感光性薄膜,其係長尺狀並捲成圓筒狀。 The photosensitive film of claim 16 of the patent application is formed into a long shape and rolled into a cylindrical shape. 一種永久圖案形成方法,其特徵在於:在將如申請專利範圍第1項所記載之感光性組成物塗布於基體表面上並予以乾燥而形成感光層之後,再進行曝光、顯像。 A permanent pattern forming method is characterized in that a photosensitive composition as described in claim 1 is applied onto a surface of a substrate and dried to form a photosensitive layer, followed by exposure and development. 一種永久圖案形成方法,其特徵在於:在加熱及加壓中的至少任一種之下,將如申請專利範圍第16項所記載之感光性薄膜積層於基體表面上之後,再進行曝光、顯像。 A permanent pattern forming method, characterized in that, after at least one of heating and pressurization, a photosensitive film as disclosed in claim 16 is laminated on a surface of a substrate, and then exposure and development are performed. . 一種印刷基板,其特徵在於:藉由如申請專利範圍第18項之永久圖案形成方法來形成永久圖案。 A printed substrate characterized by forming a permanent pattern by a permanent pattern forming method as in claim 18 of the patent application.
TW96107432A 2006-03-08 2007-03-05 Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, permanent pattern-forming method using the same and printing substrate TWI403837B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006063261A JP4711862B2 (en) 2006-03-08 2006-03-08 Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method, and printed circuit board

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200745750A TW200745750A (en) 2007-12-16
TWI403837B true TWI403837B (en) 2013-08-01

Family

ID=38474731

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW96107432A TWI403837B (en) 2006-03-08 2007-03-05 Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, permanent pattern-forming method using the same and printing substrate

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4711862B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20080104135A (en)
CN (1) CN101401039B (en)
TW (1) TWI403837B (en)
WO (1) WO2007102289A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009086015A (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-23 Hitachi Via Mechanics Ltd Maskless exposure apparatus
JP5232576B2 (en) * 2008-09-05 2013-07-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Method and composition for producing curable polymer compound, and planographic printing plate precursor
JP5393198B2 (en) * 2009-02-27 2014-01-22 東京応化工業株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition
TWI516507B (en) * 2010-06-01 2016-01-11 新日鐵住金化學股份有限公司 Thermocurable resin composition containing (meth) acrylate resin and cured article using the same
JP5817237B2 (en) * 2010-07-29 2015-11-18 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for forming cured film, and method for forming color filter
WO2012014580A1 (en) * 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 日立化成工業株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element using same, method for forming resist pattern, method for producing lead frame, printed wiring board, and method for producing printed wiring board
CN102378494B (en) * 2011-10-31 2014-03-26 深南电路有限公司 Resistance welding processing method for circuit board
WO2013084283A1 (en) * 2011-12-05 2013-06-13 日立化成株式会社 Method for forming protective film for touch panel electrodes, photosensitive resin composition, and photosensitive element
WO2013084282A1 (en) 2011-12-05 2013-06-13 日立化成株式会社 Method for forming resin cured film pattern, photosensitive resin composition, and photosensitive element
JP7275719B2 (en) * 2019-03-22 2023-05-18 富士フイルムビジネスイノベーション株式会社 Electrostatic charge image developing toner, electrostatic charge image developer, toner cartridge, process cartridge, image forming apparatus and image forming method
TWI829929B (en) * 2020-05-14 2024-01-21 奇美實業股份有限公司 Black photosensitive resin composition, black pattern, color filter, and liquid crystal display device

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005309247A (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-11-04 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern and method for forming the same

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1573545A (en) * 2003-06-20 2005-02-02 富士胶片株式会社 Light-sensitive sheet, light-sensitive layers, image pattern forming method, and wiring pattern forming method
TWI352875B (en) * 2003-08-15 2011-11-21 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transcription sheet, photosensitive
JP4489566B2 (en) * 2003-11-27 2010-06-23 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Curable resin composition, cured product thereof, and printed wiring board
JP4389582B2 (en) * 2003-12-26 2009-12-24 住友化学株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition
JP2006058821A (en) * 2004-08-24 2006-03-02 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Colored resin composition, color filter and liquid crystal display
JP2007197530A (en) * 2006-01-25 2007-08-09 Taiyo Ink Mfg Ltd Curable composition and cured product thereof

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005309247A (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-11-04 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern and method for forming the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2007102289A1 (en) 2007-09-13
CN101401039A (en) 2009-04-01
CN101401039B (en) 2012-06-20
JP4711862B2 (en) 2011-06-29
KR20080104135A (en) 2008-12-01
TW200745750A (en) 2007-12-16
JP2007240882A (en) 2007-09-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI403837B (en) Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, permanent pattern-forming method using the same and printing substrate
KR101411346B1 (en) Photosensitive composition, pattern forming material, photosensitive laminate, pattern forming apparatus and method of pattern formation
KR101381187B1 (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, and printed circuit board
TW200837500A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, producing method for permanent pattern, and printing substrate
JP4783678B2 (en) PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING THE SAME, PHOTOSENSITIVE FILM, PHOTOSENSITIVE LAMINATE, PERMANENT PATTERN FORMING METHOD, AND PRINTED BOARD
JP2007197390A (en) Oxime derivative, photosensitive composition, pattern-forming material, photosensitive laminate, pattern-forming device and method for forming pattern
JP2007310027A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, photosensitive laminate, permanent pattern forming method, and printed circuit board
JP2007093801A (en) Photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and pattern
JP2007139878A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and pattern
JP2007199205A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and pattern
JP4603496B2 (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, and method for forming permanent pattern and permanent pattern
JP2007047771A (en) Photosensitive film, method for producing the same and permanent pattern forming method
TW201003314A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, photosensitive laminate, method for forming permanent pattern, and printed board
JP2007226115A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film and permanent pattern forming method
JP2006235101A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern and method for forming the same
TWI403832B (en) Photo-sensitive composition, photo-sensitive film, photo-sensitive lamination, permanet pattern-forming method and printing substrate
TW200809406A (en) Light sensitive composition, light sensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and printing substrate
JP2007232789A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and permanent pattern
JP4546368B2 (en) Photosensitive composition, pattern forming material, photosensitive laminate, pattern forming apparatus and pattern forming method
JP4651534B2 (en) Pattern forming material, pattern forming apparatus and permanent pattern forming method
JP2007171246A (en) Photosensitive composition, pattern forming material, pattern forming apparatus and pattern forming method
JP2007286480A (en) Pattern forming method
JP2006065000A (en) Photosensitive composition for sandblast resist, sandblast resist film using the same, and sandblast resist pattern forming method
JP2007093793A (en) Photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method and pattern
KR20080092433A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive film, permanent pattern forming method, and printed board

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees